Camera system

ABSTRACT

Most of the elements constituting this camera system consists of digital circuits, whereby a central processing unit is built in this camera system in such a manner that various kinds of photographic modes are possible without increasing the number of the elements.

This is a continuation of application, Ser. No. 737,771 filed Nov. 1,1976 now U.S. Pat. No. 4,304,477.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

The present invention relates to a camera system, particularly to asuperior camera system which meets various sufficiently high and widerequirements placed to the camera.

2. Description of the Prior Art

When we think of a camera device for taking a picture, the photographicsystem as total system can not be disregarded. Waht is called thephotographic system here is the combination of the five elements, namelythe object system, the projection system, the recording system, theadjusting system and the observation system.

It is well known that each of the above mentioned system makes animportant factor for constituting the photographic system. Hereby theobject system means the things for making the photographic object, whichis generally called the object to be photographed. This includes all ofthe object field appearing on the picture plane. Further the projectionsystem serves to form the optical image of the above mentioned objectsystem on the next recording system, including the two system, namelythe optical system including lenses and the body system includingvarious mechanisms. Then the recording system is the one for recordingthe optical image formed by means of the above mentioned projectionsystem in a form in accordance with the purpose, whereby in case of theordinary photographic system the image generally assumes the form of theoptical image so as to be visualized, while depending upon the purposethe image assumes, the form of the relief. Further even in case of thevisualized image, other light sensing means than the so calledphotographic light sensitive material participates in many cases so thatit is also possible to think of an image system with the recordingsystem as center. The adjusting system means the process for completingthe most effective photographic image for the next last observationsystem out of the recording system, by adding some energy to the fixedimage obtained in the above mentioned recording system. Further theobservation system means for completing the photographic image obtainedthrough the above mentioned adjusting system as human visual phenomenon.

Hereby the important system for constituting the ordinary camera deviceis the projection system, whereby the control operation of thisprojection system has something important to do with the object system,the recording system, the adjusting system and the observation system,being greatly influenced by means of the informations or the fed backinformations from these systems. In consequence the camera device oftenmeans the above mentioned projection system, whereby it would beessential to establish a total system as effective photographic system,taking the connections with other system sufficiently intoconsideration, in order to constitute the camera device.

When such a camera device is thought of from the view point of thephotographic work on the actual spot, the problem of the operabilitywhich has one of the most important connection with the photographer whois the subject of the projection system should be pointed out beside theproblem of the optical and the mechanical precision, or of theefficiency.

The projection system, namely the camera device can, as has already beenexplained, be divided into two systems, namely the optical system andthe body system, whereby their efficiencies are different in accordancewith the kinds of the camera device. Now in case of the ordinary singlereflex camera as one example, the optical system includes the focusingefficiency and the aperture adjusting efficiency while the body systemincludes the shutter efficiency and the finder efficiency. Thesefunctions have an important relation with the operability of the cameradevice with respect to the aperture value deciding operation, theexposure time deciding operation, the focal distance deciding operation,the framing operation and so on.

Out of the above mentioned operations, the operation for deciding theaperture value and that for deciding the exposure time are mutuallyconnected as the operations for deciding the exposure amount, while theyhave different effects for deciding the exposure conditions so that itis necessary to operate them, selecting them properly. To explain morein detail at the time of taking a picture the shutter is operated afterthe focusing operation, the framing operation and the exposure decidingoperation, whereby it is general to control the aperture value and theshutter speed in order to control the exposure. However, the originalpurpose for controlling the aperture value is to decide the object fielddepth, namely the aperture value should be selected in order to obtainthe standing out effect of the main object by making use of theout-focusing effect. On the other hand, the shutter speed should beselected to prevent the vibration of the camera or on the contrary togive a proper movement so as to obtain an emotional picture. Namely atthe time of taking a picture it is thought that the aperture value andthe shutter speed are the variables to be selected independently fromeach other.

Now let us think of a camera device consisting of the combination of alens with a diaphragm mechanism whose F-value varies from F₁ (APEXvalue: AV=0) to F32 (APEX value: AV=10), namely an optical system, witha body with a shutter mechanism whose shutter time varies from 1 sec.(APEX value: TV=0) to 1/2000 sec. (APEX value: TV=11), namely a bodysystem. Then the control range of the exposure amount covers altogether22 steps, ranging from the exposure amount EV=0 whereby the F-number is1, while the shutter time is 1 sec. to the exposure amount EV=21 wherebythe F-number is 32, while the shutter time is 1/2000 sec. On the otherhand there are 11 steps in the F-numbers while there are 12 steps in theshutter time so that the number of their combination amounts to 132altogether. Despite of the 132 kinds of the combination, the variationof the exposure amount is summarized into 22 steps as has already beenexplained, when only the exposure amount is taken into consideration,whereby, however, in the photographic system the aperture value and theshutter time have an efficiency quite independent from each otherespecially for the photographic image in the observation system so thatthey have to be selected in a proper way.

On the other hand, the exposure amount is a factor having a veryimportant relation with all of the systems in the photographic system,more particularly in form of the brightness with the object system, inform of the selection of the aperture value and the shutter speed withthe projection system, in form of the sensitivity with the recordingsystem, in form of the increase respectively decrease of the sensitivitywith the adjustment system and in form of the tone of the photographicimage such as high key tone, key tone with the observation system.

In consequence it goes without saying that the exposure amount should beconsidered in connection with the photographic system as a whole. Nowlet us consider the projection system, namely the camera device only. Incase the exposure amount EV=11 is desired to be obtained, there are 11combinations of the aperture values with the shutter times as follows:(F1: 1/2000 sec.) (F1.4: 1/1000 sec.) (F2: 1/500 sec.) (F2.8: 1/250sec.) (F4: 1/125 sec.) (F5.6: 1/60 sec.) (F8: 1/30 sec.) (F11: 1/15sec.) (F16: 1/8 sec.) (F22: 1/4 sec.) and (F32: 1/2 sec.). Theoreticallyany one of the above combination gives the same exposure amount,whereby, however, as has already been explained, the aperture value andthe shutter time does not work only as the factor for controlling theexposure amount and the aperture value directly acts on the object fielddepth and the image description while the shutter time directly acts onthe description of the object in motion and so on. Although they givethe same exposure amount, the combination of F.sub. 1 with 1/2000 sec.gives a photographic effect on the photographic image given by theobservation system in a different way from that of F32 with 1/2 sec.when the above mentioned conditions are taken into consideration.

Now let us think of a camera device with the automatic exposure controldevice, namely an AE (automatic exposure) camera from the abovementioned view point.

The AE camera is a camera device including a mechanism for automaticallycontrolling the aperture value, the shutter time or their combinationnecessary for obtaining the proper or the desired exposure amount out ofthe brightness of the object and the sensitivity of the film, whereby incase of the manual camera device it is necessary to take up variousphotographic conditions, taking various factors into consideration,especially it is necessary for the photographer to select a properaperture value and a proper exposure time suited for the photographicpurpose out of the information of the object brightness measured bymeans of the exposure meter and the film sensitivity, while in case ofthe AE camera the photographer can space miscellaneous works at the timeof taking a picture so as to enable an efficient and rapid photographyso that the camera is becoming widely used.

Further the AE camera can spare complicated operation for obtaining aproper exposure amount by deciding the aperture value and the shuttertime in such a manner that the operability of the camera device can beincreased largely, while the aperture value and the shutter time to beselected for the same exposure amount are the factors of the charactersabsolutely different from each other so that much is discussed of thesystem.

The systems known as the AE camera at present are the following three.

The first one is the so called shutter time priority system forobtaining the proper exposure by way of automatically controlling theaperture value of the photographic lens as the operation result of thebrightness of the object, the shutter time optionally decided by thephotographer, the film sensitivity, whereby the shutter time, the filmsensitivity and so on are given in advance.

The second one is the so called aperture value priority system forobtaining the proper exposure by way of automatically controlling theshutter time as the operation result of the brightness of the object,the aperture value optionally given by the photographer, the filmsensitivity and so on whereby the shutter time, the film sensitivity andso on are given in advance.

The third one is the so called program system for obtaining the properexposure by way of obtaining the necessary exposure amount as theoperation result of the object brightness, the film sensitivity and soon so as to select the predetermined combination of the aperture valueof the photogaphic lens and the shutter time for obtaining the abovementioned exposure amount, whereby neigher the shutter time nor theaperture value is decided by the photographer.

Each of the above mentioned system has its own features and has beenbrought into practice while it is also the fact that each of them hasits own shortcoming.

In case of the above mentioned first system, namely the shutter speedpriority system there is given a freedom that the shutter time can beoptionally selected in advance so that in case of the speedy object suchas for the snap photography or of the object in motion or of thetelephotography in which there is much possibility for unstable manualholding the shorter shutter time can be selected in such a manner thatthe movement of the object or the unstable manual camera holding can betaken into consideration, while the object field depth has to besubjected to the aperture value of the photographic lens automaticallyoperated in the camera device in accordance with the shutter time set inadvance, so that this can not be said to be a proper exposure controlsystem at the time of taking a picture of a landscape or of a still lifewhereby the object field depth plays an important part in making apicture or at the time of making use of the object field depth.

Further in case of the second system, namely the aperture value prioritysystem quite contrary to the above mentioned first system for the objectof the landscape or of the still life or for the object for which theobject field depth is desired to be made use of the object field depthcan be taken into consideration while the shutter time can not beselected optionally by the photographer so that in case at the time oftaking a picture of the object in quick motion with the manually heldcamera device the slow shutter time is given as the result of theoperation control there is a danger that an unwilling photographicresult would be obtained, whereby therefore this can not be said to be aproper exposure control system for the object in quick motion or at thetime of taking a picture with the manually held camera device or for theobject for which the object field depth effect is desired to beobtained.

Further, in case of the above mentioned third system, namely the programsystem the combination of the aperture value of the photographic lenswith the shutter time is decided unconditionally for a brightness of anobject, in such a manner that only the proper exposure is taken intoconsideration so that the photographic conditions can not be selectedoptionally by the photogaphy. In consequence the above mentioned programsystem is applied to the simple middle class camera, whereby this isconsidered to a remarkably effective system because the exposure amountcan automatically be selected for a wide range, while for the aperturevalue priority system AE camera and the shutter time priority system AEcamera much is discussed as to the merits and the shortcomings asmentioned above.

On the other hand for the AE camera it can not be disregarded that thereare also the following opinions.

Namely in case of the AE camera the shutter time setting dial is at theposition equivalent to the aperture value setting ring, whereby in theAPEX system series the shutter time TV and the aperture value AV are inthe following relations for the exposure amount;

    EV=TV+AV                                                   (1)

so that when the shutter time setting dial is handled the aperture valueis varied in order to obtain a certain exposure amount while theaperture setting ring is handled the shutter time is varied. Inconsequence either the shutter time setting dial or the aperture settingring is hand the result is the same, namely there is no need fordividing the case into two.

For example the aperture value priority AE camera known at present issurely the aperture value priority AE camera in case the shutter timeautomatically controlled is not informed of to the photographer at all,whereby in case the shutter time automatically controlled is displayedin the view finder and the exposure is controlled while the eye is puton the view finder, no matter whether the aperture setting ring or theshutter time setting dial is operated the exposure is controlled whilethe displayed shutter time is observed in such a manner that the effectis same as in case the shutter time setting dial is handled and thecamera can be considered to be a shutter time priority AE camera in thismeaning.

Namely the aperture value priority system AE camera and the shutter timepriority system AE camera are reversible in their position dependingupon how to use and how to think.

To summarize the above, the aperture value of the photographic lens andthe shutter time are the factors very important for deciding theexposure amount so that when the automatic exposure control efficiencyis accorded to the camera device it is necessary to treat the aperturevalue and the shutter time equally. This is a problem to be especiallythought over because the reason for according the automatic exposureefficiency to the camera device is not only for simplification of thecamera handling but also for increasing snap photographic efficiency aswell as for allowing the photographer to concentrate himself more on theframing at the time of the camera handling.

Further before discusing about the exposure amount, let us consider twosystems, namely the object system and the recording system between whichthe camera device as the projection system is located.

At the time of taking a picture it is necessary for the object system,namely the object field to have its own brightness, called the objectbrightness and represented BV in APEX system series. Further therecording system, for example the photosensitive film has a sensibility,called the film speed normally represented ASA by SV in the APEX systemseries.

As is well known, in the APEX system series the object brightness BV andthe film speed SV are the factors for deciding the exposure amount EV inaccordance with the following relation

    BV+SV=EV                                                   (2)

Hereby the upper and the lower limit of the EV range settable in thecamera device, namely in the projection system, can be made infinite bymaking the shutter time infinitely long or by providing at thephotographic lens for attenuating the light, whereby from the view pointof the proper exposure condition there must be the limit.

In consequence, at the time of taking a picture of an object field withthe low brightness, namely the BV value is low while the exposure amountis let to be an amount to be decided by the combination of the aperturevalue with the shutter time for giving a proper exposure condition, itis sufficient to make the film speed SV larger as is clear from therelation (2). On the other hand at the time of taking an object fieldwith the high brightness, naturally it is sufficient to make the filmspeed SV smaller. This is an important role in the recording system ofthe photographic system, while, seen from the side of the camera device,the recording system can only participate in the film support, the filmexchange or the film feeding and not in the alternation of thesensitivity. The only one that is possible is to prepare a film withultra high sensitivity and to put film with various permiabilityselectively into the optical path of the projection system so as toalter the sensitivity of the film in an equivalent way, whereby with thepresent technical level there is a limit in raising the sensitivity ofthe film so that it is not easy to apply the above method.

On the other hand, when it is desired to obtain a constant exposureamount while the film sensitivity SV is let to be constant, it isnecessary to alter the brightness of the object, which is the well knownlighting.

Although various methods for the lighting can be thought of, now let ustake up the speed light used most generally now in connection with thecamera device.

The intensity of the light amount of the speed light device is calledthe guide number, whereby generally the aperture value of the lens isdecided out of the distance up to the object and the above mentionedguide number. However, quite recently it is in many cases tried toobtain the proper exposure amount automatically even at the time oftaking a picture with the speed light device, whereby a system inaccordance with which the light reflected from the object field isdetected so as to stop the lighting as soon as the amount of thereflected light reaches a certain determined value or the guide numberis variable has recently been brought into practice in order that theapplication of the camera device is enlarged while the freedom forframing is increased. Although such a speed light device constitutes theobject system in the photographic system, it is necessary that the speedlight device should operate in close connection with the camera deviceas the projection system because its lightening time is remarkablyshort, whereby such a device as never disturbs the operability of thecamera device nor decreases the freedom of the framing by thephotographer is especially desired.

Below the framing operation and the focusing operation will be discussedamong the camera operation.

It is general that with the exception of special cases the framingoperation as well as the focusing operation is carried out through theview finder at the time of operating the camera device. Hereby the mostbasic effect of the so called view finder is to allow the photographerto confirm the image of the object to be projected on the film plane asthe view finder image, namely to decide the framing at the time oftaking a picture. However, at present it is also general to make use ofthe view finder as the detector of the focusing of the object.

Further in case of the single reflex camera the efficiency forconfirming the out-focusing state of the picture plane as the whole isadded, while in case of the camera with a built in light measuringmechanism the element for confirming the measured light amount or thelight measuring part is added.

As mentioned above the view finder plays an important part in the camerahandling and can be said to have an important relation with theoperability of the camera, for the most of the camera operationincluding the framing and the focussing operation as the basic operationis carried out through the view finder.

In consequence the information centralizing view finder has becomewidely adopted in such a manner that the photographer can obtain all ofthe photographic informations through the view finder, whereby theseinformation have to be displayed in a limited space so that the easinessof the observation and the confirmation of the informations is required.

Further the application of the camera device has been extended into therange of the low brightness so that it has become necessary that theinformations can be confirmed even in the dark place in the view finderjust in the same way as in the bright place.

Among the camera operation, the framing operation and the focusingoperation have a close connection with the portability of the camerabody and the operability of the parts. Namely at the time of taking apicture it is necessary that the framing is decided through the viewfinder while the camera body is being held in the hands, while thefocusing is carried out by operating the distance ring of the lens andthe shutter is released at the desired time point after the operationfor deciding the exposure and others, so that it is necessary to arrangethe parts in a rational way so as not to prevent the operability ofother parts. Although at times this is restricted connected with themechanical arrangement of the camera device, the improvement of theoperability is a problem to be treated with the special case because thesubject in the projection system in the photographic system is thephotographer.

To speak more particularly as to the operability, the projection systemserves to fix a certain moment in the recording system so that it isessential that an absolute counter-measures against the misoperation orthe mishandling should be carried out.

As mentioned above, the operability of the camera device can be largelyimproved by organically combining the basic operations such as theoperation for deciding the exposure, the framing operation and thefocusing operation with other auxiliary operation.

In consequence what is required for the camera device as the projectionsystem constituting a large system as the photographic system is toconstitute a large sub-system capable of realizing the largestefficiency of the projection system basing upon the close connectionwith other system, whereby for example the automatic exposure controlshould be realized in such a manner that the efficiency of every partsof the camera device can alway be realized in a sufficient way, whileall the other auxiliary mechanism should be able to operate in the bestway.

Thus the view point of system has become necessary for the cameradevice, whereby a new demand takes place for a new camera system capableof meeting the requirement of the system in the total system as thephotographic system.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

A purpose of the present invention is to offer a camera systempresenting sufficient efficiencies for constituting the sub-system asthe projection system in the total system as the photographic system.

Another purpose of the present invention is to offer a camera systemcapable of securing the sufficient operability for the photographer asthe subject and at the same time of realizing the photographer'sintention in the picture.

Further another purpose of the present invention is to offer a camerasystem presenting an automatic exposure control mechanism forautomatically controlling the decision of the exposure amount.

Further another purpose of the present invention is to offer a compactand economic camera system presenting the automatic exposure controlmechanism with priority on both aperture value and the shutter time,whereby the shutter time priority system or the aperture value prioritysystem can optionally be selected in such a manner that the propercontrol system can freely be selected so as to meet the exposurecondition desired by the photographer.

Further another purpose of the present invention is to offer a camerasystem presenting the speed light efficiency to be organically combinedwith the camera body so as to give an efficient and suitable exposureamount.

Further another purpose of the present invention is to offer a camerasystem presenting an efficiency for effectively displaying to thephotographer as many informations as possible in the view finder for theframing and the focusing.

Further another purpose of the present invention is to offer a camerasystem, whereby the operability as well as the efficiency at the time oftaking a picture is greatly improved, by arranging the parts for workingat the time of operating the camera device in such a manner that theparts are combined with each other efficiently and the organically.

Further another purpose of the present invention is to offer a camerasystem applicable to all the types of the cameras, whereby variouscamera operations or efficiencies peculiar to the camera device canoptionally be selected by constituting most of the control parts withthe digital electrical circuits which can be integrated and at the sametime introducing the sequence controlability.

Further another purpose of the present invention is to offer a compactand economical camera system applicable also to the single reflex camerapresenting through the lens measuring system (hereinafter called TTLlight measuring system) and suited for the series production.

Further other purposes of the present invention will be disclosed inaccordance with the explanations to be made below concerning theembodiments.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIGS. 1(a-f) show six views of the camera device to be applied to anembodiment of the camera system in accordance with the presentinvention.

FIG. 2 shows the lens device 2 and the camera body 4 of the cameradevice shown in FIG. 1 in separated perspective view.

FIG. 3 shows the operation of each lever in the state in which someaperture value is present at the side of the lens device 2.

FIG. 4 shows the operation of each lever in the state in which noaperture value is preset at the side of the lens device 2.

FIGS. 5(a-c) show three views of an embodiment of the speed light deviceto be applied to the camera system in accordance with the presentinvention.

FIG. 6 shows an external light measuring instrument to be applied to thecamera system in accordance with the present invention in perspectiveview.

FIG. 7 shows an incident light exposure meter to be applied to thecamera system in accordance with the present invention in perspectiveview.

FIG. 8 shows an embodiment of the motor drive device to be applied tothe camera system in accordance with the present invention inperspective view.

FIG. 9 shows the finder information seen through the finder window 13 ofthe camera device.

FIGS. 10(a-f) show examples of the finder informations shown in FIG. 9.

FIG. 11(A) shows a diagram of the photographic modes at the time of thespeed light photography.

FIG. 11(B) shows a logical diagram of the relation between thephotographic modes of the camera device.

FIG. 12 shows a concrete disposition for taking up the digital datarelative to the film sensitivity out of the ASA sensitivity setting dial40.

FIG. 13 shows a time chart for explaining the state of the timing pulsesTB₁ -TB₆.

FIG. 14 shows a concrete composition for taking up the informations asto the smallest aperture value of the lens device 2, the state of theaperture ring and the information as to the diaphragm driving lever.

FIG. 15 shows a comparison table of the grey code with the binary code.

FIG. 16 shows a principle of the converter circuit of the grey code intothe binary code.

FIG. 17 shows a logical diagram of the operation of the Flip-Flop shownin FIG. 16.

FIG. 18 shows a concrete disposition for taking up the data set by meansof the dial 34 and the information as to the state of the mode switchingover switch 38.

FIG. 19 shows a concrete disposition to take up the largest aperturevalue of the lens device 2.

FIG. 20 shows a table of the input timing of various datas andinformations.

FIGS. 21 and 22 show concrete disposition for taking up the state ofvarious kinds of switches.

FIG. 23 shows a concrete disposition for detecting the displacementamount of the AE lever 94.

FIG. 24 shows a block diagram of the speed light photographic device.

FIG. 24A shows a detailed circuit diagram of the speed lightphotographic device shown in FIG. 24.

FIG. 25 shows a block diagram of the external light measuringinstrument.

FIG. 26 shows a block diagram of the incident light exposure meter.

FIG. 27 shows a block diagram of the camera system in accordance withthe present invention.

FIG. 28 shows a composition for explaining the efficiency of eachmechanism of the camera system shown in FIG. 27.

FIG. 29 shows a table for explaining the relation between the variousphotographic modes by means of the TTL light measurement and of theexternal light measurement and corresponding operation routines.

FIG. 30 shows a block diagram of the control circuit of the camerasystem in accordance with the present invention.

FIG. 31 shows a composition of the generating circuit of the clockpulse.

FIG. 32 shows a time chart for showing the wave forms of the outputpulses out of the system pulse generator.

FIG. 33 shows a concrete composition of the system pulse generator.

FIG. 34 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4029.

FIG. 35 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4028.

FIG. 36 shows a detailed circuit composition of the set circuit 520.

FIG. 37 shows a detailed circuit composition of the grey-binaryconverter.

FIG. 38 shows a detailed circuit composition of the I.C. circuit elementCD4035.

FIG. 39 shows a logic composition of the transmission gate shown in FIG.38.

FIG. 40 shows a block diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4042.

FIG. 41 shows a block diagram of the I.C. circuit element MC14539.

FIG. 42 shows a truth value table of the I.C. circuit element MC14539.

FIG. 43 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element MC14539.

FIG. 44 shows a concrete circuit composition of the signal assortingcircuit and the doubling circuit.

FIG. 45 shows a detailed circuit composition of the condition signalmemory circuit.

FIG. 46 shows a timing chart for explaining how to detect the bulbsignal.

FIG. 47 shows a logic diagram for explaining the CU and the AO signal.

FIG. 48 shows a detailed block diagram of the input control part.

FIG. 49 shows a block diagram of the I.C. circuit element MC14520.

FIG. 50 shows a logic diagram of one of the counters shown in FIG. 49.

FIG. 51 shows the compositions of the counter 558 and of the Flip-Flops560 and 562 by means of the I.C. circuit element MC14520 shown in FIG.49.

FIG. 52 shows a composition of the buffer register 564 by means of thecombination of the I.C. circuit element CD4035.

FIG. 53 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element MC14512.

FIG. 54 shows the trouth value table of the I.C. circuit element shownin FIG. 53.

FIG. 55 shows a time chart for explaining the operation of the inputcontrol part.

FIGS. 56 and 57 show a time chart for explaining the state of the A-Dconversion at the input control part.

FIG. 58 shows a logic composition of the input pass selector 578.

FIG. 59 shows a time chart for explaining the operation of theFlip-Flops F18 and F19 shown in FIG. 58.

FIG. 60 shows a block diagram of the condition register 574.

FIG. 61 shows a concrete circuit composition of the circuit shown inFIG. 60 by means of the I.C. circuit element.

FIG. 62 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4015.

FIG. 63 shows a detailed circuit composition of the signal switch overcircuit and D register.

FIG. 64 shows a block diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4021.

FIG. 65 shows a partial block diagram of the control system of theinstruction ROM504 and of the logic circuit 598.

FIG. 66 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4019.

FIG. 67 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4024.

FIG. 68 shows a block diagram of the instruction ROM504.

FIGS. 69(A and B) show charts for explaining the output codes of theinstruction ROM504.

FIGS. 70(a-h) show comparison tables between the address of theinstructions ROM504 and the instructions as well as the operand codes.

FIG. 71 shows the composition of the output logic circuit of the addressdecoder 600.

FIG. 72 shows a block diagram of the I.C. circuit element MC14514.

FIG. 73 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element MC14514.

FIG. 74 shows a logic diagram of the logic circuit 598.

FIG. 75 shows a detailed circuit composition of the data selector 502and the fixed tenter ROM534 as well as the circuit for taking up thelargest aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens 2 to be used.

FIG. 76 shows a block diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4013.

FIG. 77 shows a logic diagram of the logic circuit 592.

FIG. 78 shows a block diagram of the multiplexer 594.

FIG. 79 shows a logic diagram of the operation circuit 500.

FIG. 80 shows a logic diagram of the operation circuit 596.

FIG. 81 shows a table for explaining the signal and the data of the BASline, the input BAS line and the output BAS line.

FIG. 82 shows a detailed circuit diagram of the synchronization circuit660.

FIG. 83 shows an output timing chart of the synchronization circuitshown in FIG. 82.

FIG. 84 shows a detailed circuit composition including the multiplexer610 and the output control register 622.

FIG. 85 shows a detailed logic composition of the circuit for taking upthe data for display.

FIG. 86 shows a block diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4032.

FIG. 87 shows a logic diagram of the I.C. circuit element CD4032.

FIG. 88 shows an operation timing chart of the circuit shown in FIG. 85.

FIG. 89 shows a detailed block diagram of the display control circuit624.

FIG. 90 shows a plane view of the digital display device 402.

FIG. 91 shows a detailed logic diagram for taking up the data forcontrol.

FIG. 92 shows a flow chart for explaining the operation of the outputcontrol part.

FIG. 93 shows a sequence explanation chart basing upon the flow chartshown in FIG. 91.

FIG. 94 shows a detailed composition of the shutter time controlregister 614, the constant generating circuit 616, the select gate 618and the frequency dividing circuit 620.

FIG. 95 shows a block diagram of the I.C. circuit element MC14536.

FIG. 96 shows a detailed composition of the shutter time controlregister 626, the diaphragm closing step number control register 628,the data selector 632, the down counter 642 and the select gate 640.

FIG. 97 shows a detailed circuit composition of the control signalgenerating circuit 646.

FIG. 98 shows a circuit composition of the drive control circuit for theLED display device.

FIG. 99 shows a comparison table between the datas and the binary codes.

FIG. 100 shows a comparison table between the input smallest aperturevalue of the vignetting error ROM 528 and the binary codes of the outputvignetting error.

FIG. 101 shows respectively a comparison table between the binary codesand the display codes of the aperture value display decoder ROM 702, theshutter time display decoder ROM 704 and the signal display decoder ROM706.

Below the present invention will be explained more in detail inaccordance with the accompanying drawings.

DETAILED EXPLANATION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 shows six views of the camera device to which an embodiment ofthe camera system in accordance with the present invention is applied,whereby;

FIG. 1(a) shows a front view,

FIG. 1(b) shows a plane view,

FIG. 1(c) shows a bottom view,

FIG. 1(d) shows a view seen from the right side,

FIG. 1(e) shows a view seen from the left side,

FIG. 1(f) shows a view seen from behind.

The camera device shown in the drawing relates to a single reflex cameraincluding an automatic exposure control mechanism with priority on bothaperture value and shutter time of TTL light measuring system, wherebythe components are disposed in such a manner that the weight is put ontheir operability.

This camera device consists of the lens device 2 as optical system andthe body 4 as mechanical system, whereby various combination ofdifferent lens devices with the camera system is possible in a similarway to the conventional single reflex camera so as to enable a widerange of photography.

The lens device 2 includes the distance adjusting ring 6 and theaperture adjusting ring 8, whereby the lens device 2 is mounted on thebody 4 by means of the clamping ring 10. Hereby the object image formingposition of this lens device 2 can be changed by means of the distanceadjusting ring 6, namely the focusing operation is possible while theaperture value can be preset by means of the aperture adjusting ring 8.Hereby the preset of the aperture value means the setting of theaperture value indication 9 provided around the aperture adjusting ring8 at the index 7 provided on the lens barrel of the lens device 2,whereby in this state the lens device 2 is in the totally opened state.In this way the preset aperture value is obtained by closing thediaphragm blades of the lens device 2 down to the preset position bymeans of the driving power supplied from the camera body 4 at the timeof exposure by releasing the shutter. However, in principle the weightof the operability of this camera device is put on the automatic controlcontrolability so that the aperture adjusting ring 8 is so designed thatthe aperture value can be preset from the side of the body 4 when themark 12 provided around the aperture adjusting ring 8 is set at theindex 7, whereby this mechanism plays an essential part of the aperturecontrol of this camera device. Further this lens device 2 includes amechanism for transmitting the information such as the aperture value ofthe totally opened diaphragm to the side of the camera body 4. Thismechanism plays an important role for taking up necessary informationfor the operation device built in the camera body to carry out anoperation for the exposure control.

Most basically the camera body 4 constitutes a dark box in which theimage of the object to be photographed introduced by the lens device 2is formed on the film plane, whereby as film a 35 m/m roll film in thepatrone is used in such a manner that the roll film is wound up on thewinding up spool each time by one frame so as to change the exposureplane. The shutter is the focal plane shutter with two running screensprovided on the exposure plane of the film at the side of the lensdevice 2, whereby as will be explained in detail later the driving powerof the two screens is produced by means of the charged spring while thestarting time of the two screens is controlled by means of an electricalmeans. The camera body 4 contains a view finder mechanism mainlyconsisting of the quick return mirror and the pentagonal prism, wherebythe view finder mechanism is so designed that the framing operation andthe focusing operation before taking a picture can be carried outthrough the view finder window 13. This view finder mechanism is same asthat of the conventional single reflex camera. The only one differenceis the fact that almost all the informations necessary for taking apicture can be obtained through the view finder window 13, which is oneof the features of this camera device. Further this view findermechanism is provided with the TTL light measuring ability for measuringthe object brightness introduced through the lens device 2 so as toobtain the object brightness information (APEX value: BV) necessary forthe operation for the automatic exposure control.

There is provided a winding up lever 14 for winding up the film for oneframe and for charging the springs for driving the necessary mechanicalcomponents at the time of releasing the shutter in functional engagementof the film winding up spool on the upper part of the camera body 4. Thenumber of the frames of the film wound up by means of the winding uplever 14 is displayed in the film counter 15. Hereby the button 16provided at the center of the rotation of the winding up lever 16 isthat for the multiple exposure, whereby when the winding up lever 14 isoperated while the button is being pushed down, only the necessarymechanical components are charged while the film is not wound up.Further this winding up lever 14 serves as the power source switch forthe electrical components in the camera device, whereby the power sourceis switched on when the lever 14 is moved a little along the directionof the arrow α. This is very profitable for preventing the carelessnegligence of switching off of the power source for the camera devicewith automatic exposure control mechanism, because in case of such kindof camera the power source is consumed so remarkably that there is alarge possibility for a grave misoperation.

18 is the shutter release button disposed on the upper part of thecamera body 4 in such a manner that the button 18 can be pushed down bythe index finger of the right hand in the same way as in case of theconventional camera when the camera body 4 is held in both hands,whereby by pushing down this button 18 all the necessary movements afterthe shutter release are started. Hereby the hole 20 provided at thecenter of the shutter release button 18 is for the cable release or theair release. In the neighborhood of the shutter release button 18 aselector lever 22 is disposed, so designed that various kinds offunctions can be selected when the selector lever 22 is rotated aroundthe shutter release button 18. This selector lever 22 can be operated bythe same finger that operates the shutter release button 18, namely theindex finger of the right hand holding the camera body 4.

When now the selector lever 22 is rotated into the position in which themark 24 is selected, the shutter release button 18 is locked and can notbe pushed down any more. This locked state is applicable for keeping thebutton 18 being pushed down when the mark 24 is selected after theshutter release button 18 has been pushed down so that the long timeexposure when the shutter time is set at the bulb position is possible.Namely the selection of the mark 24 by means of this selector lever 22serves in two ways, namely to prevent the misoperation of the shutterrelease button 18 and to enable the long time exposure.

Further, when the selector lever 22 is set at the mark 26, AE(Automatic-Exposure) is brought into the locked state. In this lockedstate of AE the measured light amount is kept fixed in such a mannerthat the exposure amount (a combination of the aperture value with theshutter time) obtained as the result of the light measurement and theoperation is kept at the amount immediately before the selection of themark 26 during the automatic exposure control operation and after theneven if the measured light amount alters the actual exposure is carriedout with the fixed exposure amount. This function is very effectiveespecially in case of taking a picture of an object with largedifference in brightness, when the frame which is really desired to bephotographed is different from that out of which only the objectbrightness relative to the light measuring is desired to be obtained, sothat this function is essential for a camera with automatic exposurecontrolability. As this AE locking mechanism, the mechanical clampingmechanism and the electrical one can be thought out, whereby to thiscamera device the electrical one is to be applied. Hereby the lever 22selecting the mark 26 is automatically brought back into the initialposition, when the shutter release button 18 which was pushed downresumes the initial position, unless such force as to prevent thereturning of the lever 22 is exercised from outside.

Further when the selector lever 22 is set at the position at which themark 28 is selected, the self-timer is brought into the set state. Incase of this camera device, different from the case with theconventional camera the self-timer presents a mechanism for counting thetime in an electrical way, whereby when the shutter release button 18 ispushed down in the set state of this self-timer, a series of theoperation relative to the shutter release is controlled by means of theelectrical signal issued after the elapse of a certain predeterminedtime. Hereby the operation of the self-time is displayed by thetwinkling of the illumination diode lamp (LED lamp) 32 hidden under theselector lever 22 provided on the upper part of the camera body 4, incase the selector lever 22 is at the initial position. Further if theselector lever 22 is brought back to the initial position during theoperation of the self-timer, the self-timer is released out of the setstate, whereby the shutter can be released by means of the shutterrelease button 18 in a normal way. Further in case of this camera devicethe once set self-timer mechanism is not released out of the set stateeven when the shutter release operation has been carried out theself-timer photography is possible repeatedly without repeated settingof the self-timer. This function enables the automatic photography at acertain time interval by combining the self-time with the motor drivedevice as will be explained later, which is very profitable.

In case the selector lever 22 is set at the position at which the mark30 is selected, the battery is brought in the checked state. In case theLED lamp 32 twinkles in the checked state of the power source, itreveals that the power source has a sufficient voltage, which when theLED lamp 32 does not light up it reveals that the voltage of the powersource is too low for the camera device to exercise a full electricalfunction. Hereby the selector lever 22 selecting the position of themark 30 is normally urged by means of a spring so as to return to theposition of the mark 28 so that the selector lever 28 resumes theposition of the mark 28 when the finger is put off after the batterychecking. This function is very profitable, because if it is forgottento bring back the lever 22 to the initial position after the batterychecking not only the camera device does not work properly but also theelectrical power is wasted by the twinkling LED lamp 32.

34 is the dial for setting the aperture value or the shutter time out ofthe exposure informations, whereby the set value is displayed in thedisplay window 36. As has already been mentioned this camera devicepresents an automatic exposure control mechanism with priority on boththe aperture value and the shutter time, whereby the aperture valuepriority mode and the shutter time can be used selectively instead ofthe aperture value priority mode only or of the shutter time prioritymode. Namely the aperture value priority mode in accordance to which theaperture value is set while the shutter time is automatically operatedand controlled and the shutter time priority mode in accordance to whichthe shutter time is set while the aperture value is automaticallyoperated and controlled can be selected, whereby, as is clear from theafore mentioned equations (1) and (2), no matter whether the aperturevalue is selected with priority or the shutter time is selected withpriority, the operational process is completely same so that themechanism is so designed that the desired amount corresponding to theaperture value or the shutter time is set by means of only one dial 34.Hereby whether the amount set at the dial 34 is the apertured value orthe shutter speed is determined by means of operating the mode changeover switch 38. Hereby with the operation of the mode change over switch38 the content of the numerical value displayed in the display 36 ischanged. Namely the aperture value is displayed in the display window 36when the mode change over switch 38 is set on the aperture valuepriority mode, while the shutter time is displayed in the display window36 when the mode change over switch 38 is set on the shutter time. Thismechanism can be such a simple one that either of the aperture value orthe shutter time displayed parallel to each other is selectively shaded.

40 is the ASA sensitivity dial, on which the ASA sensitivity of the filmto be used is to be set. This dial 40 can be rotated along the directionof the arrow β when it is pulled up slightly by the fingers, wherebywhen it is freed from the fingers after setting the film sensitivity, itreturns by means of the strength of the spring along the reverseddirection to the arrow β in such a manner that the set position isfixed. This mechanism serves to prevent the unexpected rotation of thedial 40 during photographing.

42 is the scale with indexes for obtaining the over-exposure or theunder-exposure by displacing the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 so asto alter the set film sensitivity against the actual film sensivititywhen it is desired to photograph with over-exposure or under-exposureunder the automatic exposure control. Utilizing the fact that if the setfilm sensitivity is alter against the actual film sensitivity, as isclear from the afore-mentioned equations (1) and (2) the proper exposureamount in accordance with operation is over or under by the deviation ofthe set film sensitivity from the actual sensitivity, it can be madepossible to obtain over-exposure or under-exposure in an easy waywithout any alternation of the operation circuit or the operationroutine, which is very profitable.

44 is the film winding back knob containing the film winding back lever46, whereby the exposed film wound up one frame by one frame by means ofthe winding up lever 14 is wound back into the patrone by rotating theknob. In order to wind back the film, the winding back button 48provided on the bottom of the camera body 4 is pushed so as to releasethe film winding up mechanism from the film winding up lever 14, thewinding back lever 46 is pulled out of the film winding back knob 44 androtated along the direction of the arrow γ. This film winding back isalready well known.

In the same way as in case with the conventional camera this cameradevice is provided with the accessary shoe 50. It goes without sayingthat the shoe 50 is intended for mounting the speed light device or theflash light device, whereby, as will be explained later in detail, thespeed light device included in this camera device in accordance with thepresent invention is closely related to this camera device. Further, tothis camera shoe 50 the external light measuring adapter included in thecamera system in accordance with the present invention can be connected.Further this accessary shoe 50 includes apart from the synchronizationcontact 52 the control terminal 54 for introducing the controlinformations from the speed light or from the external light measuringadapter, the data terminal 56 for introducing the data and the AElocking terminal 58. Several steps of the level signals are introducedthrough the control terminals 54 so as to instruct the camera to operatein accordance with different modes while the aperture value set on thespeed light or the data relative to the object brightness measured bymeans of the external light measuring adapter is introduced in digitalvalues through the data terminal 56. The speed light device and theexternal light measuring adapter will be explained later in detail.

60 is the lever for the eye piece shutter for shading the view finderwindow 13, being intended to prevent the film from being expired to thelight coming through the view finder window 13 when the eye leaves theview finder window 13 for example during the self-timer photograph andat the same time to prevent the object brightness information essentialespecially for the automatic exposure control from the error due to thelight coming through the view finder window 13, whereby the view finderwindow is closed by operating the eye piece shutter lever 60 along thedirection of the arrow c. This mechanism is quite essential for thecamera with TTL light measuring mechanism.

62 is the X contact with the same function as that for the conventionalcamera, constituting a synchronization contact at the time of the speedlight or the flash light photography.

64 is the diaphragm closing lever for closing the diaphragm of the lensdevice when it is pushed along the direction of the arrow δ. In case nowthe aperture value is preset by means of the aperture adjusting ring 8of the lens device 2 the diaphragm of the lens device 2 is closed to thepreset position by operating the diaphragm closing lever 64 while incase the mark 12 on the aperture adjusting ring 8 is set at the index 7the operation of diaphragm closing lever 64 is restricted. Although itis possible to set the mark 12 on the aperture adjusting ring 8 at theindex 7 while the diaphragm closing lever 64 is being operated into thediaphragm closing position, which is however displayed in the viewfinder as misoperation. The relation between the state of the apertureadjusting ring 8 of the lens device 2 with that of the diaphragm closinglever 64 on the camera body 4 and of the mode change over switch 38 willbe explained later in detail. This diaphragm closing lever 64 is lockedin the diaphragm closing position, while this locking is released bypushing the lock release button 66 in such a manner that the diaphragmclosing lever 64 is brought back into the initial position.

On the bottom of this camera device a screw hole 68 is provided forsecuring a tripod, whereby this screw hole 68 can be such for mountingthe motor drive device. Hereby in order to mount the motor drive devicethe cover 70 at the lower part of the shaft of the winding up lever 14is taken away and the shaft of the winding up lever 14 is adapted to thewinding up shaft of the motor drive device so as to obtain a mechanicalconnection. When the motor drive device is mounted, a control signal isgiven to the motor drive device through the contact device 72 providedon the bottom of the camera body 4. The motor drive device will beexplained in detail later, whereby the device serves to wind up the filmand to charge other necessary components by means of the driving powerof the motor instead of the film winding up lever 14 after thetermination of the whole operation of the camera after the shutterrelease so that it is made possible to release shutter in a continuousway, making it easy for the photographer to catch the desired shutterchance, which is quite profitable, disregarding the capacity and theweight for the driving motor and its power source.

Hereby when the film winding back knob 44 is pulled up the back cover 74on the back side of the camera body 4 opens so that the film in thepatrone can be exchanged. At the time of opening the back cover 74, thefilm counter 15 on the upper part of the camera body 4 is reset so as toreturne the initial position.

So far the composition of each component of this camera device has beenexplained in a brief way. Below the exchange of the concreteinformations between the lens device 2 and the camera body 4 or theaperture control mechanism of the lens device 2 from the camera body 4,the relation of the operation of the speed light device mounted on theaccessary shoe 50 or of the external light measuring adapter to that ofthe camera device, the relation of the motor drive device mounted on thebottom of the camera body 4 to the operation of the camera device andthe relation of the information or the data display in the view finder13 to the operation of the camera device will be further explained morein detail.

FIG. 2 shows the lens device 2 of the camera device and the camera body4 taken apart from each other in perspective view, whereby the lensdevice 2 is combined with the body 4, being displaced along thedirection of the arrow λ. The camera body 4 is provided with the mountring 76 on the mounting plane of the lens device 2, whereby the mountring 76 presents three independent flange part 78A, 78B and 78C at theend of the circumference. The mount ring 76 is firmly fixed on thecamera body so as to surround the optical path, being parallel to theplane perpendicular to the optical path namely the film plane, becausethe mount ring 76 is the only one member for combining the lens device 2with the camera body 4 whereby the lowering of the mounting precisiondue to the aging effect will surely give a inferior influence to theobject image formed on the film plane. Accordingly the clamping ring 10is rotatably provided on the side of the lens device 2, whereby theclamping ring 10 is a circular ring presenting notches 80A, 80B and 80Cfor allowing the passage of the flange parts 78A, 78B and 78C of themount ring 76 when the lens device 2 in the showed state is displacedalong the direction of the arrow λ so as to be combined with the camerabody 4, so designed that by rotating the clamping ring 10 along thedirection of δ after having brought each flange 78A, 78B and 78C of themount ring 76 through the corresponding notches 80A, 80B and 80C theflange parts 78A, 78B and 78C are engaged with the protruding parts 82A,82B and 82C of the clamping ring 10 so as to secure the lens device 2 tothe camera body 4.

In the mounting side of the lens device 2 to the camera body 4 variouskinds of mechanisms are provided for exchanging informations with thecamera body 4 or for controling.

84 is the lever relative to the step number of the diaphragm from thetotally opened position of the lens device 2, being provided so as to bemovable along the ring hole 36 in the direction of the arrows φ and δ.This lever 84 is urged along the direction of the arrow δ by means of astrong spring, whereby when the lens device 2 is not mounted on thecamera body 4 and the clamping ring 10 is in the ready state as shown inthe drawing the ring hole 86 is kept in the state moved along thedirection of the arrow φ. This state is released by rotating theclamping ring 10 along the direction of the arrow δ so as to mount thelense device 2 on the camera body 4. At this time the lever 84 is movedalong the direction of the arrow δ by means of the strength of thespring but only up to a certain determined position which correspondswith the step number of the diaphragm for the preset aperture value ofthe lens device 2 from the totally opened position, whereby the move thelever 84 is in the direction of the arrow φ the smaller the step numberof the diaphragm is while the move the lever 84 is in the direction ofthe arrow δ the larger the step number of the diaphragm is. The aperturevalue can be preset in this lens device 2 by means of the aperturesetting ring 8 as had already been explained, whereby the position atwhich the displacement of the lever 84 is restricted changed inaccordance with the preset aperture value and the lever 84 is displacedaccordingly and in consequence there is a possibility to transmit thestep number of the diaphragm closing corresponding to the presetaperture value set on the aperture setting ring 8 to the side of thecamera body 4 by means of the position of this lever 84. The reason whyit is written here possibility is that the camera device applied to thisembodiment is mainly intended for the automatic exposure control,whereby as will be explained in detail later it is also possible topreset the aperture value from the side of the body of the camera deviceso that it is not necessary to detect the diaphragm step number presetin the lens device 2 by the aperture setting ring 8 by detecting theposition of the lever 84.

When the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 is set at the index 7,this lever 84 is always at the position corresponding to the largestdiaphragm step number of the lens device, namely in the state in whichthe lever 84 is to the utmost in the ring hole 86 along the direction ofthe arrow δ by means of the spring. No matter at which position thedisplacement of the lever 84 along the direction of the arrow δ by meansof the strength of the spring is restricted, it is possible to displacethe lever 84 against the strength of the spring along the directiontoward the smaller diaphragm step number, namely along the direction ofthe arrow φ. In other words it is possible to set the desired aperturevalue by setting the lever 84 at the desired position against the forceof the spring, not making use of the aperture setting ring 8. Thischaracter is applicable to the so called servo AE camera in which theaperture value can automatically be controled by controling the positionof this lever 84 by means of a servo-motor and has been realized to someextent, whereby there are some shortcomings such as slow responce sothat in the present embodiment this character is utilized by means ofother process.

88 shows a diaphragm closing lever being normally urged by means of aspring along the direction of the arrow Ω toward the position of thetotally opened diaphragm. Further the direction of the arrow γ is towardthe position of the closed diaphragm so that by displacing the diaphragmclosing lever 88 against the strength of the spring along the directionof the arrow γ the diaphragm of the lens device 2 is closed by thediaphragm step number corresponding to the position of the lever 84 fromthe totally opened position.

90 shows the opening pin with the projecting length corresponding to thelargest aperture value of this lens device 2, for serving to transmitthe largest aperture value of the lens device 2 to the camera body 4.This opening pin 90 is of a very important existence in order to carryout various kinds of compensations for calculating the exact objectbrightness informations in care of the exposure operation basing uponthe object brightness informations in accordance with the TTL lightmeasurement.

Further 91 is the smallest aperture value pin with the projecting lengthcorresponding to the smallest aperture value, for serving to transmitthe smallest aperture value of the lens device 2 to the camera body 4.This smallest aperture value pin 91 is made use of to detect thecontrolable limit of the diaphragm of the lens device 2 at the time ofthe exposure control.

92 is the AE pin which projects when the mark 12 on the aperture settingring 8 at the index 7, for serving to transmit to the side of the camerabody 4 the fact that the aperture value is not preset at the side of thelens device 2.

On the other hand, on the side of the camera body mechanisms to beengaged with the above mentioned various kinds of the mechanisms of thelens device 2 are provided.

94 is the AE lever which operates while the face at the side of thearrow ∂ is brought in contact with the face at the side of the arrow φof the lever 84 provided on the lens device 2, whereby the AE lever isnormally urged along the direction of the arrow ∂ by means of a weakspring. The spring urging this AE lever 94 along the direction of thearrow ∂ is remarkably weak in strength in comparison with the one urgingthe lever 84 at the side of the lens device 2 along the direction of thearrow φ, so that the strength for displacing the lever 84 along thedirection of the arrow φ can not be overcomed. In consequence this AElever 94 is normally urged by means of the lever 84 at the side of thelens device 2 along the direction of the arrow σ. At the time of theoperation of the winding up lever 14, this AE lever 94 is displacedalong the direction of the arrow ∂ against the urging strengthaccompanying the lever 84 so as to be locked in the shown position. Thislocking is released at the time of the shutter release, whereby it isnatural that the AE lever 94 start to run along the direction of thearrow σ by means of the urging strength of the lever 84. Hereby thecamera body 4 present a mechanism for clamping the AE lever 94 at theproper position in accordance with the control aperture value set bymeans of the dial 34 or obtained as the result of the operation, wherebyby means of the operation of this clamping mechanism the AE lever 94stops at the clamping position. In consequence the displacement of thelever 84 along the direction of the arrow φ is naturally restricted atthe position corresponding to the clamping position of the AE lever 94so as to preset the diaphragm step number. Namely the clamping positionof the AE lever 94 is remarkably important for determining the diaphragmstep number of the lens device 2 so that a mechanism with very highprecision is requested for detecting the clamping position. Suchmechanism is preferably so designed as to obtain the desired diaphragmstep number by counting the pulse number corresponding to the diaphragmstep number while the displacement amount of the AE lever 94 from itslocking position as start along the direction of the arrow σ isconverted into pulses. Hereby in case it is desired to close thediaphragm of the lens by pushing the diaphragm closing lever 64 providedon the camera body 4 along the direction of the arrow δ, from theconstructional reason the locking of the AE lever 94 at the standardposition or the clamping thereof at the desired position is released insuch a manner that the AE lever 94 start to run by means of the urgingstrength of the lever 84 along the direction of the arrow σ. In case atthis time the aperture value is selected or set by means of the aperturesetting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2, the displacement of thelever 84 is restricted up to the position corresponding to the diaphragmstep number for this aperture value and in consequence also the AE lever94 stops running whereby after all the diaphragm is closed down to theset aperture value, while in case the mark 12 on the aperture settingring 8 is set, the displacement of the lever 84 is not restricted as faras the position of the smallest aperture value whereby after all thediaphragm is closed down to the smallest aperture value. In consequencethe present embodiment is so designed that the diaphragm closing lever64 is locked so as to be out of operation in case the mark 12 is set onthe aperture setting ring 8. However it is possible to lock the AE lever94 at the standard position in a easy way without feeding film byoperating the winding up lever in the pushed state of the button for themultiple exposure in case for some reason the locking of the AE lever 94at the standard position is released before the shutter release. Thefact that the AE lever 94 has been locked at the standard position issaid that AE has been charged while the fact that the AE lever 94 islocked at the standard position is said that AE is charged. Further thefact that the AE lever 94 is released out of the standard position issaid that AE is discharged.

96 is the total opening input pin for picking up the aperture value ofthe totally opened diaphragm of the lens device 2, being in contact withthe opening pin 90 of the lens device 2 so as to pick up the signalcorresponding to the protruding amount of the pin, namely the signalcorresponding to the aperture value of the totally opened diaphragm ofthe lens device 2. Hereby this total opening input pin 90 is connectedto a mechanism for converting the displacement amount of the pin 90 intoa digital value in such a manner that after all the aperture value ofthe totally opened diaphragm of the lens device 2 is picked up in thedigital value.

97 is the largest aperture value input pin for picking up the aperturevalue of the most closed diaphragm of the lens device 2, being incontact with the largest aperture value pin 91 of the lens device 2 soas to pick up the signal corresponding to the largest aperture value ofthe lens device 2, namely the signal corresponding to the aperture valueof the most closed diaphragm. Hereby this largest aperture value inputpin is connected to a mechanism for converting the displacement amountof the pin 97 into the digital value in such a manner that after all thelargest aperture value of the lens device 2 is picked up in the digitalvalue.

98 is the diaphragm driving lever, whereby the surface of the lever 98toward the direction of the arrow ε is in contact with that of thediaphragm closing lever 88 of the lens device 2 toward the direction ofthe arrow Ω in such a manner that at the time of the shutter releasethat lever 98 is displaced along the direction of the arrow ε before thestart of the exposure, driving the diaphragm closing lever 88 along thedirection of the arrow γ so as to close the diaphragm of the lens device2 down to the closed position determined by the lever 84 from thetotally opened state. Hereby at the termination of the exposure thisdiaphragm driving lever 98 resumes the initial position, being displacedtoward the direction of the arrow ω so as to bring the diaphragm of thelens device 2 back into the totally opened state. This diaphragm drivinglever 98 can be displaced along the direction of the arrow ε byoperating the diaphragm closing lever 64 of the camera body along thedirection of the arrow δ. This mechanism is essential in order toobserve the object image through the lens device 2 with the closeddiaphragm through the view finder 13.

100 is the AE detecting member opposed to the AE pin 92 of the lensdevice 2, serving to detect the AE pin 92 protruding in case the mark 12is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 so as topick up the control signal showing that the mark 12 is selected.

Hereby as is clear from the above explanation it is necessary that themark 12 of the aperture setting ring 8 should be set at the index 7 incase it is desired to control the aperture value of the lens device 2from the side of the camera body 4 so that the mark 12 will be called AEmark below.

Below the operations of the lever 84, the AE lever 94, the diaphragmclosing lever 88 and the diaphragm driving lever 98 from the mounting ofthe lens device 2 till the diaphragm closing, namely the shutter releasein case the aperture setting ring 8 is set at a certain aperture valuewill be explained in accordance with FIG. 3, while the case when theaperture ring 8 is set at the AE mark 12 will be explained in accordancewith FIG. 4.

FIG. 3 shows the operation of each lever in the state in which as ismentioned afore a certain aperture value is preset at the side of thelens device 2, whereby FIG. 3(a) shows a lens device 2 in the readystate, being mounted on the camera body 4, whereby the clamping ring 10has not yet been rotated into the mounting position so that the lever 84is kept in the state displaced toward the direction of the arrow ψagainst the urging strength of the spring along the direction of thearrow φ. In case now only the clamping ring 10 is rotated along thedirection of the arrow φ, without mounting the lens device 2 on thecamera body 4, the lever 84 is displaced along the direction of thearrow φ into the position determined by the aperture setting ring 8 asis shown in FIG. 3(b). This displacement is motivated by means of thespring urging the lever 84 along the direction of the arrow φ. Now letus suppose that this lens device 2 be mounted on the camera body 4 whenAE has not yet been charged or the diaphragm closing lever 64 has notyet been pushed down. In this case the AE lever 94 at the side of thecamera body 4 is in the state urged by means of the spring along thedirection of the arrow δ but not in the particularly locked state sothat when the lens device 2 is mounted on the camera body 4, theclamping ring being rotated along the direction of the arrow φ, thestrength of the spring urging the lever 84 along the direction of thearrow φ is superior to that of the spring urging the AE lever 94 alongthe direction of the arrow δ so that the lever 84 is displaced along thedirection of the arrow φ into the position determined by means of theaperture setting ring 8 as is shown in FIG. 3(c). At the same time theAE lever 94 is brought into the state as is shown in FIG. 3(c), beingpushed by the lever 84. Now let us supposed that the winding up lever 14is operated so as to charge AE in the state in which the diaphragmclosing lever 64 of the camera body 4 is brought back into the initialposition. Then the AE lever 94 is displaced along the direction of thearrow ∂ against the urging strength of the lever 84 so as to be lockedat the standard position as is shown in FIG. 3(D). In consequence thelever 84 at the side of the lens device 2 is kept in the state as isshown in FIG. 3(D'), being pushed by means of the AE lever 94. Hereby itis natural that quite in the same way the AE lever 94 and the lever 84would be kept at the positions as is shown in FIG. 3(D) and 3(D') incase the lens device 2 is mounted on the camera body 4 in which AE hasbeen charged. When then the shutter is released the lever 84 start torun along the direction of the arrow σ against the urging strength ofthe spring of the AE lever 94, because the locking of the AE lever 94 isreleased, so as to stop at the position determined by the aperturesetting ring 8 as is shown in FIG. 3(E'). At this time the AE lever 94displaced, being pushed by the lever 84 stops at the position at whichthe lever 84 stops as is shown in FIG. 3(E). When then the diaphragmdriving lever 98 of the camera body 4 is displaced along the directionof the arrow ε as is shown in FIG. 3(F), the diaphragm closing lever 88of the lens device 2 is driven toward the direction of the arrow γ as isshown in FIG. 3(F') in such a manner that the diaphragm is closed downto the position determined by means of the lever 84. In this state theexposure is stated, whereby the state as is shown in FIG. 3(F) and 3(F')is kept at least up to the termination of the exposure. Hereby when thediaphragm driving lever 98 has returned along the direction of the arrowω after the termination of the exposure, the lever 84, the diaphragmclosing lever 88, the AE lever 94 and the diaphragm driving lever 98 arebrought back into the state as is shown in FIG. 3(c) and (c').

Hereby the above mentioned operations of the lever 84 and of the AElever 94 are of no particular meaning. The reason is that as explainedabove the present invention does not present any mechanism for pickingup the diaphragm step number information concerning the aperture valuewhich is set by means of the aperture setting ring 8 for the camera body4 from the lever 84 while the AE lever 94, being clamped at a desiredposition, serves to prevent the lever 84 from being displaced along thedirection of the arrow σ so as to preset the aperture from the side ofthe camera body 4 so that the levers 84 and 94 execute no function atall once the aperture is preset by means of the aperture setting ring 8at the side of the lens device 2. However as is clear from the drawingthe levers 84 and 94 have each an independent function while in the modehaving nothing to do their function there is no danger for interventionnor interference. This is largely due the arrangement of the AE leverand the lever 84 for a certain lens device composition and to thedistribution of the strength of the springs for urging the levers.

FIG. 4 shows the operation of the lever when no aperture value is presetat the side of the lens device 2 as is afore mentioned. FIG. 4(a) showsthe lens device 2 mounted on the camera body (4) in a ready state,whereby the clamping ring 10 has not been rotated into the mountingposition so that the lever 84 is kept in a state displaced along thedirection of the arrow ψ against the strength of the spring urging thelever 84 along the direction of the arrow φ. In case now only theclamping ring 10 is rotated along the direction of the arrow φ withoutmounting the lens device 2 on the camera body 4 the lever 84 isdisplaced fully along the direction of the arrow φ as is shown in FIG.4(b). Hereby this displacement position corresponds with that which isdetermined in case the largest aperture value is selected by theaperture setting ring 8. Further this displacing strength is produced bythe spring urging the lever 84 along the direction of the arrow φ. Nowlet us suppose that this lens device 2 is mounted on the camera body 4in which AE has not been charged yet or the diaphragm closing lever 64is pressed. In this case the AE lever 94 at the side of the camera body4 is at an uncertain position depending upon the previous photographicmode or the state of the diaphragm closing lever 64. In other words,when the aperture preset is controled from the side of the camera body4, the AE lever 64 is clamped at the position corresponding to theaperture value, remaining at the position until the next AE charge,while when the diaphragm closing lever 64 is operated, AE is dischargedand at the same time the clamping is released. In consequence, when thelens device 2 is mounted on the camera body 4, the clamping ring 10being rotated along the direction of the arrow φ, the lever 84 is urgedby the strength of the spring toward the position shown in FIG. 4(b),whereby in practice the AE lever 94 has been clamped at the positionshown in FIG. 4(c) (in practice at an uncertain position) so that thelever 84 is displaced by means of the AE lever along the direction ofthe arrow φ into the position shown in FIG. 4(c'), whereby furtherdisplacement is restricted by means of the AE lever 94. Now let ussuppose that AE has been charged, the winding up lever 14 of the camerabody 4 being operated. The AE lever 94 is driven along the direction ofthe arrow ∂ against the strength of the lever 84 until it is locked atthe standard position shown in FIG. 4(D). In consequence the lever 84 atthe side of the lens device 2 is kept in the state shown in FIG. 4(D'),being pushed by means of the AE lever 94. Further it is natural that theAE lever 94 and the lever 84 would be kept at the position shown in FIG.4(D) and 4(D') in the same way when the lens device 2 is mounted on thecamera body 4 in which AE has been charged. When then the shutter isreleased, the locking of the AE lever 94 is released so that the lever84 start to run along the direction of the arrow σ against the strengthof the spring of the AE lever 94. Hereby the AE lever 94 runs along thedirection of the arrow σ, being pushed by the lever 84, whereby in thecamera device the displacement amount of the AE lever 94 is detected asimpulses in such a manner that the displacement reaches an amountcorresponding to the diaphragm closing step number for the aperturevalue set at the side of the camera body or operated the AE lever 94 isclamped so as not to be displaced further. In consequence the AE lever94 is kept, being clamped at the position shown in FIG. 4(E), whereby atthe same time the displacement of the lever 84 is restricted by the AElever at the position shown in FIG. 4(E'). Through the above mentionedoperations the aperture value set or operated at the side of the camerabody is brought into the preset state. When then the diaphragm drivinglever 98 of the camera body 4 is displaced along the direction of thearrow ε as is shown in FIG. 4(F), the diaphragm closing lever 88 of thelens device 2 is driven along the direction of the arrow ν as is shownin FIG. 4(F') in such a manner that the diaphragm is closed down to theposition restricted by the lever 84. In this state the exposure startswhereby the state shown in FIG. 4(F) and 4(F') is kept at least thetermination of the exposure. When hereby the diaphragm driving lever 98has returned along the direction of the arrow ω after the termination ofthe exposure, the lever 84, the diaphragm closing lever 88, the AE lever94 and the diaphragm driving lever 98 resume the state equivalent tothat shown in FIG. 4(c) and 4(c').

The above mentioned operation is carried out while the light is measuredin the totally opened lens device 2 and the automatic exposure controloperation with priority on aperture value and that on shutter speed,which is very profitable for controling the aperture value from the sideof the camera body 4 of the camera device.

FIG. 5 shows an embodiment of the speed light device applicable to thecamera system in accordance with the present invention, whereby FIG.5(a) shows a front view, FIG. 5(b) a view seen from behind and FIG. 5(c)the bottom view. This speed light device includes the well knownautomatic light adjusting ability but is further characterized in thecapability of exchanging information with the camera device.

In the drawing, 102 is the illuminating member for issuing a flash lightup to the capacity of this speed light device. Further 104 is the lightdetecting member for detecting the flash light reflected from the objectso as to adjust the flash light of the illuminating member 102. Inaccordance with the automatic light adjusting system applied to thisspeed light device, at the time of taking a picture the speed lightdevice is once actuated so as to project a flash light from theilluminating member 102 to the object while at the same time the flashlight reflected from the object is measured by the light detectingmember 104 so as to stop the operation of the illuminating member 102 assoon as the total light amount of the reflected flash light reaches acertain determined value in such a manner that a proper exposure amountis given to the film. Hereby in order to carry out such automatic lightadjustment it is essential that the sensitivity of the film to be usedand the aperture value of the photograhic lens should be given as theset informations in advance and for this purpose the film sensitivitysetting dial 106 and the aperture value setting dial 108 are provided.Although hereby it can be thought that the informations relative to thefilm sensitivity and the aperture value can be set through the filmsensitivity setting dial 40 provided at the side of the camera deviceand the aperture value or the shutter time setting dial 34, in thisembodiment the input means for the information necessary for theautomatic light adjustment is intentionally provided at the side of thespeed light device so as to enable the application of this speed lightdevice to other camera system than the present one. Further as to theabove mentioned aperture value setting dial 108, the manual mode thatthe photographer set the aperture value instead of the automatic lightadjustment or the mode that a desired aperture value is selected for theautomatic light adjustment can be selected. This selection is carriedout by setting the manual mode indication 110 or the aperture valueindication 112 provided on the above mentioned dial 108 at the index 114provided on the speed light device body, by rotating the dial 108.Further the above mentioned film sensitivity setting dial 106 can bemade rotatable, by displacing the lock lever 116 restricting itsrotation along the direction of the arrow σ. This lock lever 116 isnormally urged by a spring along the reversed direction of the arrow σso as to prevent the unexpected rotation of the above mentioned filmsensitivity setting dial 106. Further by rotating the above mentioneddial 106 the ASA sensitivity indication 120 is made to appear in thewindow 118 provided on the dial 106, whereby the film sensitivitysetting is completed by setting the desired ASA sensitivity indication120 at the index 122 provided on the dial 106 in the window. Furtherthis film sensitivity setting dial 106 serves at the same time as thecalculator of the guide number, whereby in case the manual mode has beenselected by means of the dial 108 this can be made use of in order toset the aperture value of the lens device 2 in a manual way inaccordance with the object distance. Namely when the aperture valuesetting dial 108 is set in the manual mode the speed light device doesnot carry out the automatic adjustment, issuing the maximum light amountof the speed light device. In consequence it is necessary to select aproper combination of the object distance with the aperture value inorder to give a proper exposure amount to the film, whereby the guidenumber calculator to be used for this purpose is so designed that thecombination of the object distance with the aperture value is altered soas to be suited for the guide number of the speed light device inaccordance with the film sensitivity. In consequence it can naturally bethought that the film sensitivity setting dial 106 is used as the guidenumber calculator, whereby, however, the present embodiment is sodesigned that the proper exposure amount is given to the film while thephotographer set the aperture value at the side of the camera device ina manual way from the corresponding aperture value indication 126 andthe corresponding object distance indication 128 whereby the seriesaperture value indication 126 is made in the window 124 provided on thedial 106 while the series object distance indication is made along thecircumference of the window 124. Further as is well known many speedlight device is of the condenser discharge type, whereby the voltage ofthe battery or the net voltage is stepped up to a voltage sufficientlyhigh for the Xenon discharge tube to operate and stored in thecondenser, the charge stored in which condenser is discharged throughthe Xenon discharge tube at the time of taking a picture in such amanner that the discharge tube illuminates. In consequence in order thatthe above mentioned Xenon discharge tube illuminates without fail it isnecessary that the above mentioned condenser has been charged up to acertain determined voltage, whereby when a picture is taken before thecompletion of the charging of the condenser a sufficient exposure cannotbe obtained on the film because the speed light device does not operateproperly. Thus which is needed in consequence is the charge completiondisplay lamp 130 which illuminates at the termination of the charge soas to tell the photographer the condenser charging. Further this chargecompletion display lamp 130 serves at the same time as the switch fortesting the speed light device, which illuminates when this switch ispushed. This is prite convenient for making an exposure measurement bymeans of a flash meter or the like. 132 is the power source switch,whereby by operating this switch the condenser is started to be charged.

The above mentioned speed light device has almost the same efficiency asthat with the conventional automatic light adjusting device, wherebythis speed light device constitutes one of the constructional member ofthe system camera, being combined with the camera device so as toimprove the operability of the camera device remarkably.

The speed light device shown in FIG. 5 can be mounted on the accessaryshoe 50 of the camera device shown in FIG. 1, whereby the speed lightdevice is fixed by means of the clamping ring 136 after the shoe 134provided on the lower part of the speed light device is adapted on theabove mentioned accessary shoe 50 from the back side of the cameradevice. Further the speed light device has the synchronization contact138, the control signal contact 140 and the data signal contact 142 atthe bottom of the shoe so as to be electrically connected to thesynchronization contact 52, the control terminal 54 and the dataterminal 56 of the accessary shoe at the time of mounting the speedlight device. Further the shoe has an earth terminal 144 on one part tobe earthed to the accessary shoe body in case of mounting the speedlight device.

The shutter time with which an exposure synchorized with the speed lightcan be obtained in case of a camera provided with the focal planeshutter at the time of taking a picture under the speed light, namelythe speed light synchronization shutter time (TSYN) is generally shorterthan 1/60 sec. or 1/125 sec, whereby the missetting often takes place atthe actual camera handling while it disturbs the operability of thecamera to reset the shutter time for the speed light photography so thatit has been thought that some measures would be necessary. For thispurpose in case of the speed light device applied to the presentembodiment not the passive method that only an alarm is issued in caseof the misoperation but the active method that the shutter speed suitedfor the speed light photography is controled from the side of the speedlight is adopted. What can be thought for the active method is the fullautomatic system in accordance with which no matter at which shutterspeed is set at the side of the camera device the shutter isautomatically released with the speed light synchronization shutter timeTSYH in case of the speed light photography and the semi-automaticsystem in accordance with which only when a shutter time shorter thanthe speed light synchronization shutter time is set at the side of thecamera device the shutter is automatically released with the speed lightsynchronization shutter time while when the shutter speed set at theside of the camera device is larger than the speed light synchronizationshutter time (TSYH) the shutter is released with the set shutter time,whereby the present embodiment is so designed as to be able to selectthe fully automatic system and the semi-automatic system depending uponthe situation. The change over switch 146 provided at the back of thespeed light device serves to change over the full automatic system andthe semi-automatic system.

The determination signal of the change over position of this change overswitch 146 is transmitted as a signal with two informations to thecontrol terminal 54 of the accessary shoe 50 through the control contact140 together with the signal for showing the termination of the chargeof the speed light device. This can be realized by designing in such amanner that the value of the current at the time when a voltage isapplied to the control contact 140 at the side of the speed lightthrough the control terminal 54 at the side of the camera differsdepending upon the change over position of the above mentioned changeover switch 146. There two informations are transmitted to the cameradevice in accordance with the AND conditions with the information as tothe termination of the charge of the speed light device. In consequenceno signal is transmitted to the side of the camera device when the speedlight device has not been charged yet. In case now the signal showingthe termination of the cahrge of the speed light device is given as thefirst signal, this signal is taken into the camera device as signalshowing the full automatic system, while the signal showing thetermination of the charge of the speed light device is given as thesecond signal, this signal is taken into the camera device as signalshowing the semi-automatic system. In accordance with the first and thesecond information signal through the control terminal 54 the cameradevice is brought into the speed light photographic mode, whereby as theshutter time the speed light synchronization shutter speed or a longertime than the above (in case of semi-automatic system) is selected whileat the same time the data for the aperture value or the total speedlight amount is taken up through the data terminal.

The information set by means of the aperture setting dial 108 is givento the data terminal 56 as analog value. Namely as mentioned afore theinformation as the aperture value is essential in case of the automaticlight adjusting mode so that it is so designed that the information canbe set at the side of the speed light device, whereby the transmissionsystem is necessary in order to make the set value the aperture controlsignal at the side of the camera device. The data contact 142 isprovided on the side of the speed light device for this purpose, whilethe data terminal 56 is provided on the side of the camera body for thispurpose. When now the charge completion termination signal is put in thecamera body, the camera body takes up the analog information concerningthe aperture value through the data terminal 56 so as to controlaperture in accordance with this information. When the aperture settingdial 108 at the side of the speed light device has been selected in themanual mode, other analog information than that with the levelcorresponding to the aperture value, for example an analog signal withthe higher lever than that of the data showing the aperture value isproduced at the data contact 142 in such a manner that a signal showingthat the speed light device is in the manual mode well illuminates withits maximum light amount is transmitted to the camera body. At this timethe aperture is not controled at the side of the camera device so thatit is necessary to set the desired aperture value or the aperture valueobtained from the guide number calculator at the side of the lens device2 through the aperture setting ring 8.

In accordance with the above mentioned composition, it is possible toautomatically obtain the proper exposure even in case of the photographyunder the speed light by means of the present embodiment of the camerasystem so that although in case of the conventional photography underthe automatic light adjusting speed light it is necessary to set theshutter time at the side of the camera device at a time longer than thespeed light synchronization shutter time (TSYN), for example 1/60 sec.and at the same time to set the aperture value at a value appointed forthe side of the automatic light adjusting speed light device, not onlythe shutter speed but also the aperture value can automatically be setso that the operability can remarkably be improved while themisoperation can considerably be avoided. Further at the side of thecamera device the exposure is controled automatically before the speedlight device has not yet been charged so that a picture can be takenwith the proper exposure or the nearly proper exposure even when theshutter is released before the speed light device has not been chargedfully in such a manner that the probability to obtain superior picturesis increased, which can be said a remarkable progress in comparison withthe conventional camera system, whereby in case a picture is taken underspeed light when the speed light device has not been charged fully, thespeed light device does not illuminate at the time of the shutterrelease in such a manner that the exposure is under with the shutterspeed and the aperture value set for the speed light photography.

Further, in case a picture is taken under the speed light by this camerasystem no special operation is need at the side of the camera device,whereby the camera device is automatically changed over into the speedlight photographic mode when the speed light is mounted at the cameradevice, the power source switch is closed and the speed light device isfully charged, so that it is sufficient to obtain the object distanceand release the shutter, which can be said a remarkable progress incomparison with the conventional camera system in which various settingoperation are need in case a picture is taken under the speed light.

One of the most important thing for completing the automatic exposurecontrol efficiency of the camera is the light measuring system. Theefficiency of this light measuring system is to take up the objectbrightness information which is one of the factors for the exposureoperation, being mostly so designed that the object brightness isconverted into the electrical signal through a photoelectric convertingelement.

At present most of the exposure meter built in the single reflex camerais of the TTL light measuring system, which is also applied to thesingle reflex camera with the automatic exposure control efficiency. Inaccordance with this TTL light measuring system a comparatively preciselight measurement is possible because the light beam of the objectactually coming through the lens is measured, whereby in case lenseswith different focal length are used the system can be adapted in a sameway, which is remarkably convenient. Further it is possible to confirmthe portion in which the light is measured or the frame through the viewfinder so that the measured light amount can easily be compensated.

What is discussed about in case of the camera device with this TTL lightmeasuring system is the problem concerning the light measuring range inthe frame. This light measuring range is principally devided into thepartial light measuring range in which a certain determined portion inthe frame, for example the central portion is measured with weight andthe mean light measuring range in which the whole portion in the frameis measured in an average way, whereby the combination of the partiallight measuring range with the mean light measuring range as well asother exceptional light measuring range such as the division of the meanlight measuring range into several ranges in each of which the light ismeasured with different weight.

In case of the camera device with the automatic exposure controlefficiency the mean light measuring range is generally applied becauseit is more convenient from the view point of the snap shot photography,whereby there still remain some problem.

The largest difficulty takes place when a picture is taken with thewide-angle lens and the like, whereby in case the brightness of thebackground is extremely different from that of the object to bephotographed actually, the automatic exposure control mechanism controlsthe exposure in accordance with the brightness of the background so thatthere exists a danger for the extreme under-exposure or the extremeover-exposure for the object desired to be actually photographed. Theafore mentioned AE lock mechanism is provided in order to avoid suchdifficulties. When it is desired to measure the brightness of the objectat a certain determined position in the frame in case of the cameradevice with such mean light measurement, it is necessary to take suchtroublesome operations that the framing is once made in the neighborhoodof the object in such a manner that the position of the determinedportion of the object assumes almost all the portion in frame so as tomeasure the brightness and then the framing and the focusing are madeunder the operation of the AE lock mechanism at a distance from theobject so as to release the shutter. Thus the partial light measurementof the object brightness is preferable in order to avoid suchdifficulties.

In case of the camera system in accordance with the present invention inorder to avoid the above mentioned difficulties the camera device is sodesigned that another external light measuring meter than the TTL lightmeasuring meter can be mounted on the accessary shoe 50 in such a mannerthat the automatic exposure control is carried out in accordance withthe result of the light measurement by means of this external lightmeasuring meter.

FIG. 6 shows an external light measuring meter applicable to the camerasystem in accordance with the present invention in perspective view,whereby the contact 146 provided on the bottom of this light measuringmeter can be brought into contact with the control terminal provided inthe accessary shoe 50 at the side of the camera device so as to send asignal to the side of the camera that the light measuring meter has beenmounted on the accessary shoe 50. This is given to the camera devicefrom the light measuring meter as the third signal which is differentfrom the charge completion signal consisting of the two informations forthe full automatic operation and the semi-automatic operation of thespeed light device. In the camera device upon receipt of this thirdinformation the mode is changed over into the external light measuringmode whereby the analog information put in through the data terminal 56is taken up as the object brightness information. Hereby the contact 148provided at the bottom of the light measuring meter can be brought intocontact with the data terminal 56 when the light measuring meter ismounted on the accessary shoe 50, producing the brightness of the lightbeam of the object coming through the light receiving window 150 asanalog data to be transmitted to the camera device through the dataterminal 56. The light receiving angle of the afore mentioned lightreceiving window 150 can be fixed correspondingly in accordance with thepurpose, whereby the light receiving window 150 is in the presentembodiment so designed that, being provided with the zooming efficiency,the light receiving angle is freely variable in accordance with thefocal distance of the telephotolens and the desired light measuringrange by means of the dial 152 on the upper part of the light measuringmeter.

In case of the camera device composed as mentioned above, the mode isautomatically changed over into the external light measuring mode whenthe external light measuring meter is mounted on the accessary shoe 50in such a manner that the exposure is controlled automatically inaccordance with the information coming from the external light measuringmeter, whereby the operablity of the camera device is further enlarged.

With reference to the TTL exposure meter built in the single reflexcamera or the afore mentioned external light measuring meter, the lightmeasuring system is of the so called reflection light system inaccordance to which the light reflected by the object is measured sothat the measured light amount as the subject brightness correspondswith the actual brightness. However, this object brightness is largelyinfluenced by the color tone and the surface condition of the object, sothat this system can not be said the proper method for determining anexact exposure free from the color tone and others of the object bymeasuring the exact brightness, the practicability being hereby putaside. For example when the completely white object and the completelyblack object are measured under the same illumination by means of thereflection light system, the measured light amounts naturally differfrom each other, while when they are measured by means of the incidentlight system there takes place no difference between the two amountsbecause the measured light amount naturally depends only theillumination condition for the object. In consequence the incident lightsystem is preferred in case it is desired to obtain an exact exposureamount, whereby in case of the camera device, even in case of the cameradevice with the automatic exposure control system the automatic exposurecontrol in accordance with the measurement result by means of theincident light system is preferred.

From the above mentioned point of view, the camera system in accordancewith the present embodiment further includes the exposure meter with theincident light system as the external light measuring system.

FIG. 7 shows an incident light system exposure meter applicable to thecamera system in accordance with the present invention in perspectiveview, whereby this exposure meter 60 is connected to the camera deviceby the cord 154. This cord 154 includes a signal line for transmittingvarious informations or data from the exposure meter 160 to the cameradevice, whereby the exposure meter 160 is connected to the cameradevice, the coupler 156 at the one end being mounted on the accessaryshoe 50 of the camera device while the plug provided at the other endbeing fixed on the socket 162 of the exposure meter. The contact 166provided on the bottom surface 164 of the coupler 156 can be contactedto the control terminal 54 provided in the accessary shoe 50 at the sideof the camera device, sending a signal that the exposure meter 160 hasbeen connected to the camera device to the side of the camera in thesame way as the case with the afore mentioned external light measuringmeter. This signal is given as the third information which is differentfrom the charge completion signal consisting of the two informations forthe full-automatic light adjusting operation and for the semi-automaticlight adjusting operation of the speed light device. In case of thecamera device upon receipt of the third information the mode is changedover into the external light measuring mode whereby the analoginformation coming through the data terminal 56 is taken up as theillumination information. This illumination information is treated inthe exposure operation as a value equivalent to the object brightnessput in the aforementioned external light measuring meter. Further thecontact 168 provided at the bottom of the coupler 156 can be broughtinto contact with the data terminal 56 when the coupler 156 is mountedon the afore mentioned accessary shoe 50, serving to transmit theillumination information obtained by the exposure meter 160 to thecamera device through the data terminal 56 as an analog data. Furtherthe contact 170 provided at the bottom of the coupler 156 can be broughtinto the contact with the AE lock terminal 58 of the afore mentionedaccessary shoe 50, serving to lock the automatic exposure controlmechanism of the camera device especially the measured light amount,being brought into contact with the afore mentioned AE lock terminal assoon as the coupler 156 is mounted. The AE lock is released only whilethe light measuring button 174 provided on the exposure meter is beingpushed. Hereby with the pushing of the light measuring button 174 theexposure meter 160 starts the light measurement and stops it as soon asthe button is released.

To explain the exposure member 160 more in detail. 176 is the lightreceiving head rotatably provided and covered by the semi-sphericaldiffusing member 178. At the time of the light measurement, the lightmeasuring button 174 is pushed while the light sensitive part of thelight receiving head 176 is directed toward the camera device from theposition of the object. With this operation, the AE lock at the camerais released whereby the exposure meter 160 starts the light measurementso as to transmit the data concerning the illumination informationmeasured at the afore mentioned light sensitive part to the cameradevice through the cord 154 as analog data. Hereby the camera device inwhich the AE lock is released starts to carry out the operation for theautomatic exposure control basing upon the data concerning theillumination. Further at the time of the light measurement theillumination obtained as the result of the light measurement isdisplayed also by means of the meter 180 at the side of the exposuremeter 160. In consequence, the photographer can also learn thecombination of the aperture value with the shutter time necessary forattaining the proper exposure out of the display by the finger 182 ofthe meter 180 through the calculator. By releasing the pushing of thelight measurement button 174 at the termination of the light measurementthe camera device is brought into the AE locked state while the finger182 of the meter 180 is clamped. By releasing the shutter when thecorresponding handlings such as the framing, the focusing and so on havebeen carried out in this state after taking the exposure meter 160 outof the light measuring position, the exposure can automatically becontrolled basing upon the AE locked operation result so as to obtainthe desired exposure.

Hereby the reason why the AE locking efficiency of the camera device isgiven to this incident light system exposure meter is that it isunavoidable that the incident light system exposure meter should be usedin the neighborhood of the object instead of the place at which thecamera is set at the time of taking a picture, namely the place at whichthe light is measured by the exposure meter 160 is not alway the sameplace at which the camera device is set for taking a picture so thatwhen the shutter is released while the light is being measured, theexposure meter is also photographed together with the object, which hasto be avoided.

Namely the exposure meter 160 carries out the light measurementtemporarily in the neighborhood of the object in the same way as thecase with conventional incident light system exposure meter as a singlebody while the AE lock of the camera device is released only during thelight measurement so that the operation for the automatic exposurecontrol is carried out in accordance with the light measurement data andafter the termination of the light measurement the operation result atthe time of the light measurement is locked by the AE locking in such amanner that after then the exposure can be controlled in accordance withthe operation result at the time of the light measurement even if theexposure meter 160 is brought out of the place at which the light wasmeasured.

As mentioned above the application field of the camera device canlargely be enlarged by giving an automatic exposure control efficiencybasing upon the light measurement data by means of the incident lightsystem exposure meter to the camera device with the automatic exposurecontrol mechanism.

The camera system in accordance with the present invention is sodesigned that the motor drive device is applicable. This motor drivedevice includes a mechanism for automatically winding up the film afterthe shutter release, whereby it is very profitable for photographing anobject in motion in a successive way or catching a proper shutter chanceand moreover the winding up operation of the film is not necessary sothat more attention can be concentrated to the framing or the focusingand the catching of the shutter chance so that the photographicpossibility can remarkably be enlarged.

It is requested that the motor drive device to be applied to the camerasystem in accordance with the present invention should be compact andsuperior in the efficiency in such a manner that the device can beapplied quite effectively for taking a picture while the operability ofthe camera device is not deteriorated in comparison with that beforemounting the device.

FIG. 8 shows an embodiment of the motor drive applied to the camerasystem in accordance with the present invention in perspective below. Inthe drawing, 186 is the motor drive device body, 188 the camera mountingscrew rotatably projecting on the body 186 and engageable into the screwhole provided on the bottom face of the camera body 4 so as to mount thedevice body 186 on the camera body 4, 190 the mount ring being adaptedon the camera mounting screw 188, so as to rotate the mounting screw188, 192 the power source switch of the motor drive device, 194 thepicture number setting gear for setting the photographable number of thepictures of the used film or the numbers of the pictures desired by thephotographers by means of the motor drive device, 196 the film counterto display the number of the remaining pictures in the film fed by meansof this motor drive device or the number of the pictures set by theafore mentioned picture number setting gear, 198 the contact terminal tobe connected to the contact device 72 provided on the lower surface ofthe camera body 4 when this motor drive device is mounted on the cameradevice, 200 the winding up coupler to be mechanically connected to theshaft of the winding up lever of the camera device when the motor drivedevice is mounted on the camera device, 202 the winding back leverprovided for operating the winding back button 48 from the side of themotor drive device, because this button can not be operated when themotor drive device is mounted on the button surface of the camera body 4and 204 the winding back button projecting on the device body 186 whenoperating the afore mentioned winding back lever 202 so as to push thewinding back button 48 on the buttom surface of the camera body 4.Hereby in order to mount the motor drive device on the camera device itis necessary to take off the cover 70 on the bottom surface of thecamera body 4 and to make exposed the coupler 206 to be mechanicallylinked with the shaft of the winding up lever 14 of the camera device.When the motor drive device 186 has been mounted on the bottom surfaceof the camera body 4 after removing the afore mentioned cover 70, thewinding coupler 200 at the side of the device body 186 is adapted to thecoupler at the side of the camera body 4 so as to enable the filmwinding up from the side of the motor drive device.

Hereby it is necessary that the motor drive device mounted on the cameradevice should operate in close connection with other operations of thecamera device, for which purpose some information transmission means isnecessary between the drive device and the camera device. The contactdevice 72 at the side of the camera device and the contact terminal 198at the side of the motor drive device are provided also for the abovementioned purpose, whereby when the motor drive device is mounted on thecamera device the three contacts 214, 216 and 218 included in thecontact device 72 on the bottom surface of the camera body 4 arerespectively connected electrically to the three contacts 208, 210 and212 included in the contact terminal 198 of the motor drive device 186.Hereby the contact of the contact 208 with the contact 214 serves as theearthing between the camera device and the motor drive device while thecontact of the contact 210 with the contact 216 serves to transmit thesignal for driving the winding up motor from the side of the cameradevice to the motor drive device until the winding up has beenterminated since the termination of the exposure. Further the contact ofthe contact 212 with the contact 218 serves to release the shutter ofthe camera device by means of the shutter release device provided at theside of the motor drive device.

Hereby 220 is the afore mentioned shutter release device serving tooperate the camera device, especially to wind up film by the shutterreleasing and the motor drive device from a remote place. This shutterrelease device 220 is connected to the motor drive device 186 by meansof a control cord 222 of a corresponding length by inserting the plug224 provided at the end of the afore mentioned control cord 222 into thesocket 226 provided on the motor drive device 186. This shutter releasedevice 220 includes an operation button 228, whereby by operating thisoperation button 228 a shutter release signal is given from the motordrive device to the camera device through the afore mentioned contacts212 and 218. The service of this operation button 228 is quite same asthat of the shutter release button 18 provided on the upper surface ofthe camera body 4. Further the afore mentioned operation button can belocked in the pushed down state, when being displaced along thedirection of the arrow while being pushed down.

To explain the motor drive device constructed as mentioned above more indetail, in order to apply the motor drive device to the camera device atfirst the cover 70 provided on the bottom surface of the camera body 4is removed and then the bottom surface of the camera body 4 is laid onthe upper surface of the motor drive device 186. In this state thewinding up coupler 200 is in a position in which the coupler 200 can beadapted to the coupler 206, while the mounting screw is in an engageableposition into the screw hole 68. Further the pin 204 is opposed to thewinding back button 48. Further it is necessary that the contacts 208,210 and 212 of the contact terminal should be at the positions at whichthey can be brought into contact with the corresponding contacts 214,216 and 218 of the contact device 72 respectively. This positioning caneasily and quickly made by holding the bottom surface of the camera body4 by means of the holding edge 228 provided at the edge of the uppersurface of the motor drive device so far as the camera device and themotor drive device are not reversed in the direction. Then being rotatedby rotating the mounting ring 190, the mounting screw 190 is engagedinto the screw hole 68 provided on the buttom surface of the camera body4 in such a manner that the motor drive device is secured on the camerabody 4. In this state the winding up coupler 200 is adapted to thecoupler 206, whereby the contacts 208, 210 and 212 of the contactterminal 198 are brought into the corresponding contacts 214, 216 and218 of the contact device 72. Hereby the winding coupler 200 and thecoupler 206 are adapted to each other by engaging the two claws 230 ofthe winding up coupler 200 into the two engaging holes 232 of thecoupler, whereby depending upon the rotation position of the respectivecoupler at times the claws 230 of the winding up coupler 200 are notengaged into the engaging holes 232 of the coupler well. In order toavoid such inconvenience, the winding up coupler 200 is so designed asto be retirable along its axial direction, being held protruding bymeans of a spring. Namely in case the claws 230 of the winding upcoupler 200 are not engaged into the engaging holes 232 of the coupler206, the claws are retired, being pushed by other parts than theengaging holes 232 of the coupler 206, so that it can be avoided thatunreasonable strength should be exercised on the couplers at the time ofthe mounting of the motor drive device. However, when hereby due to theoperation of the winding up lever 14 at the side of the camera device orthe rotation of the winding up coupler 200 or of the coupler 206 theclaws 230 are brought into the position at which the claws 230 can beengaged into the engaging holes 232, the claws protrude by means of thestrength of the spring so as to be engaged into the engaging holes 232.

With the mounting of the motor drive device, the film can be wound upautomatically after the termination of each photographing at the side ofthe camera device so as to carry out successive photographing. When thephotographer desires to take pictures by means of the motor drivedevice, the motor drive device is switched in by means of the powersource switch 192. When at this time the film has been wound up at theside of the camera device, the motor drive device remains in the waitingstate, while the film has not been wound up yet the motor drive deviceenters into the waiting state, having once wound up the film. Then byoperating the shutter release button 18 at the side of the cameradevice, the film is wound up by means of the motor drive device afterphotographing. Further by holding the afore mentioned shutter releasebutton 18 pushed, the shutter release and the film winding up arerepeated in a successive way. Further every time the film is wound uponce, the film counter 196 carries out one subtraction counting untilthe content of the counter 196 becomes "0", when the motor drive deviceis restricted in the operation. This is particularly important forprotecting the film perforations, preventing the motor drive device frombeen exposed to the unreasonable strength.

When the film is wound back after the termination of the whole film, thewinding back lever 202 is wound back along the direction of the arrow,the winding back pin 48 of the camera device is pushed by the pin andthen it becomes possible to wind back the film.

Hereby the shutter release device 220 has the same efficiency as that ofthe shutter release button 18 provided at the side of the camera side,whereby when the operation button 228 is pushed down the shutter isreleased and the film is wound up, while when the operation button iskept being pushed or locked, the shutter is released and the film iswound up in a successive way.

Further when the shutter release button 18 is kept in the pushed downstate or the operation button 228 of the shutter release device islocked in the pushed down state while the selector lever 22 provided onthe upper surface of the camera body 4 is being kept at the position atwhich the mark 28 is selected, the shutter is released and the film iswound up repeatedly at a time interval determined by means of theself-timer mechanism.

As explained above the motor drive device to be applied to the camerasystem in accordance with the present invention contributes much toenlarge the application field of this camera device and to increase themobility, the snap-shot efficiency and the operability of this cameradevice.

As explained above the view finder plays a remarkably important role forthe camera handling, because almost all of the camera handling includingthe framing and the focusing constituting basic camera handlings aremade through the view finder in such a manner that the view finder hassomething very important with the operability of the camera, andtherefore the operability can further increased remarkably if almost allof the informations necessary for the camera handling can be obtainedthrough the view finder. Hereby it is essential that the photographicinformations to be displayed in the view finder should be distributedefficiently in a limited area while the displayed informations couldeasily be recognized. This is important in order that the photographercan concentrate his attention to the framing and the focusing.

The view finder of the camera device in accordance with the presentinvention presents a novel information display system by means of whichthe photographic informations can be efficiently and easily observedwhile the misoperation of the camera can be avoided, the operabilitybeing much improved.

Through this information display system the photographer can obtainvarious informations such as the shutter time, the low brightness alarmfor aperture value, the high brightness alarm for aperture values, theautomatic or manual operation, the bulb signal, the speed light devicecharge completion signal and the alarm of misoperation and so on, sothat he is in a position to get all the informations for all thesituation while he is looking through the view finder.

FIG. 9 shows the view finder information displayed in the view finderwindow 13 of the camera device, whereby on the focusing screen 234 asplit portion 236 and a microprism portion 238 are arranged coaxially inorder that the focusing can be carried out precisely and quickly. Thisfocusing screen is one of the most important part, because the image ofthe object is formed thereon so as to carry out the focusing and theframing, whereby the photographer can obtain desired informationsnecessary for taking a picture from a part of the circumference of thisfocusing screen 234. In order that the photographic informations can berecognized in the darkness for example in case of the speed lightphotography or the stage photography, the display consists ofilluminating elements such as LED and the like, whereby the presentembodiment is characterized in the digital display of the informations.Different from the conventional fixed point system or the conventionalfollow finger system from which relative photographic informations areobtained, it is possible to obtain objective photographic informationsfrom the present digital display system of the informations, so that thephotographer can judge the depth of the object field and the unstablemanual holding already in advance at the time of the framing and thefocusing operation in such a manner that a more correct photographingbecomes possible.

Being provided on a part of the focusing screen 234, this LED displaypart is composed of a first display part 244, consisting of a numericalfigure display part 242 consisting of a figure display part 240 fordisplaying a reciprocal number and "8" segments for displaying fournumerical figures or signs and of a decimal point display part 243 fordisplaying the decimal point, a second display part 250 consisting of adecimal point display part 246 for displaying the decimal point and of anumerical figure display part 248 consisting of "8" segments fordisplaying two numerical figures or signs and a third display part 252for displaying a figure "M" at the time of the manual operation.

The afore mentioned first display part mainly serves to display theshutter time while the second display part mainly serves to display theaperture value, whereby other informations can also be displayed inaccordance with the operation mode.

Namely beside the display of the shutter time from 60 sec. to 1/2000sec. the first display part displays "buLb" when "bulb" is selected asshutter time, "EF" display together with the speed light photographicshutter time so as to tell the photographer that the speed lightphotography is possible when the speed light device has been charged and"EEEE" twinkling display as alarm so as to tell the photographer thatthe normal photographing is impossible.

Further beside the display of the aperture value from F1.2 to F22, incase the exposure is manually adjusted by means of the aperture settingring 8 while the diaphragm of the lens device 2 is being closed, theafore mentioned second display part displays "oP" twinkling display soas to tell the photographer that the manually set aperture value givesthe under-exposure, "oL" twinkling display so as to tell thephotographer that the manually set aperture value gives theover-exposure and "oo" display so as to tell the photographer that themanually set aperture value gives the proper exposure and further "EE"twinkling display, together with the afore mentioned first display part,as alarm so as to tell the photographer that the normal photographing isimpossible.

As explained above, the informations displayed in the view finder have aclose relation with various operation modes of the camera device.Consequently the operation modes of the camera device shown in FIG. 1will be explained below while the informations displayed in the viewfinder in accordance with the operation modes will be explained inaccordance with FIG. 10.

In case now the automatic exposure control photography (hereinaftercalled AE photography) is carried out with priority on shutter speed bythe camera device shown in FIG. 1, the mode change over switch 38provided on the camera body 4 is set at the side of the priority onshutter time in such a manner that the set set shutter time can be putin by rotating the dial 34. Further the mark 12 on the aperture settingring 8 at the side of the lens device 2 is set at the mark 7 in such amanner that the diaphragm of the lens device 2 can be controlled, presetfrom the side of the camera body 4. Now this camera device has beenbrought into the state in which the AE photography with priority onshutter time is possible, whereby with the rotation of the dial 34 theshutter time displayed in the afore mentioned display part 244 alters.Hereby the shutter time is displayed as is shown in FIG. 10(a)-(I),whereby the photographer can select and set the desired shutter time byrotating the afore mentioned dial 34, while looking at the shutter timedisplayed in the first display part 244. At the same time in a not shownoperation circuit, an aperture value necessary for the proper exposure,or the over-exposure or the under-exposure designed by the photographer(the over-exposure or the under-exposure can be obtained by selecting(+) or (-) of the scale 42 of the ASA sensitivity setting dial providedon the upper surface of the camera body 4, whereby they are also calledproper exposure here), are operated in accordance with the objectbrightness information corresponding to the brightness of the object (orthe illumination) and are displayed in the second display part 250 as isshown in FIG. 10(a)-(I). In consequence the photographer can know theaperture value operated for the shutter time set by himself before theshutter time. When in this state the shutter is released in the cameradevice, the diaphragm of the lens device 2 is closed down to theoperated aperture value and the shutter is released with the set shuttertime.

Hereby the aperture of the diaphragm of the lens device 2 to be used hasthe upper and the lower limit, whereby when the aperture value operatedfor the set shutter time is smaller than the smallest aperture value ofthe photographic lens device 2, namely the object brightness is too low,the aperture control with the operated aperture value is impossible. Inthis case, the second display part 250 displays twinkling the aperturevalue of the photographic lens corresponding to the controlable aperturevalue, namely the smallest aperture value so as to tell the photographerthe above mentioned fact. Hereby the controlable aperture value of thephotographic lens 2, namely the smallest aperture value is taken up fromthe totally opening pin 90 of the photographic lens device 2 through thetotally opening input pin 96 at the side of the camera body 4.

In case hereby the aperture value operated for the shutter time set bymeans of the dial 34 is larger than the largest aperture value of thephotographic lens device 2, namely the object brightness is too high,the aperture control is impossible with the operated aperture value. Inthis case the second display part 250 displays twinkling the aperturevalue of the photographic lens 2 corresponding to the controlableaperture value, namely the largest aperture value so as to tell thephotographer the fact.

Hereby the controlable largest aperture value of the photographic lensdevice 2 is taken up from the smallest diameter pin of the lens device 2through the smallest diameter input pin 97 at the side of the camerabody 4.

Hereby even if the smallest or the largest aperture value is displayedtwinkling as alarm at the second display part 250 when the objectbrightness is too low or too high for the set shutter time, the shuttercan be released, whereby the aperture value is controlled by the valuedisplayed twinkling at the second display part 250.

In case now the AE photography is carried out with priority on aperturevalue, the mode changing over switch 38 provided on the camera body 4 isset at the side of the priority on aperture value in such a manner thatthe aperture value can be set and put in by operating the dial. Furtherthe mark 12 of the aperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lensdevice 2 is set at the index in such a manner that the diaphragm of thelens device 2 can be preset and controlled at the aperture value set atthe dial at the side of the camera body 4. In this state this cameradevice is in the state in which the AE photography can be carried outwith priority on aperture value, whereby with the rotation of the dial34 the aperture value displayed at the afore mentioned second displaypart 250 alters. Hereby the aperture value is displayed as is shown inFIG. 10(a)-(II), whereby the photographer is in a position to select andset the desired aperture value by operating the afore mentioned dial 34,while looking at the aperture value displayed at the afore mentioneddisplay part 250. At the same time in the not shown operation circuitthe shutter time necessary for obtaining the proper exposure is operatedin accordance with the object brightness information corresponding tothe brightness of the object (or illumination information) and displayedat the first display part 244 as is shown in FIG. 10(a)-(II). Inconsequence, the photographer can learn the shutter time operated forthe aperture value set himself before the shutter release. When in thisstate the shutter is released, in the camera device the diaphragm of thecamera device is closed down to the set aperture value and the shutteris released with the operated shutter time.

Further the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 has theupper and the lower limit, whereby when the aperture value set at thedial 34 at the side of the camera body 4 is smaller than the smallestvalue of the photographic lens device 2, the diaphragm can not becontrolled with the set aperture value. In this case, the aperture valuecan be said misset, whereby some counter-measure is necessary. For suchmissetting in this embodiment the smallest aperture value of thephotographic lens is treated as set. In case for example the aperturevalue is set at "1.4" in F-number at the dial 34 at the side of thecamera body 4 although smallest aperture value of the lens device 2 is1.8 in F-number, actually the aperture value is treated as set at "1.8"in F-number in the camera device, whereby the shutter time is operatedfor this aperture value. At this time independently of the value set atthe dial 34 the aperture value and the shutter time for actuallycontrolling the exposure are displayed as is shown in FIG. 10(e)-(I).

When on the other hand, the aperture value set at the dial 34 at theside of the camera body 4 is larger than the largest aperture value ofthe photographic lens device 2, the diaphragm can not be controlled withthe set aperture value. In this case, the aperture value can be saidmisset and some counter measures are necessary. In this embodiment forsuch missetting the largest aperture value of the photographic lens istreated to be set. In case for example, the aperture value of "22" inF-number is set at the dial 34 at the side of the camera body 4 althoughthe largest aperture value of the lens device 2 is "16" in F-number, inthe camera device the aperture value of "16" in F-number is treated tobe set actually so as to operate the shutter time basing upon thisvalue. At this time, the aperture value and the shutter time for theactual exposure control independent of the value set at the dial 34 aredisplayed in the view finder as is shown in FIG. 10(e)-(II).

Further the shutter time controlable at the camera body 4 has the upperand the lower limit, whereby in case the shutter time operated for theset aperture value is longer than the shutter speed controlable at theside of the camera body 4, namely the object brightness is too low theshutter time can not be controlled with the operated shutter time. Inthis case, the first display part 244 displays twinkling the shuttertime corresponding to the longest controlable shutter time so as toalarm the photographer.

In case the operated shutter time for the aperture value set at the dial34 is shorter than the time controlable at the side of the camera body4, namely the object brightness is too high, the shutter can not becontrolled with the operated shutter time. In this case the firstdisplay part 244 displays twinkling the shortest shutter time capable ofcontrolling shutter so as to alarm the photographer.

Hereby even if the first display part 244 displays twinkling the longestor the shortest shutter time when the object brightness is too low ortoo high for the set aperture value, the shutter can be released. Inthis case the shutter time is controlled with the value displayedtwinkling at the first display part 244.

The camera device shown in FIG. 1 is designed so as to be intendedmainly for the above mentioned two modes, namely the AE photographicmode with priority on shutter time and the AE photographic mode withpriority on aperture value, whereby almost all of the requirements ofthe ordinary photography are thought to be met with the above mentionedtwo modes.

However, at the side of the lens device 2 the mark 12 on the aperturesetting ring 8 is not always set at the index 7, whereby there is apossibility that at time the aperture value indication 9 on the ring 8should be set at the index 7. In this case, the camera device is broughtinto the totally opened light measuring, manual exposure adjustmentphotographic mode. At this time two modes, namely the mode that theaperture value is manually set at the side of the lens device 2 afterthe shutter time is set at the dial 34 with priority depending upon themode selector 38 and the mode that the same aperture value is manuallyset also at the side of the lens device 2 after the aperture value isset at the dial 34 with priority. In case now the mode selector 38 isset at the side of the priority on shutter speed, the dial 34 serves toset the shutter time, whereby by operating this dial 34 an optionalshutter time can be selected. Hereby the selected and set shutter timeis displayed at the first display part 244 as is shown in FIG.10(a)-(II). In the camera device, on the other hand, the aperture valueof the photographic lens device 2 for obtaining the proper exposure isoperated in accordance with the object brightness information obtainedthrough the lens device or the set shutter time and so on and isdisplayed at the second display part 250 as is shown in FIG. 10(a)-(II).Further at this time, the aperture value displayed at the second displaypart 250 is not controlled from the side of the camera body 4 but ispreset at the side of the lens device 2 by setting the aperture valuedisplayed at the second display part 250 out of the aperture valuedisplay 9 on the aperture setting ring 8 at the index 7 by means of theaperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2. Further inorder to tell the photographer that is necessary to set the aperturevalue displayed at the second display part 250 manually at the side ofthe lens device 2, the letter "M" is displayed at the third display partin the view finder. Further in case the mode selector 38 is set at theside of the priority on the aperture value, the dial 34 serves to setthe aperture value, whereby by operating this dial 34 an optionalaperture value can be selected and set. Hereby the selected and setaperture value is displayed at the second display part 250 as is shownin FIG. 10(a)-(III). On the other hand in the camera device, the shuttertime necessary for obtaining the proper exposure is operated inaccordance with the object brightness information obtained through thelens device 2 or the set aperture value and so on and displayed at thesecond display part 244 as is shown in FIG. 10(a)-(III). Hereby theaperture value displayed at the second display part 250 is notcontrolled from the side of the camera body 4 but preset from the sideof the lens device 2 by means of the aperture setting ring 8 at the sideof the lens device 2 by setting a value equal to the aperture valuedisplayed at the second display part out of the aperture valueindication 9 on the aperture setting ring 8, namely the aperture valueset at the dial 34 at the index 7. In this way the letter "M" isdisplayed at the third display part 252 in the view finder in order totell the photographer that it is necessary to set the aperture valuedisplayed at the second display part 250 manually at the side of thelens device 2.

As mentioned above by setting the shutter time or the aperture value bymeans of the dial and manually setting the aperture value at the side ofthe lens device 2 in accordance with the display at the second displaypart 250 in the view finder the lens device 2 is closed down to theposition manually set in such a manner that in the camera body 4 theshutter is released with the shutter time set by means of the dial 34 oroperated, whereby the proper exposure can be obtained.

In case hereby the mode selector 38 is set at the side of the priorityon the aperture value even if the camera device is in this totallyopened light measuring, manual exposure adjustment photographic mode,the AE photography with priority on aperture value is possible bysetting in advance in such a manner that the aperture value set by meansof the dial 34 always corresponds with the aperture value to be set atthe side of the lens device 2. Namely in case of the AE photography withpriority on aperture value the exposure time for the set aperture valueis operated and controlled, so that in case the lens device 2 is presetfor the aperture value preset in advance, the action of the system mustbe same no matter whether the presetting is made from the side of thecamera body 4 or from the side of the lens device. Nevertheless theaperture value must be set by both of the camera body 4 and the lensdevice 2 in this case, which is unavoidably a remarkable hindrance forthe operability.

Further in case of the totally opened light measuring manual exposureadjustment photographic mode it happens that the aperture value operatedfor the set shutter time is smaller than the smallest aperture value ofthe lens device 2 or larger than the largest aperture value, whereby thesmallest aperture value or the largest aperture value is displayedtwinkling in order to alarm the photographer.

Further in case of this mode it also happens that the shutter timeoperated for the set aperture value is shorter than the shortest shuttertime controlable at the side of the camera body 4 or longer than thelongest shutter time, whereby the shortest shutter time or the longestshutter time is displayed twinkling so as to alarm the photographer.

Further especially in case the mode selector 8 is set at the side ofpriority on aperture value in this mode, the range of the aperture valueset at the dial 34 is naturally different from that which can be set atthe side of the lens device 2.

In short the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be usedhas the upper and the lower limit so that when the aperture value set bythe dial 34 at the side of the camera body 4 is smaller than that of thesmallest aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 the diaphragmcan not be controlled with the set aperture value. In this case theaperture value is misset, whereby some counter-measures are necessary.For such a missetting in this embodiment, the smallest aperture value ofthe photographic lens is treated to be set. This is same as the casewith the AE photographic mode with priority on aperture value.

In case on the other hand the aperture value set at the dial 34 at theside of the camera body 4 is larger than the largest aperture value ofthe photographic lens device 2, the diaphragm can not be controlled withthe set aperture value. In this case, the aperture value is misset,whereby some counter-measures are necessary. For such missetting in thisembodiment, the largest aperture value of the photographic lens istreated to be set. This is same with the case with the AE photographicmode with priority on aperture value.

In case of the AE photographic mode with priority on shutter speed, theAE photographic mode with priority on aperture value and the totallyopened light measuring, manual exposure adjustment photographic mode,the light is measured with the totally opened diaphragm, so that thereremains a problem that the effect of the diaphragm closing, especiallythe object field depth at the time of shutter release can not beconfirmed on the focusing screen 234 in the view finder.

Especially in case of the AE photographic mode, the aperture valuedisplayed in the second display part in the view finder is preset onlyafter the shutter release so that before the shutter release the effectof the closed diaphragm can not be confirmed by means of the diaphragmclosing lever 64. The reason is that, as is clear from the explanationof FIG. 2, when the aperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lensdevice 2 is selected and set at the mark□ for the AE photographic modethe AE charge is released by operating the diaphragm closing lever 64 insuch a manner that the diaphragm at the side of the lens device 2 cannot be controlled from the side of the camera body 4, and therefore asis mentioned afore the diaphragm closing lever 64 is locked so as to beunoperable in such a case.

On the other hand in case of the totally opened light measuring, manualexposure adjustment photographic mode it is possible to close thediaphragm of the lens device 2 down to the position preset at theaperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2 by operatingthe diaphragm closing lever 64. Through this operation the photographercan confirm the state of the image on the focusing screen when thediaphragm of the lens device 2 is closed down to the set position.Hereby by means of the diaphragm closing operation at this time thecamera device is changed over from the light measurement with thetotally opened diaphragm to the light measurement with the closeddiaphragm, whereby the control operation in the camera device differsdepending upon whether the mode change over switch 38 is at the side ofthe priority on shutter time or of the priority on aperture value. Incase hereby this mode change over switch 38 is set at the side of thepriority on aperture value, the camera device is in the AE photographicmode with priority on aperture value with the light measurement throughthe closed diaphragm, while in case the switch 38 is set at the side ofpriority on shutter time, the camera device is in the manual exposureadjustment photographic mode with the light measurement through theclosed diaphragm.

Below the AE photographic mode with priority on aperture value with thelight measurement through the closed diaphragm will be explained. Thediaphragm of the lens device 2 is normally in the closed state, wherebythe aperture value alters in accordance with the set position of theaperture setting ring 8. On the other hand no matter which aperturevalue is set at the dial 34 at this time, it is disregarded. In thecamera body 4 at this time the object brightness with aperture valuetaken into consideration is measured through the lens device 2 whosediaphragm is closed down to the position set by the aperture settingring 8, whereby the shutter time is operated for obtaining the properexposure at this time. The shutter time operated in this way isdisplayed at the first display part in the view finder as is shown inFIG. 10(a)-(IV).

When the shutter is released after the above mentioned operation, theaperture value with the diaphragm in the closed state is maintained atthe side of the lens device 2 while in the camera body 4 the shutter isreleased with the shutter time operated and displayed at the firstdisplay part 244 so as to obtain the proper exposure.

Hereby in case the shutter time operated from the light measured withthe closed diaphragm is longer than the shutter time controlable in thecamera body 4 even in the above mentioned mode, the shutter can not becontrolled with the operated shutter time. In such a case the shuttertime corresponding to the longest controlable shutter time is displayedtwinkling at the first display part 244 so as to alarm the photographer.

Further in case the shutter time operated out of the light measured withthe closed diaphragm is shorter than the shortest controlable shuttertime at the side of the camera body 4, the shutter can not be controlledwith the operated shutter time. In such a case the shortest controlableshutter time is displayed twinkling at the first display part so as toalarm the photographer.

Hereby in this photographic mode the aperture value is not displayed inthe second display part 250 in the view finder. The reason is that, asis explained in accordance with FIG. 2, the camera body 4 does notpresent any means for taking up the aperture value set by the aperturesetting ring 8, at the side of the lens device 2.

Below the manual exposure adjustment photographic mode with the lightmeasurement through the closed diaphragm will be explained. Thediaphragm of the lens device 2 is normally in the closed state, wherebythe aperture value varies in accordance with the set position of theaperture setting ring 8. On the other hand at this time the shutter timeis set at the dial 34, whereby the set shutter time is displayed in thefirst display part 244 in the view finder. At this time in the camerabody 4 the object brightness with the aperture value taken intoconsideration is measured through the lens device 2 whose diaphragm isclosed down to the position set by the aperture setting ring, wherebywhether the proper exposure can be obtained with the set shutter time isjudged. In case it is confirmed that with the combination of the thenaperture value with the shutter time the proper exposure or the exposurewith a certain determined allowance can be obtained. "00" is displayedin the second display part 250 as is shown in FIG. 10(a)-(V) so as totell the photographer that the proper exposure or the exposure with acertain determined allowance can be otained with the then set aperturevalue and the shutter speed.

When on the other hand it is judged that the exposure is under with thecombination of the then set aperture value and the shutter time, "OP" isdisplayed twinkling at the second display part 250 as is shown in FIG.10(a)-(V) so as to tell the photographer that the exposure is under withthe combination of the then set aperture value and the shutter time. Insuch a case the photographer can set the shutter time or the aperturevalue necessary for obtaining the proper exposure or the exposure with acertain determined allowance, by operating the aperture setting ring 8so as to set the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2smaller or by operating the dial 34 so as to set the shutter time longeruntil "00" for the proper exposure is displayed in the second displaypart 250.

When on the other hand it is judged that the exposure is over with thecombination of the then set aperture value with the shutter time, "CL"is displayed twinkling at the second display part 250 as is shown inFIG. 10(a)-(V) so as to tell the photographer that the exposure is overwith the combination of the then set aperture value and the shuttertime. In such a case the photographer can set the aperture value or theshutter time necessary for obtaining the proper exposure or the exposurewith a certain determined allowance by operating the aperture settingring so as to set the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2larger or by operating the dial so as to set the shutter time shorteruntil "00" for the proper exposure is displayed in the second displaypart 250.

Further in case of this manual exposure adjustment photographic modewith the light measurement through the closed diaphragm "M" for themanual mode is displayed in the third display part 252 in the viewfinder.

When the shutter is released after the above mentioned operations theaperture value with the closed diaphragm is maintained in the lensdevice 2 while in the camera body 4 the shutter is released with theshutter time set by the dial 34, whereby the proper exposure can beobtained.

When then the mode change over switch 38 is set at the side of thepriority on shutter time, the bulb mode can be selected by the dial 34.In case the dial 34 is set at "bulb", the shutter is kept opened whilethe shutter released button 18 is being operated in such a manner thatthe shutter time can be selected optionally by the photographer, wherebyin most cases the bulb is used for the long time exposure.

Further in case of the bulb photographic mode, when the bulb is set bythe dial while the mark 12 is set at the index 7 with the aperturesetting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2, the aperture value tobe controlled can not be operated because no shutter time is set. Inconsequence it is desirable that the aperture should be set manually atsome value, whereby the present embodiment is so designed that theaperture is controlled at the smallest value in case no special aperturevalue is set, the fact that the bulb photographic mode mostly used incase of the low brightness. At this time in the first display part 244in the view finder "buLb" is displayed while in the second display part250 the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be usedwhere diaphragm is totally opened is displayed as is shown in FIG.10(b)-(I).

On the other hand in case of the bulb photographic mode, when the bulbis set by the dial 34 while the aperture value is set at the side of thelens device 2 in accordance with the aperture value indication 9 on theaperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2, the cameradevice enters completely into the manual mode. In the view finder atthis time "buLb" is displayed in the first display part 244 as is shownin FIG. 10(b)-(II), while in the third display part 252 "M" isdisplayed. The reason why at this time the aperture value set at theside of the lens device 2 is not displayed in the second display part250 is that, as already explained repeatedly, the camera body does notpresent any means for taking up the aperture value set at the side ofthe lens device 2.

Below the speed light photographic mode will be explained. This cameradevice, particularly the camera system of this embodiment is to designedthat the speed light device shown in FIG. 5 is applicable, whereby theexposure can be automatically controlled by the speed light device.

The speed light device shown in FIG. 5 present an automatic lightadjusting efficiency as mentioned afore, being mounted on the camerabody 4 by adapting the shoe 134 on the accessory shoe 50 provided at theside of the camera device 4, whereby the synchronization contact 138,the control signal contact 140 and the data signal contact 142 arebrought into electrical contact respectively with the synchronizationcontact 52, the control contact 54 and the data terminal 56 at the sideof the camera body 4.

Hereby it is necessary to consider this speed light device, deviding itsmode into two cases, namely the automatic light adjustment mode and thetotal light amount mode.

The above mentioned automatic light adjustment mode is selected when acertain determined aperture value is set by the aperture setting dial108, whereby, as explained afore, in order to give a proper exposure tothe film surface with the set aperture value the flash light isprojected from the illuminating part 102 while the light reflected fromthe object is detected by the detector 104 so as to adjust the amount ofthe flash light projected from the above mentioned illuminating part102, whereby the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 isgiven to the side of the camera body 4 through the data signal contact142 and the data terminal 56 as an analog signal.

On the other hand the total light amount mode is selected when the mark"M" is set by the aperture setting dial 108 instead of a particularaperture value, whereby the speed light device issues the possible totallight amount, the flash light projected from the illuminating part beingnot restricted at all. Hereby the fact that the speed light device is inthe total light amount mode is transmitted the side of the camera body 4through the data signal contact 142 and data terminal 56 by means of ananalog signal at a certain determined level.

Hereby no matter in which of the automatic light adjustment mode or thetotal light amount mode the speed light device is, it gives to thecamera body 4 a signal for controlling the shutter time. The reason is,as is already mentioned, that the now existing focal plane shutter cannot be synchronized with the speed light with a shutter time shorterthan 1/60 sec. or 1/125 sec., whereby either the full automatic controlor the semi-automatic control can be optionally selected. This fullautomatic control or the semi-automatic control are selected by means ofthe change over switch 146, whereby in case the full automatic controlsystem is selected, no matter which shutter time is selected by the dial34 of the camera body 4, at the same time with the charge completion ofthe speed light device the charge completion signal in delivered as ananalog signal at the first level from the side of the speed light devicethrough the control signal contact 140 and control terminal 54 so as toset the shutter time at the side of the camera body 4 at the speed lightsynchronization shutter time TSYN, while in case the semi-automaticcontrol system is selected, only when a shutter time shorter than thespeed light synchronization shutter time TSYN is selected by the dial 34at the side of the camera body 4 the charge completion signal isdelivered as an analog signal at the second level from the side of thespeed light device through the control signal contact 140 and thecontrol terminal 54 so as to automatically set the shutter time at theside of the camera body 4 at the speed light synchronization shuttertime TSYN, while when the shutter time set by the dial 34 of the cameralbody 4 is longer than the speed light synchronization time TSYN, theshutter time remain uncontrolled.

Hereby no matter which of the full automatic system of thesemi-automatic system is selected by the change over switch at the sideof the speed light device, in case the "bulb" is selected by the dial 34at the side of the camera body 4, the shutter of the camera deviceoperates with the first priority on bulb.

On the other hand the efficiency of the camera device greatly alters inaccordance with the position at which the aperture setting ring 8 at theside of the lens device 2 is set, no matter in which state the camerabody 4 and the speed light device are, which depends upon whether themark 12 is set at the index 7 by the aperture setting ring 8.

Further, when the charge completion signal is delivered from the speedlight device to the camera body 4 in case of the speed lightphotographic mode, "EF" is displayed in the last two positions at thefirst display part 244 in the view finder so as to tell the photographerthat the speed light device is ready for operation as is shown in FIG.10(c).

Below various kinds of the control or operation systems will beexplained, whereby it goes without saying that it is necessary to applythese systems so as to meet the photographic purpose.

The first one is the case when the speed light device is in the fullautomatic light adjusting mode, the full automatic mode is set for theshutter time and moreover the shutter time is set by the dial 34 and themark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time thecamera device is in the AE photographic mode with priority on shuttertime before the charge completion of the speed light device whereby whenthe charge completion signal is delivered from the speed light device tothe camera device 4 the camera device is brought into the full automaticcontrol, automatic light adjustment, automatic speed light photographicmode. At this time the shutter time at the camera body 4 isautomatically set at the speed light synchronization shutter time TSYN,for example at 1/60 sec, whereby the diaphragm of the photographic lens2 is controlled from the side of the camera body 4 with the aperturevalue set by the aperture setting dial 108 at the side of the speedlight device. At this time the display in the view finder is as shown inFIG. 10(c)-(I), whereby in the first display part 244 the speed lightsynchronization shutter time TSYN, for example 1/60 sec, and "EF" forthe charge completion signal of the speed light device are displayed,while in the second display part 250 the aperture value set at the sideof the speed light device is displayed. Hereby when the shutter isreleased in this state, the speed light device operates with theautomatic light adjustment itself while the camera device is controlledwith the same shutter time and the same aperture value as is shown inthe view finder.

The second one is the case when the speed light device is in theautomatic light adjustment mode, the full automatic control is set forthe shutter time and moreover the shutter time is set by the dial, whilethe mark 12 is not selected by the aperture setting ring 8. At this timethe camera device is in the manual exposure control photographic modewith light measurement through the totally opened diaphragm and readyfor operation before the charge completion of the speed light device,whereby when the charge completion signal of the speed light device isgiven to the camera body 4 the camera device is brought into the fullautomatic control, automatic light adjustment, the manual speed lightphotographic mode. At this time the shutter time at the side of thecamera body 4 is automatically set at the speed light synchronizationshutter time, while the diaphragm of the photographic lens 2 is manuallyset and controlled by means of the aperture setting ring 8. The displayat this time is as is shown in FIG. 10(c)-(II), whereby in the firstdisplay part 244 the speed light synchronization shutter time and "EF"for the charge completion of the speed light are displayed, while in thesecond display part 250 the aperture value set at the side of the speedlight device is displayed and in the third display part "M" is displayedso as to tell the photographer that it is necessary to set the apertureby the aperture setting ring 8 manually. In consequence it is necessaryfor the photographer to set the aperture at the side of the lens device2 in accordance with the aperture value displayed at the second displaypart 252 in the view finder, namely the aperture value set at the sideof the speed light device, whereby when the shutter is released in thisstate, the speed light device operates with the automatic lightadjustment mode itself, while the camera device is controlled with thesame shutter time as displayed in the view finder and the aperture valuemanually set at the lens device.

The third one is the case when the speed light device is in theautomatic light adjustment mode, the full automatic control is set forthe shutter and moreover the shutter time is set at the position of bulbby the dial 34 and the mark 12 is selected at the aperture setting ring.At this time the camera device is in the bulb photographic mode beforethe charge completion of the speed light, whereby the bulb photographyis possible with the totally opened diaphragm, while when the chargecompletion signal of the speed light device is given to the camera body4 the camera device is brought into the bulb, automatic lightadjustment, automatic speed light photographic mode. At this time theshutter time at the side of the camera body 4 is set at bulb withpriority and the diaphragm of the photographic lens 2 is controlled fromthe side of the camera body 4 with the aperture value set by theaperture setting dial 108 at the side of the speed light device. Herebythe display in the view finder at this time is as is shown in FIG.10(c)-(III), whereby in the first display part 244 "b" for the bulbphotographic mode and "EF" for the charge completion signal of the speedlight device is displayed while in the second display part 250 theaperture value set at the side of the speed light is displayed. When theshutter is released in this state the speed light device operates withthe automatic light adjustment mode itself while the camera device iscontrolled with a shutter time optional to the photographer and the sameaperture value as shown in the view finder.

The fourth one is the case when the speed light device is in theautomatic light adjustment mode, the full automatic control is set forthe shutter and moreover the shutter time is set at the bulb position bymeans of the dial 34, while the mark 12 is not selected by the aperturesetting ring 8. At this time the camera device is in the bulbphotographic mode before the charge completion of the speed light devicewhereby the bulb photography is possible with the aperture value set atthe side of the lens device 2, while when the charge completion signalof the speed light device is given to the camera body 4, the cameradevice is brought into the bulb, automatic light adjustment, the manualspeed light photographic mode. The shutter time at the side of thecamera at this time is set and maintained at the bulb with priority,while the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set andcontrolled by means of the aperture setting ring 8. The display in theview finder at this time is as is shown in the FIG. 10(c)-(IV), wherebyin the first display part 244 "b" for the bulb photographic mode and"EF" for charge completion signal of the speed light device aredisplayed, while in the second display part 250 the aperture value setat the side of the speed light device is displayed and in the thirddisplay prt 252 "M" is displayed so as to tell the photographer that itis necessary to set the aperture by means of the aperture setting ring 8manually. In consequence it is necessary for the photographer to set theaperture at the side of the lens device 2 in accordance with theaperture value displayed in the second display part 252 in the viewfinder, namely the aperture set at the side of the speed light device,whereby when the shutter is released in this state the speed lightdevice operates with the automatic light adjustment mode itself, whilethe camera device is controlled with the shutter time optional to thephotographer and the aperture value set at the lens device 2 manually.

The fifth one is the case when the speed light device is in theautomatic light adjustment mode, the semi-automatic control is set forthe shutter and moreover the shutter time is set the dial 34 and themark 12 is select at the aperture setting ring 8, whereby the cameradevice is in the AE photographic mode with priority on shutter timebefore the charge completion of the speed light device, being ready forthe AE photography while when the charge completion signal of the speedlight device is given to the camera body, the camera device is broughtinto the semi-automatic control, automatic light adjustment, automaticspeed light photographic mode. When at this time the shutter time set bythe dial 34 at the side of the camera body is shorter than the speedlight synchronization shutter time TSYN, the shutter time at the side ofthe camera body 4 is set at the speed light synchronization shutter timeTSYN, while when the shutter time set by the dial 34 at the side of thecamera body is longer than the speed light synchronization shutter timeTSYN, the shutter time at the side of the camera body 4 is set at thevalue set by the dial, while the diaphragm of the lens device 2 iscontrolled from the side of the camera body 4 with the aperture valueset by the aperture setting dial 108 at the side of the speed lightdevice. The display at this time is as is shown in FIG. 10(c)-(V),whereby in the first display part 244 the speed light synchronizationshutter time TSYN or the set shutter time and "EF" for the chargecompletion signal of the speed light device are displayed, while in thesecond display part 250 the aperture value set at the speed light deviceis displayed. When the shutter is released in this state the speed lightdevice operates with the automatic light adjustment mode itself, whilethe camera device is controlled with the same shutter time and the sameaperture value as indicated in the view finder.

The sixth one is the case when the speed light device is in theautomatic light adjustment mode, the semi-automatic control is set forthe shutter and moreover the shutter time is set by the dial 34, whilethe mark 12 is not selected by the aperture setting ring 8, whereby thecamera device is in the manual exposure adjustment photographic modewith the light measurement through the totally opened diaphragm beforethe charge completion of the speed light device, being ready foroperation, while when the charge completion signal of the speed lightdevice is given to the camera body 4, the camera device is brought intothe semi-automatic control, automatic light adjustment, manual speedlight photographic mode. When at this time the shutter time set by thedial 34 at the side of the camera body 4 is shorter than the speed lightsynchronization shutter time, the shutter time at the side of the camerabody 4 is set at the speed light synchronization shutter time. While theshutter time set by the dial 34 of the camera body 4 is longer than thespeed light synchronization shutter time, the shutter time at the sideof the camera body 4 is set at the value set by the dial 34, while thephotographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by means of theaperture setting ring 8. The display in the view finder at this time isas is shown in FIG. 10(c)-(VI), whereby in the first display part 244the speed light synchronization shutter speed TSYN or the set shuttertime and "EF" for the charge completion of the speed light device aredisplayed, while in the second display part 250 the aperture value setat the side of the speed light device is displayed and in the thirddisplay part 252 "M" is displayed so as to tell the photographer that itis necessary to set the aperture by means of the aperture setting ring 8manually. In consequence it is necessary for the photographer to set theaperture at the side of the lens device 2 in accordance with theaperture value indicated in the second display part 252 in the viewfinder, namely the aperture value set at the side of the speed lightdevice 2, whereby when the shutter is released in this state, the speedlight device operates in the automatic light adjustment mode itselfwhile the camera device is controlled with the same shutter time as isdisplayed in the view finder and the aperture value manually set at thelens device 2.

The seventh one is the case when the speed light device is in theautomatic light adjustment mode, the semi-automatic control is set forthe shutter and moreover the shutter time is set at the bulb poositionby means of the dial 34 and the mark 12 is selected by the aperturesetting ring 8, whereby the camera device is in the bulb photographicmode before the charge completion of the speed light device, being in aposition to carry out the bulb photography with the smallest aperturevalue, while when the charge completion signal of the speed light deviceis given to the camera body 4 the camera device is brought in the bulb,automatic light adjustment, automatic speed light photographic mode. Atthis time the shutter time at the side of the camera body 4 is set andmaintained at the bulb with priority, while the photographic lens 2 iscontrolled from the side of the camera body 4 with the aperture valueset by means of the aperture setting dial 108 at the side of the speedlight device. The display in the view finder at this time is as is shownin FIG. 10(c)-(VII), whereby in the first display part 244 "b" for thebulb photographic mode and "EF" for the charge completion of the speedlight device are displayed while in the second display part 250 theaperture value set at the side of the speed light device is displayed.When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceoperates in the automatic light adjustment mode itself while the cameradevice is controlled with the shutter time optional to the photographerand the same aperture value as is shown in the view finder.

The eighth one is the case when the speed light device is in theautomatic light adjustment mode, the semi-automatic control is set forthe shutter and moreover the shutter time is set at the bulb by means ofthe dial 34 while the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring8, whereby the camera device is in the bulb photographic mode before thecharge completion of the speed light device, being in a position tocarry out the bulb photography with the aperture value set at the sideof the lens device 2, while when the charge completion signal of thespeed light device is given to the camera body 4, the camera device isbrought into the bulb, automatic light adjustment, manual speed lightphotographic mode. At this time the shutter time at the side of thecamera body 4 is set and maintained at the bulb with priority, while theaperture of the photographic lens 2 is set and controlled by means ofthe aperture setting ring 8 manually. The display at this time is as isshown in FIG. 10(c)-(VIII), whereby in the first display part 244 "b"for the bulb photographic mode and "EF" for the charge completion of thespeed light device are displayed (while in the second display part 250)while in the second display part 250 the aperture value set at the sideof the speed light device is displayed and in the third display part 252"M" is displayed so as to tell the photographer that it is necessary toset the aperture by the aperture setting ring 8 manually. In consequenceit is necessary for the photographer to set the aperture at the side ofthe lens device 2 in accordance with the aperture value displayed in thesecond display part 252 in the view finder, namely the aperture valueset at the side of the speed light device, whereby when the shutter isreleased in this state the speed light device operates in the automaticlight adjustment mode itself while the camera device is controlled withthe shutter time optional to the photographer and the aperture value setat the lens device 2 manually.

The nineth one is the case when the speed light device is in the totallight amount mode, the full automatic control mode is set for theshutter and moreover the shutter time is set by the dial 34 and the mark12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8, whereby the camera deviceis in the AE photographic mode with priority on shutter time before thecharge completion of the speed light device, being in a position tocarry out the AE photography while when the charge completion signal ofthe speed light device is given to the camera body 4, the camera deviceis brought into the full automatic, total light amount, speed lightphotographic mode with largest aperture value. At this time the shuttertime at the camera body 4 is automatically set at the speed lightsynchronization shutter time TSYN, for example 1/60 sec, while thephotographic lens 2 is controlled with the largest aperture value of thephotographic lens device 2 to be used. The display in the view finder atthis time is as is shown in FIG. 10(d)-(I), whereby in the first displaypart 244 the speed light synchronization shutter time, for example 1/60sec. and "EF" for the charge completion of the speed light device aredisplayed. Hereby nothing is displayed in the second display part 250 soas to alarm the photographer as misoperation, because the largestaperture value of the lens device does not alway offer the properexposure.

When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceissues the total light amount, while the camera device is controlledwith the same shutter time as is displayed in the view finder and thelargest aperture value of the lens device 2.

The tenth one is the case when the speed light device is in the totallight amount mode, the full automatic control mode is set for theshutter and moreover the shutter time is set by the dial 34 while themark 12 is not selected by the aperture setting ring 8, whereby thecamera device is in the manual exposure adjustment photographic modewith the light measurement through the totally opened diaphragm beforethe charge completion of the speed light device, being ready foroperation, while when the charge completion signal of the speed lightdevice is given to the camera body 4, the camera device is brought intothe full automatic, total light amount, manual speed light photographicmode. At this time the shutter time at the side of the camera body 4 isautomatically set at the speed light synchronization shutter time, whilethe aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlledby means of the aperture setting ring 8. The display in the view finderat this time is as is shown in FIG. 10(d)-(II), whereby in the firstdisplay part 244 the speed light synchronization shutter time and the"EF" for the charge completion of the speed light device are displayedwhile in the third display part "M" is displayed so as to tell thephotographer that it is necessary to set the aperture by means of theaperture setting ring 8 manually. In consequence it is necessary for thephotographer to set the aperture by means of the aperture setting ring 8manually by obtaining the aperture value to be set at the lens device 2basing upon the distance from the camera device to the object by makinguse of the guide number calculator 106 belonging to the speed lightdevice.

When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceissues the total light amount, while the camera device is controlledwith the same shutter time as is displayed in the view finder and theaperture value manually set at the lens device 2.

The eleventh one is the case when the speed light device is in the totallight amount mode, the full automatic mode is set for the shutter andmoreover the shutter time is set at the position of bulb by the dial 34and the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8. At this timethe camera device is in the bulb photographic mode before the chargecompletion of the speed light device, being in a position to carry outthe bulb photography with the totally opened diaphragm, while when thecharge completion signal of the speed light device is given to thecamera body 4 the camera device is brought into the bulb, total lightamount, largest aperture value speed light photographic mode. At thistime the shutter time at the side of the camera body 4 is kept set atthe bulb with priority, whereby the photographic lens 2 is controlledwith the largest aperture value of the photographic lens device 2. Thedisplay in the view finder at this time is as is shown in FIG.10(d)-(II), whereby in the first display part 244 "b" for the bulbphotography and "EF" for the charge completion of the speed light deviceare displayed.

When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceoperates with total light amount mode, while the camera device iscontrolled with a shutter time optional to the photographer and thelargest aperture value of the lens device 2.

The twelfth one is the case when the speed light device is in the totallight amount mode, the full automatic mode is set for the shutter andmoreover the shutter time is set at the position of bulb with the dial34, while the mark 12 is not selected at the aperture value setting ring8. At this time the camera device is in the bulb photographic modebefore the charge completion of the speed light device, being in aposition to carry out the bulb photography with the aperture value setat the side of the lens device 2, while the charge completion signal ofthe speed light is given to the camera body 4 the camera device isbrought into the bulb, total light amount, manual speed lightphotographic mode. At this time the shutter time at the side of thecamera body 4 is kept set at the bulb with priority, while thephotographic lens 2 is set and controlled manually with the aperturesetting ring 8. The display in the view finder at this time is as isshown in FIG. 10(d)-(IV), whereby in the first display part 244, "b" forthe bulb photographic mode and "EF" for the charge completion of thespeed light device are displayed while in the third display part 252 "M"is displayed so as to tell the photographer that it is necessary to setthe aperture value by means of the aperture setting ring 8 manually. Inconsequence it is necessary for the photographer to set the aperturevalue by means of the aperture setting ring manually, obtaining theaperture value to be set at the lens device 2 basing upon the distancefrom the camera device to the object by making use of the guide numbercalculator 106 belonging to the speed light device.

When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceoperates in the total light amount mode while the camera device iscontrolled with a shutter time optional to the photographer and theaperture value manually set at the lens device 2.

The thirteenth one is the case when the speed light device is in thetotal light amount mode, the semi-automatic mode is set for the shutterand moreover the shutter time is set by the dial 34 and the mark 12 isselected with the aperture value setting ring 8. At this time the cameradevice is in the AE photographic mode with priority on shutter timebefore the charge completion of the speed light device, being in aposition to carry out the AE photography, while when the chargecompletion signal of the speed light device is given to the camera body4, the camera device is brought into the semi-automatic, total lightamount, largest aperture value speed light photographic mode. When atthis time the shutter time set with the dial 34 at the side of thecamera body 4 is shorter than the speed light synchronization shuttertime TSYN the shutter time at the side of the camera body 4 is set atthe speed light synchronization shutter time TSYN, while when theshutter time set with the dial 34 is longer than the speed lightsynchronization shutter time TSYN, the shutter time at the side of thecamera body 4 is set at the speed light synchronization shutter timeTSYN, whereby the photographic lens 2 is controlled with the largestaperture value of the photographic lens device 2. The display in theview finder at this time is as is shown in FIG. 10(d)-(V), whereby inthe first display part 244 the speed light synchronization shutter timeor the set shutter time and "EF" for charge completion of the speedlight device are displayed.

When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceoperates in the total light amount mode, while the camera device iscontrolled with shutter time displayed in the view finder and thelargest aperture value of the lens device 2.

The fourteenth one is the case when the speed light device is in thetotal light amount mode, the semi-automatic mode is set for the shutterand moreover the shutter time is set at the dial 34, while the mark 12is not selected with the aperture setting ring 8. At this time thecamera device is in the totally opened light measuring, manual exposureadjustment mode before the charge completion of the speed light device,being ready for operation, while when the charge completion signal ofthe speed light device is given to the camera body 4, the camera deviceis brought into the semi-automatic, total light amount, manual speedlight photographic mode. When at this time the shutter time set with thedial 34 at the side of the camera body 4 is shorter than the speed lightsynchronization shutter time, the shutter time at the side of the camerabody 4 is set at the speed light synchronization shutter time, whilewhen the shutter time set with the dial 34 at the side of the camerabody 4 is longer than the speed light synchronization shutter time, theshutter time is set at the value set with the dial 34, whereby thephotographic lens 2 is set and controlled manually with the aperturesetting ring 8. The display in the view finder at this time is as isshown in FIG. 10(d)-(VI), whereby in the first display part 244 thespeed light synchronization shutter time or the set shutter time and"EF" for the charge completion of the speed light device are displayed,while in the third display part 252 "M" is displayed so as to tell thephotographer that it is necessary to set the aperture value with theaperture setting ring 8 manually. In consequence it is necessary for thephotographer to set the aperture value with the aperture setting ring 8manually, obtaining the aperture value to be set at the lens device 2basing upon the distance from the camera device to the object by makinguse of the guide number calculator 106 belonging to the speed lightdevice.

When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceoperates in the total light amount mode, while the camera device iscontrolled with the shutter time displayed in the view finder and theaperture value manually set at the lens device 2.

The fifteenth one is the case when the speed light device is in thetotal light amount mode, the semi-automatic mode is set for the shutterand moreover the shutter time is set at the position of the bulb withthe dial 34 and the mark 12 is selected with the dial 34. At this timethe camera device is in the bulb photographic mode before the chargecompletion of the speed light device being in a position to carry outthe bulb photography with totally opened diaphragm, while the chargecompletion signal of the speed light device is given to the camera body4, the camera device is brought into the bulb, the total light amount,largest aperture value speed light photographic mode. The shutter timeat the side of the camera body 4 at this time is kept set at the bulbwith priority, while the photographic lens 2 is controlled with thelargest aperture value of the photographic lens device 2. The display inthe view finder at this time is as is shown in FIG. 10(d)-(VII), wherebyin the first display part 244 "b" for the bulb photographic mode and"EF" for the charge completion of the speed light device are displayed.

When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceoperates in the total light amount mode, while the camera device iscontrolled with the shutter time optional to the photographer and thelargest aperture value of the lens device 2.

The sixteenth one is the case when the speed light device is in thetotal light amount mode, the semi-automatic mode is set for the shutterand moreover the shutter time is set at the position of the bulb withthe dial 34, while the mark 12 is not selected with the aperture settingring 8. At this time the camera device is in the bulb photographic modebefore the charge completion of the speed light device, being in aposition to carry out the bulb photography with the aperture value setat the side of the lens device 2, while when the charge completionsignal of the speed light device is given to the camera body 4, thecamera device is brought into the bulb, total light amount, manual speedlight photographic mode. At this time the shutter time at the side ofthe camera body 4 is kept set at the bulb with priority, while thephotographic lens 2 is set and controlled with the aperture setting ring8. The display in the view finder at this time is as shown in FIG.10(d)-(VIII), whereby in the first display part 244 "b" for the bulbphotographic mode and "EF" for the charge completion of the speed lightdevice are displayed, while in the third display part 252 "M" isdisplayed so as to tell the photographer that it is necessary to set theaperture with the aperture setting ring 8 manually. In consequence it isnecessary for the photographer to set the aperture with the aperturesetting ring 8 manually, obtaining the aperture value set to the lensdevice 2 basing upon the distance from the camera device to the objectby making use of the guide number calculator 106 belonging to the speedlight device.

When the shutter is released in this state, the speed light deviceoperates in the total light amount mode, while the camera device iscontrolled with the shutter time optional to the photographer and theaperture value set at the lens device 2 manually.

When the mode change over switch 38 at the side of the camera device 4is selected with priority on the aperture value in case of the abovementioned speed light photographic mode, the aperture value set with thedial 34 is completely disregarded, whereby the aperture is controlledwith the value set at the side of the speed light or the value set withthe aperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2 or thelargest value.

When now the speed light device is in the full automatic mode theshutter time is automatically set at the speed light synchronizationshutter time, for example. 1/60 sec., while when the speed light deviceis in the semi-automatic mode, there is a danger that the shutter timelonger than the speed light synchronization shutter time could not becontrolled in case no shutter time is not set at the side of the camerabody 4. In consequence each of the above mentioned mode is effectiveonly when the mode change over switch 38 is at the side of the priorityon the shutter time, whereby at times there is a possibility that thesemi-automatic speed light photography is carried out while the abovementioned mode change over switch 38 remains set at the side of thepriority on aperture value. Thus in order to avoid the above mentionedshortcoming, in case of the camera system in accordance with the presentinvention the shutter time is set at the speed light synchronizationshutter time regardless of the state of the change over switch 146 evenif the semi-automatic mode is set at the side of the speed light devicein case the mode change over switch 38 is set at the side of thepriority on aperture value in case of the speed light photographic modeas if it were controlled in the so called full automatic mode. Thereason is that the semi-automatic mode is used only when there issomething intended to with reference to the shutter time so that thesemi-automatic mode is never used with priority on aperture value.

The above mentioned photographic modes at the time of the speed lightphotography are shown in FIG. 11(A) shematically, whereby the case withthe bulb photography is not shown particularly because the same thingcan be said of when the shutter time is replaced with the bulb.

Below the counter measures against misoperation of the camera system inaccordance with the present invention will be explained.

Originally the camera system basing upon a synthetic and rational systemshould be so designed that there could be no room for mishandling ormisoperation, whereby so far as we know the exposure control means, suchas the shutter mechanism or the diaphragm mechanism by means of whichthe best and most precise picture can be obtained at present consistsmostly mechanical components while their operation is controlled bymeans of remarkably complicated mechanical sequence mechanism. On theother hand in order to apply a rational control to the camera device asa synthetic system it is necessary to introduce electrical controlmechanism on a large scale, whereby it is considerably difficult todesign the system completely free from the mishandling or themisoperation, handicapped by the interface of the electro-mechanism orthe complicated mechanism of the camera device. In this respect in thepresent embodiment a system for telling the photographer his mishandlingand for locking the shutter release so as to avoid the misoperation dueto the mishandling is adopted.

What is considered as mishandling in the camera device in the presentembodiment will be explained below in accordance with the logic diagramshown in FIG. 11(B). Hereby the mishandlings to be mentioned have aclose connection with the operation characteristics of the lever 84 ofthe lens device 2 and the lever 94 of the camera body 4 as is explainedin accordance with FIG. 2. Namely the case when the mark 12 is selectedand set at the aperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2is considered to be equivalent to the case when the largest aperturevalue is selected at the side of the lens device 2, so that in case notaperture control is made by means of the AE lever AE at the side of thebody 4 at all the lens device is to be controlled with the largestaperture value unconditionally, which is uncontrollable. Further whenthe AE lever is not charged in case of the AE photography the aperturecontrol of the lens device 2 from the side of the camera body 4 isimpossible. In the present embodiment the above two cases are consideredas misoperation and the alarm lock is made, whereby these casescorresponds to the states shown in FIG. 11(B)-(I), (II), (III), (IV).Hereby the states shown in FIG. 11(B)-(III), and (IV) are these afterthe film has been wound up by means of the winding up lever 14. Thereason is that before the AE charge due to the film winding up the AElever 94 is in the AE discharge state without any particular operation,which state is not always the misoperation state. Hereby there exist noAE charge state in the state in which the diaphragm of the lens device 2is closed by means of the diaphragm closing lever 64, as is clear fromthe explanation made in accordance with FIG. 2. This the correspondingspace is blank in FIG. 11(B).

Now let us consider in which case the misoperation states shown fromFIG. 11(B)-(I) to FIG. 11(B)-(IV) will take place.

In case now the mark 12 is selected with the aperture setting ring 8 atthe side of the lens device 2 the camera device is either in the AEphotographic mode with priority on shutter time or in the AEphotographic mode with aperture value depending upon the state of themode change over switch, whereby the display in the view finder is as isshown in FIG. 10(a) (I) or (II). Even if the photographer tries toconfirm the object field depth on the finder screen in this state byactually closing the diaphragm of the lens device 2 down to the aperturevalue displayed in the second display part 250, it is impossible in theAE photographic mode to close the diaphragm of the lens device 2 down tothe aperture value set at the side of the camera body or operated due tothe construction of the AE lever 94. If in spite of the above mentionedsituation the diaphragm of the lens device 2 would be closed by means ofthe diaphragm closing lever 64, the diaphragm of the lens device 2should be closed down to the largest aperture value, because theposition set with the mark 12 of the aperture setting ring 8 correspondsto the position of the largest aperture value of the lens device 2.These states correspond to there shown in FIG. 11(B)-(I), (II) and areapparently mishandling, whereby in case of the present embodiment it isprevented that such situation should take place because as is alreadyexplained the diaphragm closing lever 64 is restricted in its operationso far as the mark 12 is selected at the aperture setting ring of thelens device. On the other hand, in order to confirm the object fielddepth the photographer can at first release the selection of the mark 12with the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 as the first step,set the aperture value to be manually confirmed at the side of the lensdevice 2 and then operate the diaphragm closing lever 64 so as to closethe diaphragm down to the position set at the side of the lens device 2,whereby the camera device is in the manual exposure adjustmentphotographic mode with light measurement through the closed diaphragm orin the AE photographic mode with priority on aperture value with lightmeasurement through the closed diaphragm in such a manner that theobject field depth can be confirmed. In this state, as is clear fromFIG. 2, the AE lever 94 is in the AE discharge state.

However, in case the photographer resets the mark 12 of the aperturesetting ring 8 of the lens device 2 out of the above mentioned state,the state as is shown in FIG. 11(B)-(I) or (II) is affirmed, which is,as explained afore, apparently a mishandling, whereby the alarm lock"EEEE EE" is displayed twinkling as is shown in FIG. 10(f) so as toprevent the shutter release.

Further in case the photographer releases the closed diaphragm of thelens 2 by means of the closed diaphragm releasing button 66 out of thestate shown in FIG. 11(B)-(I) or (II), the AE photographic mode isresumed while the AE lever 94 remains AE discharged as is shown in FIG.11(B)-(III), (IV), which is also a mishandling, the AE photography beingimpossible, whereby in the view finder the alarm lock "EEEE EE" isdisplayed twinkling as is shown in FIG. 10(f) so as to prevent theshutter release.

Hereby by releasing the mark 12 from the aperture setting ring 8 of thelens device 2 in the state shown in FIG. 11(B)-(I), (II), thephotographer alerted to the mishandling as is shown in FIG. 10(f)becomes able to carry out the manual exposure adjustment photographywith the light measurement through the closed diaphragm or the AEphotography with priority on aperture value with the light measurementthrough the closed diaphragm and also becomes able to carry out themanual exposure adjustment photography with the light measurementthrough the totally opened diaphragm by opening the diaphragm of thelens device 2 by means of the closed diaphragm releasing button 66.Further by setting the mark 12 at the aperture setting ring 8 of thelens device 2, the above mentioned state is again brought into the alarmlock state as is shown in FIG. 11(B)-(III), (IV), which alarm lock statecan be released as follows.

By releasing the mark 12 from the aperture setting ring 8 of the lensdevice 2 in the state shown in FIG. 11(B)-(III), (IV), the photographeralerted to the mishandling as is shown in FIG. 10(f) becomes able tocarry out the manual exposure adjustment photography with the lightmeasurement through the totally opened diaphragm. Apart from the aboveby operating the film winding up lever 14 while the multiple exposurebutton 16 provided on the upper surface of the camera 4 being pusheddown, the AE lever 94 is recharged so as to enable the AE photographywith priority on shutter time or the AE photography with priority onaperture value.

Hereby the state shown in FIG. 11(b)-(III), (IV) is judged as themishandling only after the film winding up and treated as the AEphotographic mode with priority on shutter time or the AE photographicmode with priority on aperture value before the film winding up, whilethe state shown in FIG. 11(b)-(I), (II) is judged as the misoperationbefore as well as after the film winding up.

As explained above in case of the camera system in accordance with thepresent invention the improvement as well as the amplification of theefficiency is tried by positively by providing for various kinds ofrestrictions likely between the mechanical composition or thecomposition of the conventional lens device and various kinds of controlmechanism introduce for the sake of the improvement of efficiencies,while for the unavoidable mishandlings and misoperations alarms aredisplayed in the view finder so as to alert the photographer to themishandling and misoperation, while locking the shutter mechanism.

Below the concrete compositions for realizing various efficienciesrendered to the camera device shown in FIG. 1 will be explained.

The conventional camera device comprises the diaphragm control mechanismfor determining the aperture of the lens device and the shuttermechanism for determining the time of the exposure to the film, wherebythese two mechanisms generally will comprise mechanical controlmechanism in the future as in the past. However, quite recentlycompositions added with the electrical control mechanisms are proposedand realized for various control mechanism constituting a camera system.The compositions with such electrical mechanism are mostly those of theexposure control mechanisms including the light measuring system of thecamera device, the reason for which is that generally the lightmeasuring system takes the informations as to the object bright and soon into the camera system as the electrical signal by means of thephotoelectric converting efficiency so that it is essential to gothrough the interface between the electrical means and the mechanicalmeans in order to execute the automatic exposure control.

As such an interface a simple mechanism suffices in order to realize asimple efficiency in the camera system and its concrete composition haslong been well known, whereby with the increase of the efficiencyrequested for the camera system its composition tends to becomecomplicated. On the other hand a comparatively simple analog electricalcontrol system is applied to many camera systems known at present, thereason for which is that such control system is so designed as tooperate with priority on shutter time or with priority on aperturevalue, which is realized by means of a comparatively simple andeconomical circuit composition.

However in case of a camera system such as that in accordance with thepresent invention which includes various judging and determiningefficiencies beside those with priority on shutter speed and withpriority on aperture value, it can be predicted that the compositionwould be remarkably complicated, whereby it is not only problematic toapply purely electrical circuit to such composition but also thecomposition itself will be come so much complicated that not only theeconomy is decreased but also the device can not be made compact, whichis not profitable.

On the other hand the system which is through out is to compare the mostpart of the control circuit with the digital electrical circuit whichcan be integrated, which method can be said to be a considerablyrational one for realizing the camera device with various efficienciessuch as the camera system shown in FIG. 1. This digital electricalcircuit is quite suited for being applied to the devices presentingvarious judging and determining efficiencies, measuring and displayefficiencies such as the camera system because it is easy in the systemdesign in comparison with analog electrical circuit, various controlmodes can be realized in an easy way and it can instantly be modifiedfor the alteration of the specifications.

In consequence most of the control systems applied to the camera systemin accordance with the present invention are composed of the digitalizedelectrical circuit so as to improve the realiability as well as theeconomy.

Below how the light measurement data, the set data, the operationcondition, the operation state and so on are taken into the cameradevice shown in FIG. 1 will be explained, before the systems foroperating the camera device shown in FIG. 1 is explained. It is acomparatively important problem for the composition of the digitalsystem, particularly of the camera system in which various mechanicalmoving members are to be built in a small space in a compact way tothink over the adoption of such various informations.

Principally the above mentioned camera device includes a TTL lightmeasurement system, whereby as light sensitive element a photoelectrictransducing element such as cds or cilicone light sensitive element isadopted. The above mentioned photoelectric transducing element producesanalog signals, which is later compressed in a logarithmic way, namelyconverted into an APEX value and then converted into digital informationby means of the A-D converter. Now let the informations obtained fromthe light measurement system BVo in APEX value in case of the lightmeasurement with the totally opened diaphragm and BVs in case of thelight measurement with the closed diaphragm, so we obtain the followingrelations.

    BVo=BV-AVo-AVc                                             (3)

    BVs=BV-AV-AVc'                                             (4)

whereby AVo corresponds to the smallest aperture value of the lensdevice 2, AV corresponds to the actual aperture value with the closeddiaphragm, AVc corresponds to the vignetting error of the lens device 2with totally opened diaphragm and AVc' corresponds to the vignettingerror with the closed diaphragm. Hereby it is necessary to obtain thevignetting errors AVc and Avc' from the calculation basing upon theaperture value of the lens device 2 at the time of the lightmeasurement, whereby the vignetting error with the totally openeddiaphragm can easily be calculated out because the smallest aperturevalue is introduced from the side of the lens device 2, while it isimpossible to calculate out the vignetting error with the closeddiaphragm because there is no means for transmitting the actual aperturevalue with the closed diaphragm from the side of the lens device 2 tothe camera body. In consequence in case of the camera system inaccordance with the present invention the vignetting error with theclosed diaphragm is disregarded so as to obtain the following relation.

    BVs=BV-AV                                                  (5)

As is clear from the above explanation, the data obtained from the lightmeasurement system is that relative to the object brightness representedby the above mentioned relation (3) or (5).

Hereby the above mentioned data is later converted into digital data of8 bits by means of the A-D comparator, whereby this digital data is abinary one, the last bit having a weight of "1/8", while the first bithaving a weight of "16". Namely the light measurement data is convertedinto the digital data having a precision of 1/8 step in the APEX value.

Hereby to the TTL light measurement system a conventional circuit forcompressing the analog voltage signal proportional to the received lightamount into an analog signal corresponding to the APEX value in alogarithmic way is applied.

Further as is explained above, the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 forthe photographic film is provided on the upper surface of the camerabody 4. This ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 serves to set the ASAsensitivity of the photographic film to be used, whereby the presenttendency of the photographic film on the market is that the ASAsensitivity is set by 1/3 step in APEX value. In consequence by means ofthe ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 to the ASA sensitivity is set withthe precision of 1/3 step in APEX value as follows:

ASA 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 64, 80, 100, 125, 160 200, 250, 320, 400,500, 640, 800 . . . .

However it goes without saying that the film sensitivity data set bymeans of this ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is taken up as digitalvalue, whereby it is impossible to take up a value corresponding to 1/3in decimal by means of binary code. In this respect it can be sodesigned that the weight of the bit corresponding to a figure smallerthan "1" in binary code is treated as value corresponding to "1/3" and"2/3", whereby all other data is treated with the precision of 1/8 stepin binary system in this camera system so that no matching can be takenfor the digital operation with other datas in such a manner thatcomplicated operations including multiplication or division becomesunavoidable. When on the other hand the operation result for the actualcontrol is obtained with the precision of 1/8 step in binary value, suchcomplicated operation as mentioned above becomes non-sense. Inconsequence in case of this camera system the data concerning the filmsensitivity with the precision of 1/3 step is taken up in approximationwith the data with the precision of 1/8 step.

Namely "1/3" and "2/3" can be approximated with the precision of 1/8step as follows. ##EQU1## whereby the error taking place is ±0.042 step,namely within a sufficient allowance in comparison with 1/8 step, namely0.125 step. In consequence the film sensitivity set by means of the ASAsensitivity setting dial 40 is directly taken up with the precision of1/8 step. Hereby in this camera system the film sensitivity is treatedas a digital data with seven bits in binary system, whereby the last bithas a weight of "1/8" while the first bit has a weight of "8". It goeswithout saying that this binary data is the approximated one with theprecision of 1/8 step of the film sensitivity with precision of 1/3 stepas is represented by the relations (6) and (7). Further as is clear fromthe relations (6) and (7), beside the bit with the weight of "1/8" ofthe binary data including an approximated data with the precision of 1/8step corresponding to "1/3" or "2/3", "1" appears either in the bit withthe weight of "1/4" or in the bit with the weight of "1/2". Inconsequence it can be so designed that when "1" appears either in thebit with the weight of "1/4" or in the bit with the weight of "1/2"without particularly putting in the information relative to the bit withthe weight of "1/8" at the time of taking up the data concerning thefilm sensitivity of seven bits. "1" can be made to appear in the bitwith the weight of "1/8" so that the camera system in accordance withthe present invention is so designed that from the ASA sensitivitysetting dial 40 the data relative to the ASA sensitivity is taken up asa binary code with six bits and later converted into a data with sevenbit.

FIG. 12 shows a concrete composition for taking up a digital datarelative to the film sensitivity out of the ASA sensitivity settingdial, being so designed that the digital data is obtained from thedigital data setting disc 254 linked with the ASA sensitivity settingdial so as to be rotated with the dial in accordance with the rotationposition of the dial. The digital data setting disc 254 consists of aplural number of conductor rings 256 concentrically arranged on theinsulated base plate so as to correspond to respective bits of the filmsensitivity setting data and of a common ring 258 keeping electricalconductivity with all of the above mentioned conductor rings 256 througha conductor 262 extending along the radial direction of the data settingdisc 254. Hereby the above mentioned common ring 258 is normally incontact with the brush 260 which is connected to the power source Vccthrough a resistance 261 and also to the inverter 263. Further there arearranged data tracks between the above mentioned conductor rings 256 soas to correspond to respective bit of the film sensitivity setting data,whereby six brushes corresponding to respective bits of the data are incontact with respective track. The above mentioned tracks includeconductive parts 266 extending from the above mentioned conductor rings256 to the parts in contact with respective brushes 264 along the radialdirection in such a manner that an electrical contact is establishedbetween the above mentioned conductor rings and the brushes 264corresponding to the weight "2" of the bits of the digital value of theset data so as to correspond to each of the setting position of the ASAsensitivity setting dial 40 for setting the film sensitivity by 1/3step.

As will be later explained in detail, this camera system is controlledby eight timing pulses TB₀ -TB₇ as is shown in FIG. 13. The camerasystem is also controlled in this way also in case of taking up the filmsensitivity data, whereby for taking up various setting data or settingconditions six timing pulses shown in FIG. 13 are used.

The composition shown in FIG. 12 is so designed that the above mentionedtiming impulses TB₁ -TB₆ are applied to respective brushes 264 throughrespective diodes 265, whereby in case the brush 264 to which a timingpulse is applied is not in contact with the conductive part 266, theinverter 263 delivers a low level output because the power sourcevoltage Vcc is applied to the inverter 263 through the resistance, whilein case the brush 264 is in contact with the conductive part 266, theinverter 263 delivers a high level output, because the input of theinverter 263 is induced to be at low level through the conductor rings256, the brushes 264 and the diode 265. Namely the above mentionedinverter 263 delivers a digital value of six figures corresponding tothe APEX value of the ASA sensitivity set by means of the abovementioned ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 from the last bit in sequencein synchronization of the timing pulses TB₁ -TB₆. This data of six bitsis the one whose last two bits are "1/2" and "1/4", whereby as explainedafter "1" is made to appear in the bit with the weight "1/8" when "1"appears either in the bit with the weight "1/2" or in the bit with theweight "1/4" in such a manner that after the data with six bits isconverted into a data with seven bits including an approximated data of"2/3" or "1/3". As mentioned above, the data Sv (APEX value) relative tothe film sensitivity is taken up as a digital value of seven bits withthe precision of 1/8 step after all.

By means of the above mentioned composition, the camera device shown inFIG. 1 takes up the sensitivity of the film to be used in a digitalvalue corresponding to the APEX value.

As explained afore, this camera device is so designed as to take up thesmallest aperture value (APEX value) of the photographic lens device 2to be used in digital value. As has clearly been explained in accordancewith FIG. 2 the lens device includes a diaphragm opening pin 90presenting a protruding amount corresponding to the smallest aperturevalue AVo of the lens, while the camera body 4 includes the smallestaperture value input pin 96 for detecting the protruding amount of theabove mentioned diaphragm opening pin 90. This diaphragm opening pin 90is connected to a mechanism for detecting the displacement amount of thepin 96 so as to take up the smallest aperture value AVo of the lensdevice 2 in a digital value. Such mechanism is shown in detail in FIG.14, whereby the smallest aperture value input pin 96 is displaced inaccordance with the protruding amount of the above mentioned diaphragmopening pin 90, while the one end of the pin 96 is in contact with thepin 90, whereby this displacement amount is converted into the rotationamount around the shaft 270 of the rotary lever 268 in contact with theabove mentioned smallest aperture value input pin 96.

In order to take out the above mentioned rotation amount converted intoa digital value of four bits in accordance with its magnitude a fanshaped smallest aperture value detecting disc 272 with the shaft 270 ascenter is provided. This smallest aperture value detecting disc 272comprises four conductor rings 274 concentrically arranged around theshaft 270 so as to correspond to respective bits of the digital data ofthe smallest aperture value AVo and a common ring 276 arrangedconcentrically to the conductor rings 274 and connected to the powersource Vcc through the resistor 275 and further connected to theinverter 279. Further there are provided data tracks corresponding torespective bits of the smallest aperture value AVo of the lens device 2between the conductor rings 274, whereby the four brushes 280 providedat the one end of the above mentioned rotary lever 268 correspond torespective data tracks. The above mentioned brush 280 is in electricallyconductive state with the common brush 282 provided parallel to thebrush 280 and normally in contact with the common ring 276.

The above mentioned conductor rings 274 include extended conductiveportions in contact with the respective brushes 280 on the data tracksin accordance with the rotation amount of the rotary lever 268 in such amanner that the above mentioned conductor rings make an electricallyclosed circuit with the brush corresponding to the data trackcorresponding to the bit with the weight "1" of the bits of the smallestaperture value AVo, whereby the digital value corresponding to the APEXvalue of the smallest aperture value of the lens device set from thediaphragm opening pin 90 of the lens device 2 through the smallestaperture value input pin 96 of the camera body 4 is replaced with theselective contact of the above mentioned brushes 280 with the abovementioned conductive portion 282. Further at the time of taking up thesmallest aperture value AVo of this lens device 2, the timing pulsesshown in FIG. 13 play a part. Hereby for taking up this smallestaperture value AVo, the four timing pulses TB₃ -TB₆ are used.

The composition shown in FIG. 14 is so designed that the above mentionedtiming pulses TB₃ -TB₆ are applied to the respective conductor rings 274through respective diodes 277, whereby when no brush 286 is in contactwith the conductive portion 282 extending from any conductor ring 274 towhich the timing pulse is applied, the inverter 279 delivers a low leveloutput because the power source voltage Vcc is applied to the inverter279 through the resistance 275, while when the brushes are in contactwith respective conductive portions, the inverter delivers a high leveloutput because the input of the inverter 279 is induced to be at lowlevel through the common ring 276, the common brush 283, the brushes280, the conductor rings 274 and the diodes 277. Namely the abovementioned inverter 279 delivers the digital value of four figurescorresponding to the smallest aperture value of the photographic lensdevice 2 taken up from the diaphragm opening pin 90 through the smallestaperture value input pin 92 in synchronization with the timing pulsesTB₃ -TB₆ from the bit with larger weight in sequence. The first figureof this data of four bits has the weight of "4" while the last figurehas the weight "1/2".

What plays an important part at the time of taking up the data relativeto this smallest aperture value AVo is the difference of the protrudingamount relative to the smallest aperture value AVo, of the diaphragmopening pin 90 provided on the lens device 2. Namely it is difficult toprecisely read out such small difference of the protruding amountbecause the protruding amount of the above mentioned diaphragm openingpin 90 can not be altered largely for each smallest aperture value AVotogether with the lens device 2 and the camera body 4 due to the problemof space and moreover the lens device 2 is mountable on the camera body4. Especially when it is desired that a digital data of binary code isread out from the smallest aperture value detecting disc 272 as is shownin FIG. 14 in accordance with the position of the brushes 282, there isa danger for misreading due to the restriction of the precision of thebrushes 280 in case the brushes are between the position for a certaindata and that for the next data. The then misread data is never takenout as a mean data but a data quite different therefrom. In consequenceit is thought out to read out the smallest aperture value AVo of thelens device 2 by means of grey code and not by means of binary code. Asis well known the content of such grey code differs only 1 bit betweenthe adjacent digital datas so that it can be applied remarkablyefficiently when a digital data corresponding to the displacement amountof the smallest aperture value input pin 96 by means of a mechanism asis shown in FIG. 14. In consequence in case of the camera system inaccordance with present invention grey code is applied to the mechanismfor taking up the smallest aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 andlater converted into binary code as the data for further operation.

To explain more in detail the content of grey code differs only 1 bitbetween the adjacent codes, different from the ordinary binary code asis shown in the comparison table shown in FIG. 15 and corresponds tothat of decimal or binary code as is shown in the table. However, therelation between this grey code and the binary code is not at randum atall. When each figure of binary code is compared with the correspondingfigure of grey code, it is found that the content of the figure ofbinary code corresponding to the figure of "0" of grey code is equal tothat of the figure one step higher while the content of the figurecorresponding to the figure of "1" of the grey code is equal to theinverted content of the figure one step higher.

In consequence the data in grey code taken up in synchronization withthe timing pulses TB₃ -TB₆ from the figures with the larger weight isconverted into the data in binary code through the circuit shown in FIG.16.

Namely the Flip-Flop of J-K type delivers the Q output as is shown inFIG. 17 when the J input is identical with the K input. In short both ofthe J input and of the K input are "1", the Q output is inverted insynchronization with the next clock pulse, while both of the J input andof the K input are "0" the Q output is kept same in content. Thus thedata produced at the Q output terminal in sequence in synchronizationwith the clock pulse when a grey code is given to the J-K input terminalof the J-K Flip-Flop in sequence from the figures with the larger weightis the data converted into a binary code out of the above mentioned greycode.

As explained above the camera device shown in FIG. 1 takes up thesmallest aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device in a digitalvalue corresponding to APEX value through a composition as is explainedabove.

It is as mentioned afore that this camera device includes a mechanismfor transmitting to the camera body 4 the information as to whether thelens device 2 is in the manual mode in which the aperture of the lensdevice 2 is preset at a value desired by the photographer manually,namely by means of the aperture setting ring 8 or in the automatic modein which the aperture can be preset from the side of the camera body 4,namely the mark 12 is selected with the aperture setting ring 8.

Namely at the side of the lens device 2 the AE pin 92 which protrudeswhen the mark 12 is selected with the aperture setting ring 8 isprovided, while at the side of the camera body 4 the AE detecting part100 which detects the protruding AE pin 92 is provided so as to beopposed to the AE pin 92, whereby the AE detecting part 100 isfunctionally engaged with the switch 284 as is shown in FIG. 14. Thisswitch 284 consists of the contact normally closed, whereby the oneterminal is connected to the power source Vcc through the resistance 275and at the same time to the input terminal of the inverter 279, while tothe other terminal the timing pulse TB₁ is applied through the diode277. Namely the state of the switch 284 is sensed by means of the timingpulse TB₁ in such a manner that in the closed state of the switch 284the inverter 279 delivers a high level output because the input of theinverter 279 is induced to be at the low level through the switch 284and the diode 277, while in the opened state of the switch 284 theinverter 279 delivers the low level output because the power sourcevoltage Vcc is applied to the input terminal of the inverter through theresistance 275. In consequence in the manual mode, namely when the abovementioned AE pin 92 does not protrude the above mentioned inverter 279delivers a high level output in synchronization with the timing pulseTB₁ while in the automatic mode, namely when the above mentioned AE pinprotrudes the above mentioned inverter delivers a low level output insynchronization with the timing pulse TB₁.

By means of the above mentioned composition the camera system inaccordance with the present invention takes up the aperture settingcondition by means of the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2,namely the information as to whether the aperture is preset at the sideof the lens or at the side of the camera body. Hereby in the followingexplanation the high level signal delivered from the above mentionedinverter 279 in synchronization of the timing pulse TB₁ is called MNALsignal.

Further it is as mentioned afore that the camera device shown in FIG. 1is so designed that the diaphragm of the lens device 2 can be closed byoperating the diaphragm closing lever 64 at the side of the camera body4, whereby this diaphragm closing lever 64 not only possess theefficiency for mechanically closing the diaphragm of the lens device 2but also is functionally engaged with the switch for detecting theclosed state of the diaphragm of the lens device 2 as is shown in FIG.14. This switch 286 consists of the contacts normally opened, wherebythe one terminal is connected to the power source Vcc through theresistance 275 and at the same time to the input terminal of theinverter 279 while to the other terminal the timing pulse TB₂ is appliedthrough the diode 277. Namely the state of the switch 286 is sensed bymeans of the above mentioned timing pulse TB₂, whereby in the openedstate the inverter 279 delivers a low level output because the powersource voltage Vcc is applied to the input terminal of the abovementioned inverter 279 through the resistance 275, while in the closedstate the inverter 279 delivers the high level output because the inputof the above mentioned inverter 279 is induced to be at the low levelthrough the switch 286 and the diode 277. In consequence when thediaphragm of the photographic lens 2 is brought into the closed state byoperating the above mentioned diaphragm closing lever 64, the abovementioned inverter 279 delivers the high level output in synchronizationwith the timing pulse TB₂.

By means of the above mentioned composition the camera system inaccordance with the present invention takes up the information as towhether the diaphragm of the lens device 2 is in the closed state ornot. Hereby in the following explanation the high level signal deliveredfrom the above mentioned inverter 279 in synchronization with the timingpulse TB₂ is called SPDW signal.

As is clear from the above explanation the inverter 279 shown in FIG. 14delivers the MNAL signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₁,the SPDW signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₂ and thedata as to the smallest aperture value AVo of the photographic lensdevice 2 from the figures with the larger weight in sequence insynchronization with the timing pulses TB₃ -TB₆, whereby the output ofthe inverter is assorted accordingly in accordance with the abovementioned timing pulses TB₁ -TB₆. The composition hereof will beexplained later in detail.

In case of the camera shown in FIG. 1, the dial 34 for setting theshutter speed or the aperture value desired by the photographer on thefront surface of the camera body 4 as explained afore. This shutter dial34 is intended to set the shutter time TV (APEX value) in case of theshutter time priority photography and the aperture value (APEX value) incase of the aperture value priority photography in the digital value,whereby the composition is similar to that for taking up the digitalvalue of the film sensitivity out of the ASA sensitivity setting dial40. Namely the dial 34 is so designed that as is shown in FIG. 18 thedigital data in accordance with the rotation position of the dial is putin the system out of the digital data setting disc 288 rotated togetherwith the dial 34 as is shown in FIG. 18. The above mentioned digitaldata setting disc 288 consists of a plural number of the concentricconductor rings 292 corresponding to respective bits of the digitalvalue of the shutter time TV or the aperture value AV and on the commonring 294 electrically connected to all of the above mentioned conductorrings 292 through the conductor extending along the radial direction ofthe data setting disc 288 on an insulated base plate. Hereby the abovementioned common ring 294 is normally in contact with the brush 296,whereby the brush 296 is connected to the power source Vcc through theresistance 297 and at the same time to the inverter 299. Further thedata tracks corresponding to respective bits of the digital data of theshutter time TV and the aperture value AV are provided between theconductor rings 292, whereby five brushes 290 are in contact withrespective data tracks corresponding to respective bits of the data. Theabove mentioned data tracks consist of conductive portions 300 extendingalong the radial direction from the above mentioned conductor rings 256on the parts in contact with the above mentioned respective brushes 290in such a manner that the brushes 290 corresponding to the bits with "1"for the digital value of the set dial are brought into an electriccontact with the above mentioned conductor rings 292 in accordance withrespective set position of the dial 34 for setting the shutter time TVor the aperture value AV.

Hereby the timing pulses play an important part in taking us the shuttertime TV or the aperture value out of such composition. The compositionshown in FIG. 18 is so designed that out of the above mentioned timingpulses TB₂ -TB₆ are applied to the five brushes 290 through respectivediodes 301, whereby when the brush to which a timing pulse is applied isnot in contact with the conductive portion 300, the inverter 263produces a low level output because the power source voltage Vcc isapplied to the inverter 299 through the resistance 297, while when thebrush 290 is in contact with the conductive portion 300, the inverter299 produces a high level output because the input of the inverter 299is induced to be at low level through the above mentioned rings 292, thebrushes 290 and the diode 301. Namely the above mentioned inverter 299delivers a digital value with five figures corresponding to the APEXvalue of the shutter time TV and the aperture value set by means of theabove mentioned dial 34 from the bit with the smallest weight insequence in accordance with the timing pulses TB₂ -TB₆. The weight ofthe last figures of the data with five bits is "1/2", while that of thefirst figure is "8".

Here it is necessary to determine whether the digital data obtainedthrough the composition as mentioned above by means of the dial 34 isthe data relative to the shutter time TV or the aperture time, for whichpurpose the mode change over switch 38 is provided on the upper surfaceof the camera body 4. This change over switch 38 is functionally engagedwith the switch 302 to be closed when the switch 38 is set at the sideof the aperture priority mode. This switch 302 consists of contactsnormally opened, whereby the one terminal is connected to the powersource Vcc through the resistance 297 and at the same time to the inputterminal of the inverter 299, while to the other terminal the timingpulse TB₁ is applied to the diode 301. Namely the state of the switch302 is sensed by means of the above mentioned timing pulse TB₁, wherebyin the opened state the inverter 299 delivers a low level output becausethe power source voltage Vcc is applied to the input terminal of theinverter 299 through the resistance 297, while in the closed state theinverter 299 delivers a high level output because the input of the abovementioned inverter 299 is induced to be at the low level through theabove mentioned switch 302 and the diode 301. In consequence the abovementioned inverter 299 delivers a high level output in synchronizationof the timing pulse TB₁ when the above mentioned mode change over switch38 is set at the side of the aperture value priority mode while theinverter 299 delivers a low level output when the above mentioned modechange over switch 38 is set at the shutter time priority mode.

By means of the composition as mentioned above the camera system inaccordance with the present invention judges whether the data set bymeans of the dial 34 relates to the shutter time TV or to the aperturevalue. Further in the following explanations the high level signalproduced by the above mentioned inverter 299 in synchronization with thetiming pulse TB₁ is called the ASLC signal.

Hereby the present embodiment is so designed that the shutter time TV isselected out of the values by one step by means of the dial while theaperture value is selected out of the values by 1/2 step. Namely althughthe datas by 1/2 step are not necessary in order to set the shutter timeby 1 step, it is necessary for the dial 34 to set the aperture valueincluding the datas by 1/2 step, so that depending upon the settingposition of the dial 34 the shutter time including datas of 1/2 step maybe set. In order to provide for this problem in case of this embodimentit suffices to set the data relative to the shutter time with the halfof the necessary degital data to be set and to duplicate the digtal dataread out in accordance with the set position of the dial 34 so as to useit as the digital data TV corresponding to the APEX value relative tothe shutter time.

As mentioned above in case of the camera device shown in FIG. 1 theinventer 299 delivers, in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₁, theASLC signal for judging whether the data set by means of the dial 34relates to the shutter time or the aperture and further, insynchronization with the timing pulses TB₂ -TB₆, the data set by thedial 34 from the figure with the larger weight in sequence, whereby theoutput of the inverter 299 is assorted correspondingly in accordancewith the afore mentioned timing pulses TB₁ -TB₆. This composition willbe explained in detail later.

By means of the above mentioned composition, the camera system inaccordance with the present invention takes up the shutter time TV orthe aperture value AV set with the dial by the photographer in digitalvalue corresponding to the APEX value.

Further this camera device includes a composition for detecting thelargest aperture value of the photographic lens device 2. Namely as isclear from the explanation made in accordance with FIG. 2 the lensdevice 2 includes the largest aperture value pin 91 presenting aprotruding amount corresponding to the largest aperture value of thelens, while the camera body 4 includes a largest aperture value inputpin 97 for detecting the protruding amount of the above mentionedlargest aperture value pin 91. This largest aperture value input pin 97is connected to the mechanism for detecting its displacement amount soas to specify to which of a plural number of the aperture values givenin advance the largest aperture value of the lens device 2 belongs. Suchmechanism is shown in detail in FIG. 19, whereby the one end of thelargest aperture value input pin 97 is in contact with the largestaperture value pin 91 so as to be displaced in accordance with theprotruding amount of the pin 91 in such a manner that this displacementamount is converted into the rotation amount of the rotation lever 304,with which the above mentioned largest aperture value input pin 97 is incontact, around the shaft 303 as center. This rotation amount is used asthe amount for selecting of the aperture value F11, F16, F22, F32, F45,F64 in F number, for which purpose the fan shaped largest aperture valuedetecting disc 306 with the shaft 303 as center is provided. Thislargest aperture value detecting disc 306 consists of six electrodesarranged along the circumference of the detecting disc so as to be ableto select one of the aperture values F11, F16, F22, F32, F45, F64 in Fnumber as the largest aperture value on an insulated base plate in sucha manner that the electrodes 308 can be selectively brought into contactwith the brush 305 provided at the end of the lever 304 in accordancewith the rotation amount of the lever 304. At the same time the abovementioned largest aperture value detecting disc 306 includes a commonelectrode 310 extending along the circumferencial direction, whereby theabove mentioned brush 305 is normally in sliding contact with the abovementioned common electrode 310 regardless of the position in such amanner that a bridge is formed between one of the above mentionedelectrodes and the above mentioned common electrode 310. Further theabove mentioned common electrode 310 is connected to the power sourceVcc through the resistance and at the same time to the input terminal ofthe inverter 316, while to the six electrodes 308 the timing pulses TB₁-TB₆ are respectively applied through the diode 312. In case of such acomposition the protruding amount of the largest aperture value pin 91presenting the protruding amount corresponding to the largest aperturevalue of the lens device 2 is detected by the largest aperture valueinput pin 97 at the side of the camera body 4 whereby the abovementioned brush 305 selects one of the above mentioned six electrodes308 in accordance with the displacement amount of the above mentionedlargest aperture value pin 97 in such a manner that a conductive stateis established between one of the electrode 308 and the above mentionedcommon electrode 310. When now no timing pulse is applied to theelectrode 308 in contact with the above mentioned brush 305 through thediode 312, the inverter 316 delivers the low level output because theinput terminal of the inverter 316 is at high level due to the powersource voltage Vcc, while when the corresponding timing pulse is appliedto this electrode 308 through the diode 312, the inverter 316 deliversthe high level output because the input terminal of the inverter 316 isat low level. Namely the above mentioned inverter 316 delivers a highlevel output in synchronization of the timing pulse corresponding to thedetected largest aperture value, whereby by assorting the output of theabove mentioned inverter 316 in accordance with the timing pulse TB₁-TB₆ it is possible to detect to which of F11, F16, F22, F32, F45, F64in F number the detected largest aperture value belongs.

As mentioned above, it is possible for the camera device shown in FIG. 1to take up the largest aperture value AMAX of the photographic lensdevice 2 to be used, whereby in the following explanations the outputsignal of the above mentioned inverter 316 is called AMAX'.

As is clear from the above mentioned explanation, the set filmsensitivity data SV, the smallest aperture value data AVo of thephotographic lens device to be used, the judging signal MNAL of themanual mode or the automatic mode, the lens device diaphragm closingsignal SPDW, the shutter time TV or the aperture value AV setting data,the aperture value priority mode selecting signal ASLAC and the largestaperture value detecting signal AMAX and so on are all taken up insynchronization with the timing pulses TB₁ -TB₆.

Namely as is shown in FIG. 20, the inverter 263 (FIG. 12) delivers thedata relative to the film sensitivity SV from the bit SV1/4 with theweight "1/4" up to the bit SV₈ with the weight "8" in sequence inaccordance with the timing pulses TB₁ -TB₆. This data relative to thefilm sensitivity SV is later added with the bit SV1/8 with the weight"1/8" so as to be converted into an approximated data with the precisionof 1/8 of the data with the precision of 1/3 step, which has alreadybeen explained. Further the inverter 279 (FIG. 14) delivers the MNALsignal for showing that the aperture value is selected at the side ofthe lens device 2 in synchronization of the timing pulse TB₁, the SPDWsignal for showing that the diaphragm of the lens device 2 is in theclosed state in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₂ and the greycode data AVogc relative to the smallest aperture value AVo of the lensdevice 2 to be used from the bit AVo1/2gc with the weight of "1/2" up tothe bit AVo4gc with the weight of "4" in sequence in synchronizationwith the timing pulses TB₃ -TB₆. This grey code data AVogc relative tothe smallest aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 is later convertedinto the binary code data AVo as is explained above.

Further the inverter 299 (FIG. 18) delivers the signal ASLC for theaperture value priority mode in synchronization with the timing pulseTB₁ and the data relative to the set shutter time TV or the set aperturevalue AV in synchronization with the timing pulses TB₂ -TB₆. Hereby thedata delivered in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₂ has theweight of "1/2", that delivered in synchronization with the timing pulseTB₃ has the weight of "1", that delivered in synchronization with thetiming pulse TB₄ has the weight of "2", that delivered insynchronization with the timing pulse TB₅ has the weight of "4" and thatdelivered in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₆ has the weight of"8", which is due to the fact that the data for the aperture value AV istaken up with the precision of 1/2 precision. On the other hand theshutter time taken up through the common dial 34 is set with theprecision of "1" step, so that the bit TV₁ of the shutter time with theweight of "1" is taken up as the data with the weight of "1/2" insynchronization with the timing pulse TB₂, the bit TV₂ with the weightof "2" is taken up as the data with the weight of "1" in synchronizationwith the timing pulse TB₃, the bit TV₄ with the weight of "4" is takenup as the data with the weight of "2" in synchronization with the timingpulse TB₄, the bit TV₈ with the weight of "8" is taken up as the datawith the weight of "4" in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₅ andthe bit TV₁₆ with the weight of "16" is taken up as the data with theweight "8" in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₆. In other wordsthe data for the shutter time can be said to be once halved so as to bematched with the precision of the data for the aperture value as thedata with the precision of 1/2 step and set with the common dial 34. Inconsequence when the data delivered from the inverter 299 insynchronization with the timing pulse TB₂ -TB₆ is used for the shuttertime TV, the data is duplicated.

Further the inverter 316 (FIG. 19) delivers the signal AMAX' for showingto which of F11, F16, F22, F32, F45, F64 in F number the largestaperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be used belongs,whereby the largest aperture value is determined by the one out of thetiming pulses TB₁ -TB₆ with which the output AMAX' of the inverter issynchronized.

The camera device shown in FIG. 1 includes other switching mechanismsfor setting various operation modes, whereby the switching mechanismfunctionally engaged with the shutter release button is one of them.This switching mechanism is, as shown in FIG. 21, so designed that theswitch S1 is closed by means of the operation of the shutter releasebutton 18 so as to deliver a high level output through the inverter 11in such a manner that the necessary camera operation after the shutterrelease are started. Hereby the operations includes those for thelifting of the reflex mirror, the closing of the diaphragm of the lensdevice 2 down to the present position, the starting of the front shutterplane of the focal plane shutter and so on. In the following explanationthis switching mechanism is called SW₂, while the output signal iscalled SR.

Further the selector lever 22 is functionally engaged with two switchingmechanisms. One of them is for the AE locking. This switching mechanismis, as shown in FIG. 21, so designed that when the selector lever 22 isset at the position at which the mark 26 is selected, the switch S1 isclosed so as to deliver a high level output through the inverter 11, inaccordance with which high level output the measured light amount ismaintained. In the following explanation this switching mechanism iscalled SAELK while its output signal is called AELK. The other one isfor setting the self-timer. This switching mechanism is, as shown inFIG. 21, so designed that when the selector lever 22 is set at theposition at which the mark 28 is selected, the switch S1 is closed so asto deliver a high level output through the inverter 11, in accordancewith which high level output the shutter is released after the elapse ofa certain determined time after the operation of the shutter releasebutton 18. Namely the so called self-timer photography is carried out.In the following explanation this switching mechanism is called SSELFwhile its output signal is called SELF.

Further the camera device shown in FIG. 1 includes other switches ormechanisms for judging various operation modes. First of all the AEcharge detecting switching mechanism is provided for detecting whetherthe AE lever 94 provided at the side of the camera body 4 is in the AEcharge state or not. This switching mechanism is, as shown in FIG. 21,so designed that when the AE lever 94 is in the AE charge state, theswitch S is closed so as to deliver the output "1" through the inverter11. In the following explanation, this switching mechanism is calledSAECG, while its output signal is called AECG.

Further the winding up completion detecting switching mechanism isprovided for detecting whether the film has been wound up. Thisswitching mechanism is, as is shown in FIG. 21, so designed that whenthe springs for moving components necessary for film winding up by thewinding up lever 14 and shutter releasing have been charged the switchS1 is closed so as to deliver the output "1" through the inverter 11.Hereby the above mentioned switch S1 remains in the closed state untilthe necessary operation have been done successively and the rear shutterplane of the focal plane shutter has run after the shutter was released.In the following explanation this switching mechanism is called SWAUPwhile the output signal is called WAUP.

Further the front shutter plane start detecting switching mechanism fordetecting whether the front shutter plane of the focal plane shutter hasstarting running. This switching mechanism is, as is shown in FIG. 22,so designed that when the front shutter plane starts to run the closedswitch S2 is opened so as to convert the output "1" into the output "0".The output of this switching mechanism is used for counting the shuttertime so as to control the starting time of the rear shutter plane. Inthe following explanation this switching mechanism is called SCTST whileits output signal is called CTST.

Further the camera device shown in FIG. 1 includes, as already mentionedabove, the mechanism for presetting the aperture of the lens device 2from the side of the camera body 4, whereby the operation mode of thismechanism has already been explained in accordance with FIG. 2. Namelyimmediately before the shutter release the AE lever 94 is in the statelocked at the AE charge position while the lever 84 for presetting theaperture of the lens device 2 is kept at the preset position of thetotally opened diaphragm of the lens device 2. Such locked state isreleased at the time of the shutter release, whereby the AE lever 94releases the lever 84 urged toward the largest aperture value presetside so that the lever 84 starts to run toward the largest aperturevalue preset side. At the same time by detecting the displacement amountof the lever 84 by means of a pulse means, the number of the diaphragmpreset steps by means of the lever 84 in motion (this number increasedwith the displacement of the lever 84) is detected in such a manner thatby clamping the above mentioned AE lever 94 at the time point at whichthe detected step number coincides with the step number for control thelever 84 is made to step at the position at which the lever 84 has beendisplaced over the distance corresponding to the step number forcontrol. Through the above mentioned operations it becames possible topreset the aperture of the lens device 2 from the side of the camerabody 4, whereby what is shown in FIG. 23 is the mechanism for detectingthe displacement amount of the lever 84 converted into pulses. The AElever 94 is composed as one body with the arm 318, whereby this arm 318is rotatably held on the arm 322 rotatable around the shaft 320 ascenter by means of a pin 324. By means of this composition the AE lever94 is displaceable along the direction of the arrow ∂ or σ, beingslightly urged along the direction of the arrow ∂ by means of a notshown spring. The lever 326 is born on the shaft, while its one part isrotatably converted with the above mentioned arm 318 by means of the pin328, whereby this lever 326 serves to obtain pulses where numbercorresponds to the displacement amount of the above mentioned AE lever94. The above mentioned lever 326 includes a brush 330 at the end, beingrotated along the direction of the arrow b or a around the shaft 327 ascenter when the lever AE lever 94 is displaced along the direction ofthe arrow ∂ or σ. The above mentioned brush 330 is normally in thesliding contact with the fan-shaped pulse generating disc 322, wherebythe one part is normally in contact with the common electrode 334 whoseone part is earthed while the other part is faced with the comb toothshaped electrode 336 protruding along the radial direction. The teeth ofthe above mentioned comb tooth shaped electrode 336 are in theconductive state among each other, being connected to the power sourceVcc through the resistance 338 and at the same time to the inputterminal of the inverter 340. When in this state the AE lever 94 isdisplaced along the direction of the arrow ∂ or σ, the above mentionedbrush 330 is displaced along the direction of the arrow b or a, being inthe sliding contact with the above mentioned pulse generating disc 332.At this time the brush 330 is displaced, being repeatedly brought intoand out of contact with the above mentioned comb tooth shaped electrode336, whereby when the brush 330 is in contact with the electrode 336 theinverter 340 delivers a high lever output because the input of theinverter 340 is induced to be at low level, being attracted toward theearth side, while when the brush 330 is not in contact with theelectrode 336, the inverter 340 delivers a low level output because theinput of the inverter 340 is at high level by means of the power sourceVcc. In consequence, when the AE lever 94 is displaced out of the lockposition in the AE charge state along the direction of the arrow σ,being urged by the lever 84 at the side of the lens device 2, naturallythe brush 330 is also displaced along the direction of the arrow a,whereby the pulse signal corresponding to the displacement amount of theAE lever 94 is obtained from the inverter. Thus by counting the pulsenumber of this pulse signal, the displacement amount of the AE lever 94,namely the preset position corresponding to the diaphragm closing stepnumber for the lever 84 is detected, whereby the clamping the abovementioned AE lever 94 at the time point at which the detected stepnumber coincides with the desired step number, the aperture can bepreset by the lever 84 of the lens device 2.

Hereby it is natural that these takes place the time differences betweenthe operation of the mechanical components such as the AE levermechanism, the clamping mechanism and so on and that of the electricalcomponents such as for counting the output pulse signal of the inverter340, whereby it goes without saying that such differences should becompensated mechanically or electrically basing upon experimental datas.

Further the wave form of the pulses obtained through the contactmechanism such as the pulse generating disc 332 composed as shown inFIG. 32 is not necessarily suited for the counting, whereby when it isinverted by means of the inverter 340, it is reformed to some extent.However in case it is necessary the wave form could be reformed by meansof the wave form reforming means.

This camera system is, as explained above, so designed that the apertureof the lens device 2 can be preset from the side of the body whereby theclamping position of the lever for the aperture presetting is determinedby means of a digital means such as the counting of the pulse number sothat the preset with remarkably high precision is possible. Hereby inthe following explanation the pulse signal for detecting the position ofthe AE lever 94 including the output of the inverter 340 is called FPC.

When a speed light device is mounted on the camera system in accordancewith the present invention, the speed light photography can be carriedout automatically as explained afore. Below the operation of the speedlight device will be explained in detail in accordance with FIG. 24. Inthe drawings, 342 is the speed light unit in the automatic lightadjusting system, whereby the speed light amount is controlled inaccordance with the light reflected from the object to be photographed.Hereby the film sensitivity information from the film sensitivitysetting dial 106 and the aperture value information from the aperturesetting dial 108 are used as the element for the speed light amountcontrol.

The composition of such speed light unit is so much well known that itsdetailed explanation will be omitted here. In order that the speed lightunit 342 operates, it is essential that the not shown dischargecondenser should be charged up to a certain determined voltage. With thecharge completion of this condenser, this speed light unit 342 is readyfor operation, whereby the signal for the charge completion of thedischarge condenser is delivered through the signal line 344 in order totell the photographer that the charge has been completed. This signal isintroduced into the current circuit 346, whereby the first currentamount signal as the full automatic charge completion signal and thesecond current amount signal as the semi-automatic charge completionsignal can be introduced into this current circuit 346 through thecontrol contact 140 in accordance with the mode of the change overswitch 146. Further when the above mentioned first current amount or theabove mentioned second current amount becomes deliverable to the controlcontact 140 from the control terminal 54, this state is detected at theside of the camera and the mode is automatically changed over into thespeed light photographic mode, whereby the circuit is changed over intothe one by means of which the analog information from the data terminal56 is converted into the digital information and taken up instead of theanalog information from the not shown TTL light measuring system builtin the camera body 4. Further as mentioned afore, when the camera deviceis changed over into the speed light photographic mode by means of theabove mentioned first current amount (full automatic charge completionsignal) the shutter is automatically controlled with 1/60 sec. no matterat which shutter time is set at the side of the camera body 4, whilewhen the camera device is changed over into the speed light photographicmode by means of the above mentioned second current amount(semi-automatic charge completion signal) the shutter is automaticallycontrolled with 1/60 sec. only when the shutter time shorter than 1/60sec. is set at the side of the camera body 4. On the other hand the dataterminal 56 receives from the data contact 142 as analog information thedata relative to the aperture value set by means of the aperture settingdial 108 at the side of the speed light unit through the level settingdevice 348 directly connected to the above mentioned aperture settingdial 108. This analog information is converted into a digital one so asto be introduced into the camera device and used as the data for theaperture control.

When the shutter is released in the camera device which has been changedover into the speed light photographic mode by means of the fullautomatic or the semi-automatic charge completion signal from the speedlight unit, an operation instruction synchronized with the movement ofthe shutter of the camera body 4 is given to the speed light unit 342through the synchronization contacts 52, 138 in such a manner that thespeed light unit 342 controls the light amount automatically. On theother hand at the side of the camera device the shutter is released withthe shutter time of 1/60 sec. or longer (in case of the semi-automaticmode), while the aperture is controlled with the value set at the sideof the speed light unit.

Hereby in the following explanation, the signal for the full automaticcharge completion including the first current amount detected throughthe control terminal 54 is called CSA1 signal, the signal for thesemi-automatic charge completion including the second current amount iscalled CSA2 signal and both of the above two charge completion signalsare called CSA signal. Further the data relative to the aperture valuetaken up through the data terminal 56 are called VSA signal.

When the external light measuring meter is mounted on the camera systemin accordance with the present invention, a wider exposure controlbecome possible as is explained afore, whereby the operation of theexternal light measuring meter will be explained in detail in accordancewith the block diagrams of the external light measuring meter shown inFIGS. 25 and 26.

In FIG. 25, 350 is the reflexion light system light measuring meterwhich has the efficiency for directly measuring the light reflected fromthe object to be photographed without the intermediary of thephotographic lens and so on. This external light measuring meter 350includes the current circuit 352 into which the third current amount asthe external light measuring mode signal can be introduced from theterminal 54 at the side of the camera device through the contact 146,whereby the camera device on which this reflexion light system lightmeasuring meter is automatically changed over into the external lightmeasuring mode, detecting when the above mentioned third current amountcan be introduced into the contact 146 through the control terminal 54and the circuit is selected in which the analog information from thedata terminal 56 is converted into a digital one instead of the analoginformation from the not shown TTL light measuring system built in thecamera body. At the same time the above mentioned external lightmeasuring meter 350 delivers as analog information the object brightnessobtained as the result of the light measurement from the data contact148 to the data terminal 56, whereby this analog information isconverted into a digital information so as to be introduced into thecamera device and used as the data for the exposure control.

Further in FIG. 26, 354 is the incident light system light measuringmeter which has the efficiency for directly measuring the illuminationof the object. In the same way as in case of the light measuring metershown in FIG. 25, this external light measuring meber 354 includes acurrent circuit 356 into which the third current amount as the externallight measurement mode can be introduced from the control terminal 54 atthe side of the camera device through the contact 166, while the cameradevice on which this incident light system light measuring meter ismounted is automatically changed over into the external light measuringmode when the above mentioned third current amount is in a position toreach the contact 166 from the control terminal 54, and the circuit isselected in which the analog information from the data terminal 56 isconverted into a digital one instead of the analog information from thenot shown TTL light measuring system built in the camera body 4. At thesame time the illumination information obtained as the result of thelight measurement is given to the data terminal as analog informationfrom the above mentioned external light measuring meter 354 through thedata contact 168, which analog information is converted into a digitalone so as to be introduced into the camera device and used as the datafor the exposure control. Hereby the data taken up at this time at theside of the camera device is the illumination information obtained inaccordance with the incident light system, whereby there is no problemin designing the system in advance in such a maner that the abovementioned data can be handled equivalently to the object illuminationinformation obtained in accordance with the reflexion light system.

As is clear from the above mentioned explanation the reflexion lightsystem external light measuring meter can be handled quite equivalentlyto the incident light system external light measuring meter, whereby aspecific difference is that the incident light system light measuringmeter includes the AE lock function of the camera device, namely theincident light system light measuring meter 354 is so designed that onlywhile the light measuring button 174 is pushed down the light ismeasured so as to produce the light measurement data at the terminal168. Thus it is desired that the camera device would be in the AE lockstate when the light measuring button 174 is pushed down and no lightmeasurement data is produced at the terminal 168. Thus the abovementioned light measuring button 174 is functionally engaged with anormally closed switch not shown in the drawing whereby the switch isconnected in parallel to the switch SAELK for AE lock built in thecamera body 2 through the contact 170 and the AE lock terminal.

As explained above both of the reflection light system external lightmeasuring meter and the incident light system external light measuringmeter can be applied to the camera system in accordance with the presentinvention, whereby in the following explanation the signal for externallight measuring mode including the third current amount detected throughthe control terminal 54 is called OLM signal, while the data for themeasured light amount taken up through the terminal 56 is called OBsignal. This OB signal is in APEX value equivalent to the objectbrightness BV.

By means of the above mentioned mechanisms the camera system inaccordance with the present invention takes up various input data, thesetting data and the information as to the setting condition operationstate.

As is clear from the above explanation, the camera system in accordancewith the present invention takes up the datas necessary for the exposurecontrol, the operation conditions and the information as to theoperation states through various means, whereby these input informationare handled by means of the digital control system to be explainedlater.

As explained afore the camera system in accordance with the presentinvention applies the digital control system to the control system insuch a manner that the operation control for connecting synthetic systemin an organic way is carried out, the compactness and the high precisioncan be achieved at the time of manufacture in a simple way and the mostrational operations can be developed for a number of the inputinformations.

Below an embodiment of the digital control system applied to the camerasystem in accordance with the present invention will be explained,whereby the rational development of the system is not always madeconnected with the restriction due to the camera composition or theafore mentioned definition of the operations. The reason is that thecamera device applied to this camera system has not yet included anideal composition remarkably advance as compared with the conception ofthe conventional camera mechanism while the camera system itself isnearly in a similar situation. FIG. 27 shows an outlined block diagramof the digital control system for realizing the afore mentioned variousefficiencies of the camera device shown in FIG. 1, whereby this controlsystem is devided into three large blocks for the mechanical part 358including the setting efficiency of various numerical datas or operationconditions, the judging efficiency of the operation state of variousmechanisms and so on beside the most conventional mechanisms of thecamera system, for example, the shutter mechanism, the diaphragm closingmechanism, the mirror up mechanism, the quick return mechanism and soon. These three large blocks are the input control part 360, the centralcontrol part 362 and the output control part 364, whereby all of theseparts are connected to each other by means of one BAS line 366. Herebythe above mentioned mechanical part 358 includes various exposurecontrol mechanisms and various display mechanism beside the aforementioned input parts, namely the light measuring part, various datasetting parts, various condition setting parts, various operation statejudging parts and so on.

The measured light analog data, various condition setting signals andthe operation state judging signals are introduced into the abovementioned input control part 360 from the above mentioned mechanicalpart 358 through the input system 368, whereby the above mentioned datasor signals are converted into digital information most suited for theinformation processing and transmitted to the central control part 362through the input BAS line 370.

Various setting datas or various condition setting signals areintroduced into the above mentioned central control part 362 from theabove mentioned mechanical part 358 through the input system 372,whereby the above mentioned datas or signals are converted into formsmost suited for the information processing, operated accordinglytogether with the digital informations from the above mentioned inputcontrol part 360 and then transmitted to the output control part 364through the output BAS line 374 as the informations necessary for thecontrol of various exposure control mechanisms and various displaymechanism included in the above mentioned mechanical part 358. On theother hand the above mentioned central control part 362 delivers thetiming signal for taking up various setting datas or various conditionsetting signal and the timing signal for the dynamic driving of variousdisplay mechanisms to the above mentioned mechanical part 358 throughthe timing line 376.

The above mentioned output control part 364 delivers control signals tovarious exposure control mechanism of the above mentioned mechanicalpart 358 as well as necessary information to various display mechanismsbasing upon various condition setting signal or various operation statejudging signal from the above mentioned mechanical part 358 and thecontrol informations from the above mentioned central control part 362.

Below the efficiencies of the mechanical parts of the camera shown inFIG. 27 will be explained more in detail in accordance with the diagramshown in FIG. 28.

This mechanical part 358 takes part in all of the operations relative tothe input, the output and the control display of the camera device,including various setting switches for the input or the detecting switchor the measuring device, various switches for the output or the line,various power source plunger for the control, various display mechanismand so on.

In the drawing 378 is the afore mentioned TTL light measuring means,whose output signal is compressed in a logarithmic way by means of a notshown means so as to produce analog value corresponding to the APEXvalue of BVo (=BV-AVo-AVc) in case of the light measurement with thetotally opened diaphragm and of BVs (=BV-AV-AV'c) in case of the lightmeasurement with the closed diaphragm.

The output analog signal of the above mentioned TTL light measuringmeans 378 is led to the A-D converter 382 through the signal change overcircuit 380 of the input control part 360 so as to be converted into adigital data and introduced into the system. Hereby the above mentionedsignal change over circuit 380 is provided in order to make use of theabove mentioned A-D converter at the time of converting the analog datasfrom other light measuring means than the above mentioned TTL lightmeasuring means 378, namely the reflexion light system light measuringmeter 350, the incident light system light measuring meter 354 or thespeed light device 384 into digital values.

FIG. 24 shows a block diagram of the speed light device 384 in a simpleway, whereby when this speed light device 384 is mounted on the camerabody 4, the data contact 142, the control contact 140 and thesynchronization contact 138 of the speed light device 384 arerespectively connected to the data terminal 56, the control terminal 54and the synchronization contact 52 provided on the accessary shoe 50 ofthe camera body 4. When in this state the power source switch 132 (FIG.5) of the speed light device 384 is closed, the data VSA relative to theaperture value set with the aperture setting dial 108 is led to thesignal change over circuit 380 of the input control part 360 through thedata contact 142 and the data terminal 56, when in this state the speedlight device 384 has not yet completed the charging there is no chargecompletion signal CSA so that the input of the above mentioned data VSAis in the restricted state in the above mentioned signal change overcircuit 380. When the speed light device 384 has been charged a currentis ready to reach the charge completion detecting circuit 346 throughthe control terminal 54 and the data contact 140 at the side of thespeed light device 384. Namely the charge completion signal CSA isdelivered from the speed light device 384 in form of a negative currentsignal through the data contact 140 and the control terminal 54 so as tobe detected by the current detector 386 provided at the input controlpart 360. This current detector 386 includes an efficiency for giving acontrol signal to the above mentioned signal change over circuit 380,when a current is delivered through the control contact 54, so as toapply an analog signal from the terminal 56 to the A-D converter 382instead of the analog signal from the TTL light measuring means 378 andan efficiency for detecting the intensity of the above current so as tojudge the control signal included in the current. Thus when the chargecompletion signal CSA is delivered from the above mentioned speed lightdevice 384, the above mentioned signal change over circuit 380 deliversthe data VSA relative to the aperture value taken up through theterminal 54 in analog value to the A-D converter 382 in such a mannerthat the data VSA relative to the above mentioned aperture value isconverted into a digital value and introduced into the system. On theother hand, the above mentioned current detector 386, which detects theabove mentioned CSA signal, delivers the charge completion signal CGUPso as to bring the system into the speed light photographic mode and atthe same time judge in which of the full automatic state or thesemi-automatic state the speed light photographic mode is in accordancewith the current amount of the above mentioned CSA signal to which acurrent amount is selectively given in two steps by means of the chargecompletion detecting circuit 346 including an efficiency for switchingover the current amount of the charge completion signal with two stepsby means of the charge over switch 146, producing the full automaticsignal FAT in case the speed light photographic mode is full automatic.Thus the system is brought into the full automatic speed lightphotographic mode or the semi-automatic speed light photographic mode inaccordance the input of the charge completion signal CGUP produced bythe above mentioned current detector 386 and the existence of the fullautomatic signal FAT.

Hereby the speed light device 384 for the speed light photography istriggered by means of the synchronization switch provided at the side ofthe mechanical part 358, whereby the speed light device 384 is connectedto the above mentioned switch 388 through the synchronization contacts138 and 52. Further, as is well known, this synchronization switch 388is closed by means of the member 390 for detecting when the frontshutter plane has operated in case of the two shutter plane system focalplane shutter.

Below the above mentioned speed light device 384 will be explained morein detail in accordance with FIG. 24A. FIG. 24A shows the circuit of thespeed light device 384, of the current detector 386, of the signalswitching over circuit 380 and of the TTL light measuring circuit 378.

In FIG. 24A, 384A is the power source, 384B the step up circuit for thepower source voltage, 384C the main condenser for storing the speedlight energy and 384D the voltage detecting circuit for detecting theterminal voltage of the main condenser 384C, consisting of the voltagedividing resistance and so on. 346 is the detecting circuit forproducing the charge completion display when the main condenser 384C hasbeen charged up to a certain determined voltage, consisting of the neontube 130 as display lamp, the resistances 384E and 384F constituting thevoltage dividing circuit, the transister 384G and the resistance 384Hfor setting two steps of the current amount. 146 is the afore mentionedchange over switch. 384J is the trigger circuit, 102 the flash tube and384K the conventional discharge control tube connected to the flash tube102, consisting of the thyrister, the condenser and so on. 104 is thedetecting part consisting of the photocell and so on, sensing thereflected flash light of the flash discharge tube 102. 384L is theintegrating circuit for integrating the output of the sensing element104, at the same time serving as the aperture information settingcircuit and 384M is the switch functionally engaged with the abovementioned aperture value setting dial 108 in such a manner that theswitch 384M is set at the position MP when the dial 108 is set at M(FIG. 5). 384N and 384P are the capacitors, 384Q is the control circuitfor detecting the output level of the above mentioned integratingcircuit 384L, so as to deliver the flash light stopping signal to theabove mentioned discharge control circuit 384K when the output level hasreached a certain determined value. 384R is the resistance whose valueis variable in functional engagement of the above mentioned filmsensitivity setting dial 106. 384S is the operational amplifier, 384S₁384S₄ the resistances and 384T the switch functionally engaged with theabove mentioned switch 384M so as to be connected to the contact 384T₁-384T₃ selectively. 138, 140 and 142 are the afore mentioned contacts,138A the contact connected to the negative electrode of the power source384A through the power source switch 132, and 384U the flash light testswitch. 52A is the contact to be connected to the contact 138A, 52, 54and 56 the afore mentioned contacts and 388 the synchronization switch.386 is the afore mentioned current detector including the operationalamplifier 386A, the resistance 386B, the constant voltage power source386C, the resistances 386D and 386E and the comparater 386F. 380 is theafore mentioned signal change over circuit including the change overterminal 380A connected to the output terminal of the comparator 386F,the non-inverting input terminal connected to the afore mentionedconstant voltage power source 386C, the inverting terminal connected tothe contact 56 and the inverting terminal connected to the outputterminal of the light measuring circuit 378. 378 is the afore mentionedlight measuring circuit including the light sensitive element 378A forsensing the light amount of the object, the operational amplifier 378B,the diode 378C for logarithmically compressing the light amount of theelement 378A and the constant voltage power source 378D.

Below the operation will be explained briefly. When the flash lightdevice 384 is mounted on the camera, the terminals are connected as isshown in the drawing. When now an aperture value determined by the speedlight device is set with the aperture value setting dial 108, the switch384M is also selected. When at this time the switch 384M is connected tothe contact 384P, the switch 384T functionally engaged with the switch384M is also connected to the contact 384T₃. Thus in the feed backcircuit of the operational amplifier 384S the resistance 384S₃ whosevalue corresponds to a certain determined aperture value set with theaperture value setting dial 108 in advance is inserted in such a mannerthat the aperture information for the control at the time of the flashlight photography is set at the operational amplifier 384S constitutingthe aperture control signal forming means for the flash lightphotography. When then the power source switch 132 is closed, the powersource 384A is connected to the step up circuit 384B in such a mannerthat the stepped up voltage of the power source 384A is applied to themain condenser 384C so as to charge the condenser 384C. Further thecharge state of this condenser 384C is detected by means of the voltagedividing circuit 384D constituting the detecting circuit, whereby whenthe main condenser 384C is sufficiently charged for the flash lightphotography the neon tube 130 in the detecting circuit lights up fordisplaying the charge completion while at the same time, a base currentis delivered to the transistor. When the shutter of the camera isreleased while the neon tube 130 is on as mentioned above, a voltage isapplied from the camera to the speed light device through the terminals54 and 140 of the current detecting circuit 386. At this time, a basecurrent is delivered to the transistor 384, so that the signal voltagefrom the afore mentioned detecter 386 is applied to the transistor 384Gthrough the terminals 54 and 140, the switch 146 as well as theresistance 384H so as to bring the transistor 384G in the switched onstate. The value of this resistance 384H is set small in comparison withthat of the resistances 384S₁ and 384S₂ so that the current flowingthrough the resistance 384H is comparatively large in such a manner thatthe output level of the operational amplifier 386A of the detector 386assumes the value corresponding to that of the resistance 386. Herebythe current flowing through the terminals 54 and 140 at this time is thesignal CSA₁ for bringing the camera into the full automatic mode. Theoutput level of the afore mentioned amplifier 386A becomes comparativelyhigh so that the comparater 386F is actuated so as to operate the signalchange over circuit 380. Thus the signal change over circuit 380 issupplied with the data VSA from the speed light device, namely the dataas to the aperture value through the terminal 142 and 56 instead of theoutput of the light measuring circuit 378. On the other hand, at theterminal 140 the signal CSA₁ is produced so that the operationalamplifier 386A as the output terminal of the detector 386 delivers thecharge completion signal CGUP and the full automatic mode signal FAT.Further the current flowing through the terminal 140 when the normallyclosed type switch 146 is in the opened state is smaller than the switch146 is in the closed state. Namely at this time at the terminal 140 thesemi-automatic mode signal CSA2 is produced. It goes without saying thatthe charge completion signal CGUP is delivered from the output terminalof the detector 386 while the full automatic mode signal FAT is notdelivered, because the output level of the detector 386 goes down.

When the synchronization switch 388 is closed by means of releasing theshutter of the camera in the above mentioned state the trigger signal isdelivered from the trigger circuit 384J so as to trigger the flash tube102 as well as the discharge control circuit 384K in such a manner thatthe flash tube illuminate the object (not shown in the drawing).

When the light reflected from the object reaches the light sensitiveelement 104 the capaciter 384P is charged until the charge level reachesa certain determined value when the control circuit 384Q delivers theflash light stopping signal from the output terminal so that thedischarge control circuit 384K stops the operation of the flash tube102. Further when the mask M is selected with the aperture value settingdial 108, the switch 384M is connected to the contact MP so that wholeof the charge stored in the condenser 384 of the speed light device isdischarged, whereby the total flash light mode is achieved.

In order to complete the camera system in accordance with the presentinvention, this synchronization switch 388 is used to obtain thesynchronization not only with the speed light device 384 to be mountedon the accessary shoe 50 of the camera body 4 but also with otherconventional speed light device or flash light device, for which purposethe switch 388 is also connected to the X contact 64.

FIG. 25 shows a block diagram of the reflection light system lightmeasuring meter 350 in a simple way, whereby when this light measuringmeter 350 is mounted on the camera body 4, the data terminal 56 and thecontrol terminal 54 provided on the accessary shoe 50 of the camera body4 are respectively connected to the contacts 148 and 146 of the lightmeasuring meter 350. At this time a current is ready to reach thecontact 146 at the side of the light measuring meter 350 through thecontrol terminal 54. Namely the signal OLM for showing the mounting ofthe external light measuring meter is delivered in a form of a negativecurrent signal from the light measuring meter 350 through the contact146 and the control terminal 54, whereby this signal OLM is detected bythe current detector 386 provided at the input control part 360. Thusthe control signal is given to the above mentioned signal change overcircuit 380 from this current detector 386, whereby the data relative tothe measured light amount in analog value from the data terminal 56 isintroduced into the A-D converter 382 instead of the analog signal fromthe TTL light measuring means 378 so as to be converted into a digitaldata and introduced into the system. Hereby this measured light amountdata OB is not the one obtained through the photographic lens device sothat various compensations are not necessary in such a manner that theobtained signal directly corresponds to the object brightness. On theother hand, the above mentioned current detector 386 judges the abovementioned OLM signal in accordance with the current amount and producesthe control signal OLM so as to bring the system into the external lightmeasuring mode. The system carries out operation basing upon theexternal light measuring data in accordance with the above mentionedcontrol signal OLM.

FIG. 26 shows a block diagram of the incident light system lightmeasuring meter 354, whereby when the coupler (FIG. 7) of the lightmeasuring meter 350 is mounted on the camera body 4, the contacts 168,166 and 170 of the coupler 156 are respectively brought into contactwith the data terminal 56, the control terminal 56 and the AE lockterminal 58 provided on the accessary shoe 50 of the camera body 4. Atthis time a current is ready to reach the contact 166 at the side of thelight measuring meter 354 through the control terminal 54. Namely thesignal showing the mounting of the external light measuring meter isdelivered in a form of a negative current signal from the lightmeasuring meter 354 through the contact 166 and the control terminal 54,whereby this signal OLM is detected by the current detector 386 providedat the input control part 360. Thus the control signal is delivered tothe above mentioned signal change over circuit 380 from this currentdetector 386, whereby the data OB relative to the measured light amountin analog value from the data terminal 56 is ready to reach the A-Dconverter 382 instead of the analog signal from the TTL light measuringmeans 378.

Hereby this incident light system light measuring meter 354 includes anormally closed AE lock switch 392, whereby when the coupler 156 ismounted on the accessary shoe 50 of the camera body 4, the abovementioned AE lock switch 392 short-circuit the ordinary AE lock switchSAELK included in this mechanical part 358 through the contact 170 ofthe coupler 156 and the AE lock terminal 58 of the accessary shoe 50 insuch a manner that this camera device is brought into the AE lock state.

This AE lock switch 392 is functionally engaged with the light measuringbutton 174 for actuating the light measuring meter 354 so as to beopened by the operation of the button 174 in such a manner that when thelight measurement is started at the side of the light measuring meter354, the camera device is released out of the AE lock state.

At this time the data OB relative to the measured light amount isproduced in analog value by the light measuring meter 354 at the contact168 and introduced into the A-D converter 382 through the data terminal56 and the signal change over circuit 380 so as to be converted into adigital value and introduced into the system.

Although hereby this measured light amount data OB is the data relativeto the illumination quite different from the object brightnessinformation BV because the data OB is not the one obtained in accordancewith the reflection light system, the handling in the APEX operation isquite identical with that of the object brightness information BV sothat when the analog value produced by the light measuring meter 354 isadjusted properly, the obtained measured light amount data OB candirectly correspond to the object brightness BV. On the other hand theabove mentioned current detector 386, which judge the above mentionedOLM signal in accordance with its current amount, produces the controlsignal OLM so as to bring the system into the external light measuringmode. The system carries out operations basing upon the externalmeasured light data in accordance with the above mentioned controlsignal quite in the same way as in case with the incident light systemlight measuring meter. Namely with the exception of the serviceabilityof the AE lock, the operation of this camera system is absolutely sameno matter which of the reflection light system light measuring meter orthe incident light system light measuring meter is used as adapter forexternal light measurement.

As is clear from the above explanation, the meaning of the digitalsignal produced by the A-D converter 382 is specified in accordance withthe signal CGUP, FAT and OLM produced by the current detector 386,whereby the operation of the system is also converted into the one inthe desired mode in accordance with the output of the above mentionedcurrent detector 386. Hereby in the following explanation the digitalsignal produced by the above mentioned A-D converter 382.

Further this input control part 360 takes up various conditions andoperation state set at the above mentioned mechanical part 358, afterhaving detected them and also the AELK signal for the AE lock, the AECGsignal for the AE charge state of the AE lever and so on through theSAELK designed in the same way as the switching mechanism shown in FIG.21, the winding up completion detecting switch SWHUP and the AE chargedetecting switch SAECG. Hereby the above mentioned AE lock switch SAELKis functionally engaged with the selector lever 22 provided on the uppersurface of the camera body 4, the above mentioned switch SWHUP with themechanism operated by the winding up lever 14 and the above mentionedswitch AECG with the mechanism mechanically linked with the AE lever 94.

As mentioned above the datas and the condition setting signals taken upinto the input control part 360 are, after having been accordinglyarranged in the timing, transmitted to the central control part 362through the BAS line 370.

The above mentioned control part 362 takes up various setting datas andsetting conditions from the mechanical part 358. This central controlpart 362 delivers the timing pulses as is shown in FIG. 13 through thetiming line 394, and takes up, in synchronization of their timingpulses, the SV' data relative to the film sensitivity SV, the data AVo(Grey code) relative to the smallest aperture value of the photographiclens device, the MHAL signal for showing that the aperture of thephotographic lens device has been set at the side of the lens device,the SPDW signal for showing that the diaphragm of the lens device hasbeen closed, the data relative to the set aperture value AV or the setshutter time TV, the data ASLG for showing that the data relates to theaperture value AV, the signal AMAX for showing the largest aperturevalue of the photographic lens device and so on.

As mentioned above various datas and signals for setting conditions aretaken up through the composition shown in FIGS. 12-19.

This central control part 362, in which various operations arecontrolled, delivers the data signals for the control of variousexposure control mechanisms of the mechanical part 358 and the datasignal for the display to the output control parts 364 through theoutput BAS line 374.

This output control part 364 includes various control efficiency such asthe shutter release control for starting the camera operations, theaperture control for controlling the aperture value with the lens devicewith the set or the operated value, the shutter time control forcontrolling the shutter time with the set or the operated value and thedisplay control for displaying necessary informations and delivers thecontrol signals for the shutter release means 396, the aperture controlmeans 398, the shutter time control means 400, the digital display means402 and the twinkling display means 404. On the other hand, this outputcontrol part 364 takes up various setting conditions and the operationstates the above mentioned mechanical part 358, after having detectedthem and takes up the SELF signal for showing that the self-timer hasbeen set, the shutter release SR signal for starting the cameraoperation after the shutter release and the CTST signal for showing thatthe front shutter plane of the focal plane shutter has run through theself-timer set switch SSELF designed in the same way as the switchcomposition shown in FIG. 21, the shutter release switch SW₂ and thefront plane starting switch SCTST designed in the same way as the switchcomposition shown in FIG. 22. Further the above mentioned output controlpart 364 takes up, through the composition as is shown in FIG. 23, theFPC signal obtained by converting into pulses the distance the AE lever94 has travelled from the AE charge position.

Hereby the above mentioned switch SSELF is functionally engaged with theselector lever 22 provided over the upper surface of the body 4, theabove mentioned shutter release switch SW₂ with the shutter releasebutton 18 and the above mentioned switch SCTST with the front planestarting detecting member 406.

To the mechanical part 358 of this camera device a mechanical sequencecontrol mechanism and an electrical control mechanism with anelectromagnetic solenoid are applied, whereby the above mentionedshutter release means 396, the aperture control means 398 and theshutter time control means 400 are the parts connected with theelectrical control.

The above mentioned shutter release means 396 serves to give thetriggering for starting the mechanical sequence of the camera device,carrying out the necessary operation by means of a remarkably smallelectromagnetic solenoid. Hereby the operation of this shutter releasemeans 396 has a close connection with the shutter release signal SR andthe self-timer set signal SELF introduced into the above mentioned inputcontrol part 360, the winding up completion signal WHUP introduced intothis output control part 364 and so on.

In the mechanical sequence started by means of the operation of theabove mentioned shutter release means 396, the operation for displacingthe AE lever from the AE charge position is included. This AE lever 94includes, as already mentioned afore, the efficiency for presetting theaperture value of the lens device 2, being clamped at a proper positionduring the displacement from the charge position toward the dischargeposition, whereby what decides this clamping position is thedisplacement amount of the AE lever 94 from the AE charge position.Namely the displacement amount of this AE lever 94 from the AE chargeposition is, as is clear from the explanation mode in accordance withFIG. 2, corresponds to the preset value of the control diaphragm closingstep number of the lens device 2, so that it is possible to preset theaperture at the lens device 2 by detecting the displacement amount ofthe above mentioned AE lever 94 in such a manner that when the detectedamount reaches a value corresponding to the control diaphragm closingstep number, the above mentioned AE lever 94 is clamped so as to keepthe then displacement amount.

What is introduced into the above mentioned output control part inaccordance with the displacement amount of the above mentioned AE lever94 during such operation is the FPC signal. This FPC signal is the pulsesignal whose number corresponds to the displacement amount of the abovementioned lever 94 so that it is possible to learn the displacementamount of the above mentioned lever 94 in a simple way by counting thisFPC signal by means of a counter.

The above mentioned aperture control means 398 serves to actuate themechanism for clamping the above mentioned AE lever 94 when thedisplacement amount of the above mentioned AE lever 94 from the AEcharge position reaches a value corresponding to the diaphragm closingstep number given from the above mentioned central control part 362,carrying out the necessary operation also by means of a smallelectromagnetic solenoid.

Hereby in the mechanical sequence started by means of the operation ofthe above mentioned shutter release means 396, includes, beside theoperation for displacing the above mentioned AE lever 94 from the chargeposition, such operation as the lifting of the mirror, the closing ofthe diaphragm of the photographic lens device 2 down to the presetaperture value, the start of the front shutter plane of the focal planeshutter and so on.

Generally the shutter time of the focal plane shutter is controlled bycontrolling the time from the start of the front shutter plane till thestart of the rear shutter plane, whereby this camera device is not theexception. Namely the desired shutter time is obtained by counting thetime after the start of the front shutter plane while controlling thestart of the rear shutter plane in such a manner that when the timecorresponding to the shutter time given by the above mentioned centralcontrol part 362 has passed the rear shutter plane is started. Hereby itgoes without saying that in this camera device the time is counted bymeans of an electrical means.

When the above mentioned front shutter plane starts, the mechanical partdelivers the signal CTST. The output control part 364, to which thisCTST signal is delivered, counts the time basing upon the shutter timedata given from the above mentioned central control part 362 in such amanner that when the time corresponding to the above mentioned shuttertime has passed the rear shutter plane is started by means of theshutter time control means 400 so designed as to carry out operationalso by means of a small electromagnetic solenoid.

As mentioned above, the shutter release means 396, the aperture controlmeans 398 and the shutter time control means 400 are the parts fordirectly connecting the electrical control system to the exposurecontrol in this camera system, assuming a very important position in thesystem.

Hereby the mechanical sequence of the camera device itself continues theoperation even during the operation of such electrical control means,whereby in the quick return of the mirror after the rear shutter planehas run, the release of the diaphragm closing driving of the lens deviceand so on the mechanical control mechanisms take part in.

Besides the above this output control part 346 has the display functionfor displaying the informations necessary for taking a picture to thephotographer. The camera device shown in FIG. 1 includes, as is alreadymentioned, a display means for displaying the necessary information inthe view finder 13, whereby this data display means is included in themechanical parts 358 of the system and shown with 402. This data displaydevice 402 is supplied from the above mentioned output control part 364with the information of the data to be displayed, namely the code signalfor the display and at the same time from the central control part 362with the timing signal for the dynamic display driving through thetiming line 394. This dynamic display driving is a well known displaymethod, whereby the desired data is displayed in the desired displayunit by giving to all of the display units constituting a display devicethe common informations altering with time and at the same timeselectively driving the above mentioned units by means of the timing.This method is widely applied because the circuit composition can besimplified while the power consumption can be decreased. This dynamicdisplay driving is especially profitable in case a large power sourcecan not be built in a limited space as of the camera device.

Further on the upper surface of the camera body 4 shown in FIG. 1 a LEDlamp 32 is provided, whereby the efficiencies of this LED lamp 32 arealso important. Namely the one efficiency is to prove that the batterystill has an efficient capacity by lighting up at the time of thebattery checking while the other is to prove that the self-time is inoperation by lightening up during the photography with self-timer. Alsoto this LED lamp 32 a control signal is delivered from the abovementioned output control part 364. As mentioned above the mechanicalpart 358 connects the input control part 360, the central control part362 and the output control part 364 closely to the input conditions suchas the light measurement data, the external input data, the settingdata, the setting condition, the judgement state and so on or thecontrol as well as the display of the shutter release, the aperturevalue, the shutter time and so on.

The motor drive device whose detail is shown in FIG. 8 is shown with 405in FIG. 28. This motor drive device 405 is connected to the switch SWNUPthrough the contact 210 and the contact 216 of the camera body. Theabove mentioned switch SWNUP is kept in the closed state since thecompletion of the film winding up till the completion of the operationof the rear shutter plane after the shutter release at the side of thecamera device as has already been explained and in consequence kept atthe high level through the inverter during the above mentioned timeinterval so as to obtain the WNUP signal. The above mentioned motordrive device is controlled by means of the WNUP signal before passingthrough the above mentioned inverter, namely the WNUP signal. This WNUPsignal is at the high level during other time interval than the abovementioned in the operation cycle of the camera, namely since thecompletion of the rear shutter plane till the completion of the filmwinding up in such a manner that the above mentioned motor drive device405 drives the film winding up motor by means of this WNUP signal.Namely by means of this motor drive device the film winding up operationis started as soon as the rear shutter plane has completed the operationafter the shutter release and stops the film winding up operation at thetime point when the film winding up operation has been completed so thatthere is no room for the misoperation while the speedy film winding upoperation is possible.

Further as is shown in FIG. 8, this motor drive device 405 includes theshutter release device 220 capable of remote controlling of the shutterrelease of the camera device, whereby this shutter release device 220 isnot always electrically connected to the motor drive device 405. Theoperation button 228 provided on this shutter release device 358 isfunctionally engaged with the switch connected in parallel with theshutter release switch SW2 of the mechanical part 358 through thecontacts 212 and 218, whereby its efficiency is completely same as thatof the shutter release button provided on the upper surface of thecamera body 4.

As mentioned afore, the input control part 360, the central control part362 and the output control part 364 have various efficiencies, wherebytheir operations are connected to each other through the BAS lines,constituting a rational system together with the mechanical part 358.

The principal operation of this system is to carry out the operationbasing upon the external condition (such as the measured light data) inaccordance with the data or the conditions set by the photographer anddelivers the control datas necessary for the exposure control so as todisplay to the photographer the necessary control data among the abovementioned data and at the same time controls the exposure basing uponthe above mentioned control data. Below the operation of the coverdevice in various modes will be explained in general.

The digital data DD produced by the A-D converter 382 of the inputcontrol part 360 corresponds to either of the measured light data BVowith light measurement with the totally opened diaphragm, the measuredlight data BVs with the light measurement with the closed diaphragm, theaperture control data VSA from the speed light device 384 and theexternal measured light data OB from the external light measuringadapters 350 and 354, whereby they are assorted and treated accordinglyin accordance with the signals such as the charge completion signal CGUPproduced by the afore mentioned current detector 386, the external lightmeasurement mode control signal OLM, the diaphragm closing signal SPDWproduced by the switch 286 mechanically linked with the diaphragmclosing lever 64 and so on.

Now let us suppose that no speed light device 384 nor external lightmeasuring adapter 350 and 354 is mounted on the accessary shoe 50 of thecamera body 4. At this time the camera device is in a position to be infive kinds of the photographic modes (bulb photographic mode isexcluded).

As to there five kinds of the photographic modes, either of the aperturevalue priority AE photographic mode, the shutter time priority AEphotographic mode, the manual exposure control photographic mode withlight measurement with totally opened diaphragm, the manual exposurecontrol photographic mode with light measurement with closed diaphragmand the aperture value priority AE photographic mode with the lightmeasurement with the closed diaphragm can be selected in accordance withthe state of the mode selector 38 provided on the upper surface of thecamera body 4, the diaphragm closing lever provided on the front surfaceof the camera body 4 and the aperture setting ring of the lens device 2as is shown in FIG. 11, whereby especially in case of the data operationthe necessary operation routine is decided into four because the manualexposure adjustment mode with the light measurement with totally openeddiaphragm is equal to the aperture value priority or the shutter timepriority AE photographic mode.

When now the mode selector 38 is set at the side of the priority on theaperture value, the diaphragm closing lever 64 at the side of thediaphragm opening and the aperture value setting ring 8 of the lensdevice 2 at the position at which the mark 12 is selected, the system isin the aperture value priority AE photographic mode. The measured lightamount BVon relative to the object brightness obtained at this time fromthe result of the light measurement includes, as mentioned afore, thesmallest aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 and the vignettingerror AVc, whereby for the actual object brightness data BV the relation(BVo=BV-AVo-AVc) is established as is shown in the relation (3). On theother hand the data SV relative to the film sensitivity, the data AVorelative to the smallest aperture value of the lens device 2, theaperture value AV desired by the photographer and so on are set, wherebythe data AVo relative to the vignetting error AVc is also derived fromthe above mentioned smallest aperture value data AVo. Hereby the systemis so designed that this vignetting error AVc is not derived by theoperation but selected out of a plural number of the datas as to thevignetting error prepared in advance so as to correspond to the smallestaperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2.

In case of this camera system, before starting the operation for theexposure control it is investigated whether the aperture value AV set bymeans of the dial 34 is longer than the smallest aperture value AVo ofthe photographic lens device 2 but smaller than the largest aperturevalue ANAX. In case the result of this comparison operation shows thatthe aperture value set by the dial 34 is smaller than the smallestaperture value AVo, the set aperture value AV is replaced with thesmallest aperture value AVo, while the result shows that the aperturevalue set by the dial 34 is larger than the largest aperture value AMAXthe set aperture value AV is replaced with the largest aperture valueAMAX.

The reason for the above is that, as mentioned afore, the aperture valueAV is set not at the side of the lens device 2 but at the side of thedial 34 and therefore there is a possibility that the set value liesbeyond the controlable range of the photographic lens device 2, wherebythe smallest or the largest aperture value AVo or AMAX is applied as theaperture value AV for the control.

Hereby the measured light data BVo is introduced into the input controlpart 362 from the TTL light measuring means provided at the mechanicalpart 358 through the A-D converter 382 is further introduced into thecentral control part 362 so as to be operated as follows.

First of all the data SV relative to the film sensitivity is added tothe measured light data introduced as mentioned above. Namely theoperation

    BVo+SV=BV+SV-AVo-AVc                                       (8)

is carried out, whereby the relation (9) corresponds to

    BVo+SV=EV-AVo-AVc                                          (9)

in accordance with the relation (2). Then the data AVo relative to thesmallest aperture value and that AVc relative to the vignetting errorare added to the above mentioned operation results. Namely the operation

    BVo+SV+AVo+AVc=EV                                          (10)

is carried out in such a manner that through the above mentionedcalculation the proper exposure amount EV is operated for the film to beused basing upon the measured light data.

Hereby this operation is, as mentioned afore, carried out in a digitalway, whereby when the operation register is over-flowed with theoperations in accordance with the relations (8), (9) and (10), themaximum capacity of the operation register is considered as theoperation result.

Then, as mentioned afore, the aperture value AV set with the dial issubtracted from the obtained exposure amount EV, whereby the result is,as is clear from the relation (1),

    Ev-AV=TV                                                   (11)

in such a manner that the shutter time necessary for obtaining theproper exposure for the set aperture value is obtained.

The shutter time TV obtained in this way is the control data forsatisfying the exposure amount EV in accordance with the relation (10)for the set aperture value AV, whereby there is a possibility that attimes the operation result should be beyond the range of the shuttertime of the camera body 4 and in order to provide for such a case it isnecessary to tell the fact to the photographer and prevent themisoperation. Such being the situation this camera system is so designedas to investigate whether the shutter time obtained from the operationis shorter than the longest shutter time TMAX but longer than theshortest shutter time TMIN of the shutter mechanism of the camera body4. In case the result shows that the shutter time obtained from theoperation is beyond the longest shutter time or the shortest shuttertime, the shutter time TV is replaced with the shutter time of TMAX orTMIN, whereby at the same time the fact is informed to the photographer.

Then the smallest aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2is subtracted from the aperture value AV for the control as follows.

    AV-AVo=AVs                                                 (12)

so as to obtain the diaphragm closing step number AVs for the aperturecontrol. Hereby the reason why this camera system applies the diaphragmclosing step number to the aperture control is that the step numbercontrol mechanism is applied to the control mechanism of thephotographic lens device 2 shown in FIG. 2.

By means of the above mentioned operation process, the shutter time TVand the control diaphragm closing step number AVs are derived basingupon the set aperture value.

Further it is possible for the photographer to confirm the result of theabove mentioned operation in the view finder 13, whereby the system isso designed that, as is shown in FIG. 10(a)-(II), the aperture value setwith the dial 34 and the shutter time obtained from the operation aredisplayed. This display mode is already explained afore.

In accordance with the above mentioned operation result, the exposurecontrol of the camera device is carried out after the shutter release,whereby the lens device 2 carries out the preset control of thediaphragm closing step number AVs from the side of the camera body 4because the aperture setting ring 8 selects the mark 22.

Hereby in case the mark 22 is not selected with the aperture settingring 8 at the side of the lens device 2, it is impossible to preset thediaphragm closing step number AVs of the lens device 2 from the side ofthe body 4 and at the time of the actual exposure control the lensdevice 2 is closed down to the aperture position preset by means of theaperture setting ring 8. Thus in case of this camera system, such a caseas mentioned above is made the manual exposure adjustment photographicmode with the light measurement with the totally opened diaphragm,whereby it is possible to control the exposure with the set aperturevalue and the operated shutter time by presetting the aperture valuewith the aperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2 inaccordance with the aperture value displayed in the view finder, namelythe aperture value set with the dial 34 at the side of the camera body4. In case of such manual exposure adjustment photographic mode with thelight measurement with the totally opened diaphragm, as is shown in FIG.10(a)-(III), the character " M" is displayed beside the aperture valueset with the dial 34 or the shutter time operated so as to inform thephotographer of the necessity to set the aperture value of thephotographic lens device 2 in accordance with the display manually ashas already been explained. Hereby this manual exposure adjustmentphotographic mode can be said to be of the character with the priorityon the aperture value because what is set with the dial 34 at first isthe aperture value. What is especially interesting in case of thismanual exposure adjustment photographic mode is the fact that thiscamera device carries out the aperture value priority AE photographicoperation by keeping the aperture value preset or set by closing thediaphragm at the side of the lens device 2 equal to the aperture valueset with the dial 34.

When now the mode selector 38 is set at the side of the priority on theshutter speed, the diaphragm closing lever 64 at the side of the totalopening and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 at theposition at which the mark 12 is selected, this system is the shuttertime priority AE photographic mode. The measured light amount BVorelative to the object brightness obtained as the result of the lightmeasurement at this time includes, as has already been explained, thesmallest aperture value of the lens device 2 and the vignetting errorAVc, so that for the actual object brightness data BV the relationBVo=BV-AVo-AVc is established, which has already been explained.

On the other hand the data SV relative to the film sensitivity, the dataAVo relative to the smallest aperture value of the lens device 2, theshutter time TV desired by the photographer and so on have been set inthe mechanical part 358, while the data AVc relative to the vignettingerror AVc has also been derived from the above mentioned smallestaperture value data AVo in the same way as in case of the priority onthe aperture value.

The measured light data BVo introduced into the input control part 360through the A-D converter 382 from the TTL light measuring means 378provided in the mechanical part is further introduced into the centralcontrol part 362 so as to be processed further.

First of all the data SV relative to the film sensitivity is added tothe measured light data BVo introduced as mentioned above. Namely theoperation BTo+SV(=BV+SV-AVo-AVc) is carried out, whereby the relationcorresponds to BVo+SV=EV-AVo-AVc in accordance with the afore mentionedrelation (2) in the same way as in case of the priority on aperturevalue. Then, to the above mentioned operation result the data AVorelative to the smallest aperture value of the lens device and that AVcof the vignetting error are added. Namely the operationBVo+SV+AVo+AVc(=EV) is carried out, whereby the exposure amount EVproper for the film to be used is carried out basing upon the lightmeasurement data.

As has already been mentioned, this operation is carried out in adigital way, whereby when the operation register is over-flowed with aseries of the above mentioned operations, the maximum capacity of thisoperation register is taken for the operation result.

Then the data TV relative to the shutter time set with the dial 34 issubtracted from the exposure amount EV obtained as mentioned above,whereby the result is, as is clear from the relation (1),

    EV-TV=AV                                                   (13),

in such a manner that the aperture value necessary for obtaining theproper exposure is obtained for the set shutter time TV.

Hereby the thus obtained aperture value AV is the control data forsatisfying the exposure amount EV operated for the set shutter time TV,whereby there is a possibility that at times this operation resultshould lies beyond the controlable range of the aperture value of thelens device 2. In such a case it is necessary to inform the photographerof the fact in order to prevent the misoperation. For this purpose thiscamera system is so designed as to investigate whether the obtainedaperture value AV is smaller than the largest aperture value AMAXcontrolable with the lens device 2 but larger than the smallest aperturevalue AVo. Hereby it goes without saying that when the aboveinvestigation result shows that the aperture value AV obtained from theoperation in beyond the largest aperture value AMAX or the smallestaperture value AVo this limit value AMAX or AVo is made the aperturevalue AV for the control instead of the aperture value obtained from theoperation and at the same time the fact is informed of to thephotographer.

Then the data AVo relative to the smallest aperture value of thephotographic lens device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value for thecontrol (AV-AVo=AVs) so as to obtain the diaphragm closing step numberAVs for the aperture control. Hereby the reason why this camera systemcontrols the aperture with the diaphragm closing step number AVs is thatthe step number control mechanism is applied to the control mechanism ofthe photographic device 2 shown in FIG. 2, which has already beenexplained.

Thus the control step number AVs is derived basing upon the set shuttertime TV through the above mentioned operation process.

Further it is possible for the photographer to confirm the result of theabove mentioned operation in the view finder, whereby, as is shown inFIG. 10(a)-(I), also the aperture value obtained as the result of theoperation with the shutter time set with the dial 34 is displayed at thesame time. Hereby the display mode is as has already been explained.

The camera device carries out the exposure control after the shutterrelease basing upon the above mentioned operation result, whereby in thelens device 2 the mark 22 is selected with the aperture setting ring sothat the preset control is carried out with the diaphragm closing stepnumber AVs from the side of the camera body 4.

Hereby, because the mark 22 is selected with the aperture setting ring 8at the side of the lens device 2, the preset control is carried out withthe diaphragm closing step number AVs from the side of the camera body4.

Further it is impossible to preset the diaphragm closing step number AVsof the lens device 2 from the side of the camera body 4 in case the mark22 is not selected with the aperture setting ring 8 at the side of thelens device 2, whereby at the time of the actual exposure control thelens device 2 is closed down to the aperture position preset with theaperture setting ring 8. Thus in case of this camera system, such a caseis made the manual exposure adjustment photographic mode with the lightmeasurement with the totally opened diaphragm, whereby it is possible tocontrol the exposure with the set shutter time and the aperture valuepreset with the lens device 2 by presetting the aperture value by meansof the aperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2 basingupon the aperture value displayed in the view finder, namely theaperture value derived from the operation result. Hereby as has alreadybeen explained, in case of such manual exposure adjustment photographicmode with the light measurement with the totally opened diaphragm thecharacter "M" is displayed in the view finder 13 as is shown in FIG.10(a)-(III) in order to inform the photographer of the necessity tomanually set the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 bymeans of the display.

When then the mode selector 38 is set at the priority on the aperturevalue, the diaphragm closing 64 is at the side of the diaphragm closingout the aperture setting ring 8 at the position at which a certaindetermined aperture value is preset, the system in the aperture valuepriority AE photographic mode. The measured light amount BVs relative tothe object brightness obtained from the result of the light measurementincludes at this time, as has already been explained, the largestaperture value AV of the lens device 2 and the vignetting error AVc',whereby it is impossible to obtain the vignetting error because thissystem does not includes the means for taking up the above mentionedaperture value AV so that the vignetting error is here disregarded. Thusas is clear from the relation (5), the above mentioned measured lightamount BVs has the following relation for the actual object brightness

    BVs=BV-AV.

On the other hand, at the side of the mechanical part 358, the data SVrelative to the film sensitivity is set.

The measured light data BVs with the closed diaphragm introduced intothe input control part 360 through the A-D converter 382 from the TTLlight measuring means 378 provided in the above mentioned mechanicalpart 358 is further introduced into the central control part 362 so asto be processed further.

At first the data SV relative to the film sensitivity is added to themeasured light data thus introduce. Namely the operation is carried outas follows

    BVs+SV=BV-AB+SV                                            (14),

whereby this relation corresponds to the relation

    BVs+SV=EV-AV=TV                                            (15)

in accordance with the relations (1) and (2). Thus by means of suchoperation the shutter time TV necessary for obtaining the properexposure EV can be derived.

Further the shutter time TV obtained in this way is the control data forsatisfying the exposure amount EV of the relation (15) for the aperturevalue of the closed lens devie 2, whereby there is a possibility that attimes the operation result lies beyond the limit of the shutter timegiven to the camera body 4 and in such a case it is necessary to informthe photographer of the fact in order to prevent the misoperation. Forthis purpose this camera system is so designed as to investigate whetherthe shutter time TV obtained from the operation result is shorter thanthe longest shutter time and longer than the shortest shutter time ofthe shutter mechanism built in the camera body 4. When the investigationresult shows that the shutter time TV obtained from the operation resultis beyond the limit of the longest shutter time TMAX or the shortestshutter time TMIN, this limit value of TMAX or TMIN is adopted as theshutter speed TV for the control instead of the shutter time TV obtainedfrom the operation result, whereby it goes without saying that the factis informed of to the photographer.

Hereby it must be added that in this photographic mode the aperturevalue set with the dial 34 is disregarded at all.

Thus by means of the above mentioned operation result, the shutter timeis derived basing upon the aperture value of the closed photographiclens 2.

Hereby it is possible for the photographer to confirm the abovementioned operation result in the view finder, whereby the display atthis time is as is shown in FIG. 10(a)-(IV). This display mode is as hasalready been explained.

Hereby in accordance with the above mentioned operation result thecamera device controls the exposure after the shutter release, wherebythe shutter is controlled with the shutter TV at the side of the camerabody 4, while the diaphragm of the lens device 2 is kept in the closedstate at the position manually set.

When then the mode selector 38 is set at the side of the priority onshutter time, the diaphragm lever 64 at the side of closing and theaperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 at the position at which acertain determined aperture value is preset, the system is in the manualexposure adjustment photographic mode with the light measurement withthe closed diaphragm. As has already been mentioned, the measured lightamount BVs relative to the object brightness obtained from the result ofthe light measurement at this time includes the aperture value of thelens device 2 with the closed diaphragm and the vignetting error,whereby this system does not include any means for taking up the abovementioned aperture value so that the vignetting error is disregarded.Thus the above mentioned measured light amount BVs has the relationBVs=BV-AV for the actual object brightness, which has already beenmentioned. On the other hand at the side of the mechanical part 358 thedata relative to the film sensitivity, the shutter time desired by thephotographer and so on have been set.

The data BVs of the light measured with the closed diaphragm introducedinto the input control part 360 through the A-D converter 382 from theTTL light measuring means 378 provided on the above mentioned mechanicalpart 358 is further introduced into the central control part 362 so asto be processed further as follows.

First of all the data SV relative to the film sensitivity is added tothe measured light data BVs introduce as mentioned above. Namely theoperation BVs+SV(=BV-AV+SV) is carried out. As has already beenexplained, this relation corresponds to BVs+SV=EV-AV=TV, so that throughthis operation the shutter time TV necessary for obtaining the properexposure EV can be obtained.

Further the shutter time TV obtained in this way is the operation datafor satisfying the exposure amount EV for the aperture value AV of thelens device 2 with the closed diaphragm whereby this operation data isnot always equal to the shutter time TV' for control set with the dial34 of the camera body 4. Thus, when the photographer wishes to realizethe proper exposure EV it is necessary to adjust the aperture to makethe operation data TV' equal to the set data TV' by operating theaperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 or alter the data of theset shutter time TV' to make the set data TV' equal to the operationdata TV.

In case of this camera system an allowance +K1, -(K2-K1) is set for theoperation data TV obtained from the operation, whereby the system is sodesigned that the manual operation for bringing the shutter time TV setwith the dial 34 within the above mentioned allowance is displayed tothe photographer to the view finder 13.

Below the operation process will be explained. At first the constant K1is added to the shutter time data TV obtained from the operation result.In case the data TV+K1 obtained from the result of this additionover-flows the capacity of the operation register, the maximum capacityof this operation register is taken as the operation result.

Then the shutter time data TV' set with the dial 34 is subtracted fromthe data TV+K1 obtained in this way, whereby, when a carrier takes placeas the result of the subtraction, the set shutter time data TV' isbeyond the allowance. This camera system is so designed as to give tothe photographer the instruction for reducing the closing amount of thelens device 2 or reducing the set data of the shutter time data TV' insuch a case. In case on the other hand no carrier takes place as theresult of this subtraction, the constant K2 is further subtracted fromthe above mentioned subtraction result TV+K1-TV' as follows.

    TV+K1-TV'-K2{=TV-(K2-K1)-TV'} . . .                        (16)

When a carrier takes place as the result of this subtraction, the setshutter time data TV' is within the allowance +K, -(K2-K1) for theoperated shutter time TV, whereby the fact is informed of to thephotographer, while when no carrier takes place, the set shutter timeTV' is beyond the allowance, whereby this camera system is so designedas to give to the photographer an instruction for increasing the closingamount of the diaphragm of the lens device 2 or for increasing the setdata of the shutter time data TV'.

By means of the above mentioned operation process it can be judgedwhether the closing amount of the diaphragm of the photographic lensdevice 2 is proper for the set shutter time TV' or not or whether theset shutter time TV' is proper for the closing amount of the diaphragmof the photographic lens device 2 or not.

Hereby it is possible for the photographer to confirm the result of theabove mentioned judgement in the view finder 13, whereby the display atthis time is as is shown in FIG. 10(a)-(V). The mode of this display hasalready been explained, whereby it is possible for the photographer tocontrol the most suitable combination of the shutter time TV and theclosing amount of the diaphragm of the lens device 2 for obtaining theproper exposure in accordance with such a display.

Hereby in the camera device in this mode, the shutter is controlled atthe side of the camera body 4 in accordance with the shutter time TV'set with the dial 34 by the photographer, while the diaphragm of thelens device 2 is kept in the closed state at the position manually setby the photographer.

The display and the manual operation in case of the manual exposureadjustment photographic mode with the light measurement with the closeddiaphragm has already been explained, so that the detailed explanationwill be omitted here.

All of the above mentioned modes such as the aperture value priority AEphotographic mode, the shutter time priority AE photographic mode, themanual exposure adjusting photographic mode with the light measurementwith the totally opened diaphragm, the aperture value priority AEphotographic mode with the light measurement with the closed diaphragmand the manual exposure adjusting photographic mode with the lightmeasurement with the closed diaphragm operate in accordance with thelight amount measured with the TTL light measuring means 378 provided inthe mechanical part 358, whereby, as has already been explained, it ispossible to apply the external light measuring adapter to this camerasystem.

Now let us consider the case when an external light measuring adaptersuch as the reflection light system light measuring meter 350, theincident light system light measuring meter 354 and so on is mounted onthe accessary shoe of the camera body 4. The camera device at this timecan assume three kinds of the photographic modes (with the exception ofthe bulb photographic mode).

These three photographic modes are the aperture value priority AEphotographic mode, the shutter time priority AE photographic mode andthe manual exposure adjusting photographic mode with the external lightmeasurement, each one of which can be selected in accordance with thestate of the mode selector provided on the upper surface of the camerabody 4, the aperture setting ring of the lens device 2 and the diaphragmclosing lever 64.

Below each of the above mentioned mode will be explained, whereby nosubstantial difference exists from the case when the TTL light measuringmeans 378 is applied. What especially good case should be taken of isthe fact that the measured light amount obtained when the external lightmeasuring adapter is applied is absolutely different from that obtainedwith the TTL light measuring means 378 in its character, whereby otherspecial operation process becomes necessary.

Namely, no matter which of the reflection light system or of theincident light system is applied, the light amount measured with theexternal light measuring meter 350, 354 is given as the datacorresponding to the object brightness BV. Thus, the measured lightamount does not include any factor relative to the smallest aperturevalue AVo of the photographic lens device 2 to be used, the vignettingerror AVc and so on, so that no process for processing the objectbrightness BV.

When in case this external light measuring adapter is applied, the modeselector 38 is set at the side of the priority on the shutter value, thediaphragm closing lever 64 at the side of the opening and the aperturesetting ring 8 of the lens device 2 at the position at which the mark 12is selected, the system is in the aperture value priority AEphotographic mode with the external light measurement. The then obtainedlight amount directly corresponds to the object brightness BV so thatthe addition of the smallest aperture value AVo or the vignetting errorAVc is not necessary. With the exception of this point, the operationprocess after then is absolutely identical to that in case of the aforementioned aperture value priority AE photographic mode. Further thedisplay of the operation result is absolutely identical with that incase of the aperture value priority AE photographic mode as is shown inFIG. 10(a)-(II).

Further, in case the mark 12 is not selected by the aperture settingring 8 at the side of the lens device 2, it is impossible to preset thediaphragm closing step number AVs of the lens device 2 from the side ofthe body 4, whereby at the time of the actual exposure control thediaphragm is controlled with the value set with the aperture settingring 8 at the side of the lens device 2. This means that it is necessaryto manually set also at the side of the lens device 2 the same aperturevalue as is set with the dial 34 of the lens device 2. In this case thelight is measured through the external light measuring adapter so thatthe same operation can be applied no matter whether the diaphragm of thelens device 2 is totally opened or closed. Thus no matter whether thediaphragm of the lens device 2 is totally opened or closed, when themark 12 is not selected with the aperture setting ring 8 at the side ofthe lens device 2 this camera system is in the manual exposure adjustingphotographic mode with the external light measurement, whereby it ispossible to control the exposure with the operated shutter time and thepreset aperture value or the set aperture value of the closed diaphragmby presetting the aperture value by means of the aperture setting ring 8at the side of the lens device 2 in accordance with the aperture valuedisplayed in the view finder, namely the aperture value set with thedial 34 at the side of the camera body 4. Further in case of this manualexposure adjusting photographic mode with the external lightmeasurement, in the view finder 13 the aperture value set with the dial34, the operated shutter time and the character "M" for showing thenecessity for manually setting the lens device 2 are displayed as isshown in FIG. 10(a)-(III) quite in the same way as in case of the manualexposure adjusting photographic mode with the light measurement with thetotally opened diaphragm.

Further, when, in case this external light measuring adapter is applied,the mode selector 38 is set at the side of the priority on the shuttertime, the diaphragm closing lever 64 at the side of the opening and theaperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 at the position at whichthe mark 12 is selected, the system is in the shutter time priority AEphotographic mode with the external light measurement.

The then obtained measured light amount directly corresponds to theobject brightness BV so that the addition of the smallest aperture valueAVo or the vignetting error AVc is not necessary. With the exception ofthis point, the operation after then is quite identical with that incase of the afore mentioned shutter time priority AE photographic mode.Further also the display of the operation result is quite identical withthat in case of the shutter time priority AE photographic mode as isshown in FIG. 10(a)-(I).

Further, when the mark 12 is not selected with the aperture setting ring8 at the side of the lens device 2, it is impossible to preset thediaphragm closing step number AVs of the lens device 2 from the side ofthe camera body 4, whereby at the time of the actual exposure controlthe diaphragm is controlled with the value set with the aperture settingring 8 at the side of the lens device 2. This means that it is necessaryto manually set at the side of the lens device 2 the aperture valueoperated in accordance with the shutter time set with the dial 34, themeasured light amount and so on. In this case the light measurement iscarried out through the external light measuring adapter so that thesame operation can be applied no matter whether the diaphragm of thelens device 2 is totally opened or closed. Thus, when the mark 12 is notselected with the aperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device2, this camera system is in the manual exposure adjusting photographicmode with the external light measurement no matter whether the diaphragmof the lens device 2 is totally opened or closed, whereby it is possibleto control the exposure with the set shutter time and the operatedaperture value by presetting the aperture value with the aperturesetting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2 in accordance with theaperture value displayed in the view finder 13, namely the aperturevalue obtained from the operation result. Further in case of this manualexposure adjusting photographic mode with the external lightmeasurement, in the view finder 13 the shutter time set with the dial34, the operated aperture value and the character "M" for showing thenecessity for manually setting the lens device 2 are displayed quite inthe same way as in case of the manual exposure adjusting photographicmode with the light measurement with the totally opened diaphragm as isshown in FIG. 10(a)-(III).

Further, the character of this manual exposure adjusting photographicmode with the external light measurement is decided into two, namely theone with priority on the aperture value and the other with the priorityon the shutter time depending upon whether the mode selector 38 is setat the side of the priority on the aperture value or at the side of thepriority on the shutter time, whereby there is no substantial differencebetween them. However, when the mode selector 38 is set at the side ofthe priority on the aperture value, this camera device is in theaperture value priority AE photographic mode so far as the aperturevalue preset at the side of the lens device 2 is always kept equal tothat set with the dial 34.

In case the external light measuring adapter is used, the operationroutine is, as mentioned afore, same as in case of the photography withthe TTL light measuring means with the exception of one part.

FIG. 29 shows the relation between the above mentioned photographicmodes with the TTL light measurement and the external light measurementand the corresponding operation routine. The table shows thephotographic modes of this camera system due to the state of theaperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, of the diaphragm closinglever 64 and to the light measuring system and four operation routines.Further, when the mark 12 is selected with the aperture setting ring 8of the lens device 2 while the diaphragm closing lever 64 assumes theposition at which the diaphragm of the lens device 2 is closed, thealarm lock for the misoperation is carried out as has already beenexplained.

On the other hand this camera system has an efficiency to operate inclose cooperation with the automatic light adjusting speed light deviceas has already been explained. Below let us consider the case when thisspeed light device 384 is applied to the photographic purpose. When theabove mentioned speed light device 384 becomes ready for operation,namely has been charged after the speed light device 384 is mounted onthe accessary shoe 50 of the camera body in such a manner that anelectrical connection is established between the speed light device 384and the camera body 4, this camera device is changed over into the speedlight photographic mode.

At this time, 16 photographic modes can be assumed depending upon thesetting of the condition of the camera device and of the speed lightdevice as has already been explained, whereby the operation carried outin the camera device in this speed light photographic mode is dividedinto four routines.

One of these four operation routines is selected accordingly dependingupon the state of the aperture setting dial 108 of the speed lightdevice 384 and of the change over switch 146 whereby especially forvarious factors set at the side of the camera device the correspondingmode is decided and carried out by the corresponding control system.FIG. 11(A) also shows the operation mode which this system assumes inaccordance with the set state of the speed light device and the cameradevice, whereby the above mentioned operation routines correspond toeach of the full automatic, the automatic light adjustment, theautomatic mode and the semi-automatic mode, the automatic lightadjustment, the automatic mode and the full automatic, the total lightamount, the manual mode and the semi-automatic mode, the total lightamount, the manual mode, whereby other modes are also summarized intothe operation in accordance with the operation result by means of theabove mentioned four operation routines.

In case of the full automatic, automatic light adjustment, automaticmode, the speed light device 384 is brought into the state capable ofautomatic light adjusting operation in accordance with the filmsensitivity set by means of the film sensitivity setting dial 106 andthe aperture value set by means of the aperture setting dial 108, whilethe data VSA of the analog signal corresponding to the aperture valueset by means of the above mentioned aperture setting dial 108 as well asthe charge completion signal CSA are given. This charge completionsignal CSA includes the control signal relative to the full automaticmode or the semi-automatic mode depending upon the current amount,whereby the full automatic mode takes place when this charge completionsignal CSA includes the full automatic mode control signal or the modeselector 38 at the side of the camera device is set at the side of thepriority on aperture value.

The aperture value data taken up into the camera device is convertedinto a digital value by means of the A-D converter 382 and introducedinto the central control part 362, whereby the data VSA relative to thisaperture value is biased by the constant CST2 from the aperture value tobe used for the actual control. The reason is that a corresponding biasis given because the data VSA relative to the aperture value is taken upin an analog value while this analog value includes a number of steps sothat there is a danger for misinputting in the range of the smallvoltage, whereby the digitally converted data DD is also larger than theaperture value data actually used by the amount corresponding to thebias. Thus, at first the following operation

    VSA-CST2=AV                                                (17)

is carried out in such a manner that the control data AV relative to theaperture value introduced from the side of the speed light device isderived. The aperture value AV obtained in this way is to correspond tothat set by means of the aperture setting dial 108 at the side of thespeed light device, whereby at times this operation result lies beyondthe range of the aperture value controlable at the side of the lensdevice 2 and hereby the fact has to be informed of to the photographer.In consequence this camera system is so designed as to investigatewhether the aperture value AV set at the side of the speed light device384 is smaller than the largest aperture value AMAX but larger than thesmallest aperture value AVo. In case this investigation operation showsthat the above mentioned aperture value AV is beyond the largestaperture value AMAX or the smallest aperture value AVo, this limit valueAMAX or AVo is taken for the aperture value for the control instead ofthe aperture value set at the side of the speed light device 384,whereby it goes without saying that the fact is informed of to thephotographer.

Then the smallest aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2is deducted from the aperture value data AV for the control in order toobtain the diaphragm closing step number AVs for the aperture control asfollows.

    AV-AVo=AVs

Further the above mentioned operation is quite same for the fullautomatic mode, the automatic light adjusting mode or the manual mode.However in case of this mode the data for the diaphragm closing stepnumber AVs for the aperture control is not used for the aperturecontrol.

Further it is possible for the photographer to confirm the abovementioned operation result in the view finder 13, whereby the display atthis time is as is shown in FIG. 10(c)-(I) and (II) in such a mannerthat the speed light synchronization shutter speed TSYN, for example1/60 sec, the "EF" display for showing the speed light photographic modein which the speed light device 384 has been charged and the aperturevalue AV used for the control are displayed. Hereby in case of themanual mode, it is necessary for the photographer to manually set at theside of the lens device 2 the aperture value AV displayed in the viewfinder 13, whereby the character "M" is also displayed as is shown inFIG. 10(c)-(II).

The operation of the camera device as well as of the speed light device384 at the time of the full automatic, automatic light adjusting,automatic mode as well as of the full automatic, automatic lightadjusting and manual mode have already been explained.

Then in case of the semi-automatic, automatic light adjusting, automaticmode, the speed light device 384 is ready for operation in the automaticlight adjusting mode with the aperture value set by means of theaperture setting dial 108 and the film sensitivity set by means of thefilm sensitivity setting dial 106, while the data VSA of the analogsignal corresponding to the aperture value set by means of the abovementioned aperture setting dial 108 and the charge completion signal aregiven to the camera device. This charge completion signal CSA includesthe control signal relative to the full automatic mode or thesemi-automatic mode depending upon the current amount, whereby, as hasalready been explained, the semi-automatic mode takes place when thecharge completion signal CSA includes the control signal for thesemi-automatic mode while the mode selector 38 at the side of the cameradevice is set at the side of the priority on shutter speed.

In this case at first the speed light synchronization shutter time TSYNof the camera body 4 and the shutter time TV set with the dial 34 of thecamera body are operated so as to be compared with each other in such amanner that the slower shutter time is taken up for the shutter time TVfor the control.

Then a constant CST2 corresponding to a constant is subtracted from theaperture value data VSA introduced from the speed light device 384 tothe camera device and digitally converted so as to obtain the controldata AV relative to the aperture value put in from the side of the speedlight device. Hereby the aperture value obtained in this way is tocorrespond to that set by means of the aperture setting dial 108 at theside of the speed light device 384, whereby at times this operationresult lies beyond the range controlable in the lens device 2. In such acase the fact has to be informed of to the photographer so as to preventthe misoperation. In consequence this camera system is designed so as toinvestigate whether the aperture value set at the side of the speedlight device 384 is smaller than the largest aperture value AMAXcontrolable in the lens device 2 but larger than the smallest aperturevalue. In case such investigation result shows that the above aperturevalue AV lies beyond the largest aperture value AMAX or the smallestaperture value AVo, this limit value AMAX or AVo is taken up for theaperture value AV for the control instead of the aperture value set atthe side of the speed light device 384, whereby it is natural that thefact should be informed of to the photographer at the same time. Thenthe smallest aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 is subtracted fromthe aperture value data AV for the control so as to obtain the diaphragmclosing step number AVs for the aperture control.

Hereby the above mentioned operation is carried out quite in the sameway also for the semi-automatic, automatic light adjusting, manual mode.However in this mode the data for the diaphragm closing step number isnot used for the aperture control.

It is possible for the photographer to confirm the above mentionedoperation result in the view finder 13, whereby the display at this timeis as is shown in FIG. 10(c)-(V) and (VI). After the afore mentionedinvestigation operation, the selected shutter time TV for the control,"EF" for showing the speed light photographic mode when the speed lightdevice 384 has been charged and the aperture value AV for the controlare displayed. Further in case of the manual mode it is necessary forthe photographer to manually set at the side of the lens device 2 theaperture value displayed in the view finder 13, whereby the character"M" is displayed as is shown in FIG. 10(c)-(VI).

Further the operation of the camera device as well as of the speed lightdevice 384 in case of the semi-automatic, automatic light adjusting,automatic mode as well as of the semi-automatic, automatic lightadjusting, manual mode have already been explained.

Then in case of the full automatic, total light amount, manual mode thespeed light device 384 is in the total light amount mode without settingany aperture value with the aperture setting dial 108, while the dataVSA of the analog signal for showing that no aperture value is set withthe above mentioned aperture setting dial 108 and the charge completionsignal CSA are given to the camera device. This charge completion signalCSA includes the control signal relative to the full automatic mode orthe semi-automatic mode depending upon the current amount, whereby thefull automatic mode takes place, as mentioned afore, when this chargecompletion signal CSA includes the control signal of the full automaticmode or the mode selector 38 at the side of the camera device is set atthe side of the priority on aperture value.

Hereby as the data VSA taken up into the camera device such as analogamount as overflows the A-D converter at the time of the A-D conversionin order to show that no aperture value is set at the side of the speedlight device. Thus in case of the speed light photographic mode thesignal for the total light amount mode is introduced into the cameradevice when the A-D converter 382 is overflowed, whereby no presetcontrol of the aperture of the lens device 2 is carried out from theside of the camera body 4. Thus, in such a case the lens device 2 has tobe manually set by means of the aperture setting ring 8.

Such a control routine is carried out quite in the same way also for thefull automatic total light amount, largest aperture value mode. Howeverin this mode the mark 12 is selected by means of the aperture settingring 8 at the side of the lens device 2, the lens device 2 assumes thestate equivalent to that in which the lens device 2 is preset at theposition of the largest aperture value in such a manner that after allthe diaphragm is controlled with the largest aperture value.

Hereby it is possible for the photographer to confirm in the view finger13 the state of the mode set by means of the above mentioned judgingoperation, whereby the display at this time is as is shown in FIG.10(d)-(I) and -(II). In the view finder the speed light synchronizationshutter time, for example 1/60 sec, "EF" for showing the speed lightphotographic mode when the speed light device 384 has been charged andthe character "M" for showing the necessity for the photographer tomanually preset the aperture value of the lens device 2 are displayed asis shown in FIG. 10(d)-(II), whereby in case of the largest aperturevalue mode the lens device 2 is in the unset state so that noinformation relative to the aperture value is displayed at all as isshown in FIG. 10(d)-(I) also so as to inform the photographer of thefact.

Further the operation of the camera device as well as of the speed lightdevice 384 in case of the full automatic, total light amount, manualmode as well as of the full automatic, total light amount, largestaperture value mode have already been explained so that the repeatedexplanation is omitted here.

Then in case of the semi-automatic, total light amount, manual mode, thespeed light device 384 is in the total light amount mode by setting themanual mode display without setting any aperture value with the aperturesetting dial 108 while the data VSA of the analog signal at the levelshowing that no aperture value is set with the above mentioned aperturesetting dial 108 and the charge completion signal CSA are given to thecamera device. This charge completion signal CSA includes the controlsignal relative to the full automatic mode or the semi-automatic modedepending upon the current amount, whereby the semi-automatic mode takesplace, as has already been explained, when this charge completion signalCSA includes the control signal for the semi-automatic mode while themode selector 38 at the side of the camera device is set at the side ofthe priority on shutter time.

In such a case at first the speed light synchronization shutter timeTSYN of the camera body 4 and the shutter time set with the dial 34 ofthe camera body 4 are operated so as to be compared with each other.After this comparison the slower shutter time is taken up for theshutter time for the control.

Then as the data VSA introduced into the camera device from the speedlight device 384, such an analog amount as overflows the A-D converterafter the A-D conversion is set so as to show that no aperture value isset at the side of the speed light device. In consequence, when the A-Dconverter 382 is overflowed in case of the speed light photographicmode, the signal for showing the total light amount mode is introducedinto the camera device, whereby no preset control of the aperture of thelens device 2 is carried out from the side of the camera body 4. Inconsequence, in such a case the aperture has to be manually preset bymeans of the aperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2.

Further such a control routine is carried out quite in the same way alsofor the semi-automatic, total light quantity, largest aperture valuemode. However in this mode the mark 12 is not selected by means of theaperture setting ring 8 at the side of the lens device 2, so that thelens device 2 assumes the same state equivalent to that in which thelens device 2 is preset at the largest aperture value in such a mannerthat after all the aperture is controlled with the largest value.

Hereby it is possible for the photographer to confirm in the view finderthe state of the mode set by means of the above mentioned judgingoperation as is shown in FIG. 10(d)-(V),(VI), whereby after thecomparison operation the shutter time TV selected for the control and"EF" for showing the speed light photographic mode when the speed lightdevice 384 has been charged are displayed. In case of the manual modethe character "M" is displayed for showing the necessity for thephotographer to manually preset the aperture value of the lens device asis shown in FIG. 10(d)-(II), whereby in case of the largest aperturemode the aperture of the lens device 2 is in the unset state so that noinformation as to the aperture is displayed at all as is shown in FIG.10(d)-(I) also so as to inform the photographer of the fact.

Hereby the operation of the camera device as well as of the speed lightdevice 384 in case of this semi-automatic, total light amount, manualmode as well as of the semi-automatic, total light amount, largestaperture mode have already been explained so that the repeatedexplanation is omitted here.

Further, when the bulb is selected at the side of the camera body 4 incase of the speed light photographic mode, it is possible to carry outthe bulb photography disregarding the control as to the full automaticor the semi-automatic mode, namely the automatic shutter time decidingcontrol.

Thus in case of the speed light photographic mode with the bulb nospecial operation for this purpose is carried out, but the sameoperation control as in case of the above mentioned speed lightphotographic mode is carried out only in order to control the apertureof the photographic mode.

In consequence in case of this camera system, the operation for theexposure control in accordance with the light measurement includes fourroutine and the operation for the exposure control in accordance withthe speed light photography includes four routines, namely altogetherlight operation control routines are included, whereby each photographicmode is realized by anomaly applying these eight operation controlroutines.

This camera system including the above mentioned operation routinestakes up the set input data, the set condition and the operation stateso as to operate and control various mechanism in accordance with thesynthetic judgement so that it would be necessary to efficiently arrangethe control system applied to such system in accordance with therational conception.

Namely it is possible to realized the control system capable of settingthe control signal as well as the control sequence effective for themechanical operation of the camera mechanism by automatically assortingand taking up the datas introduced from the outside in order to meet thedesire of the photographer for various photographic mode principally inaccordance with the above mentioned eight operation routines, detectingthe missetting or the misoperation connected with the various mechanicalrestrictions of the camera mechanism so as to inform the photographer ofthe fact and to display various informations necessary for variousphotography.

FIG. 30 shows a block diagram of the control circuit constituted uponthe above mentioned stand point, whereby the input control part 360, thecentral control part 362 and the output control part 364 shown in FIG.28 are shown more in concrete way.

This system is in principle controlled by means of the clock pulses CP,for which purpose the clock pulse generator 542 is provided in thecentral control part 362. The clock pulses are distributed to the wholesystem, whereby this clock pulse generator 542 is concretely realizedthrough the construction as is shown in FIG. 31. The period of theseclock pulses CP is considerably important for counting the actual timeto be explained later, whereby it is necessary to adjust the generatorsufficiently by means of the variable resistance 542A shown in FIG. 31.

The clock pulses CP are introduced into the system pulse generator 544for producing the system pulses in accordance with the above mentionedclock pulses CP, as is shown in FIG. 32. The system pulses consist ofthe counter pulses CT1-CT4 and the timing pulses TB0-TB7 and so on,whereby various operations of this camera system are controlled by meansof the above mentioned system pulses. Hereby in case of this system thetime between the timing pulses TB0-TB7 makes one word.

Further the composition of this system pulse generator 544 is shown inFIG. 33 concretely, whereby a binary up counter in which the integratedcircuit element of CD 4029 (manufactured by RCA) is applied is used inorder to generate the counter pulses CT1, CT2 and CT4, while the decoderin which the integrated circuit element of CD 4028 (manufactured by RCA)is applied is used in order to generate the timing pulses TB0-TB7.

The logic diagram of the above mentioned integrated circuit element CD4029 is shown in FIG. 34 in detail, whereby the element is an up/downcounter in the function. However in this embodiment the element is usedas a binary up counter operating in synchronization with the clockpulses CP. In case of such a composition, by applying the abovementioned clock pulses CP to the clock pulse terminal CLK, the counterpulses CT1-CT4 as shown in FIG. 32 can be obtained respectively from theoutput terminals Q1-Q3.

Further the logic diagram of the above mentioned integrated circuitelement CD 4028 is shown in detail in FIG. 35, whereby the element is abinary decoder in the function. In this system, by applying the abovementioned counter pulses CT1, CT2 and CT4 to the terminals A-C of thiselement, the timing pulses TB0-TB7 can be obtained from the outputterminal Q0-Q7 as is shown in FIG. 32.

The thus obtained timing pulses TB1-TB6 are given to the driver circuit546, which in turn produces the timing pulses TB1-TB6. The timing pulsesTB1-TB6 are given to the digital display means 402 through the timingpulses 394 as the pulses for the figure number for dynamically drivingthe display means 402 and at the same time to the film sensitivity inputmechanism 518, the smallest aperture value·MNAL·SPDW setting mechanism522, the AV·TV·ASLC setting mechanism 528 and the largest aperture valuesetting mechanism 536 through the timing line 394 as the timing pulsesfor taking up datas.

Hereby the above mentioned film sensitivity input mechanism 518 isconstituted as is shown in FIG. 12, whereby the film sensitivity SV' canbe taken out from the last figure in synchronization with the timingpulse TB1-TB6. The details of this operation is as has already beenexplained. As to the data SV relative to the film sensitivity, the dataset with the precision of 1/3 step is taken up, being approximated withthe precision of 1/8 step. Namely at first the input mechanism 518 ofthe film sensitivity takes up the data SV' relative to the filmsensitivity, whereby "1" takes place respectively in the bit with theweight of 1/4 step for the weight of 1/3 step and in the bit with theweight of 1/2 step for the weight of 2/3 step as has already beenexplained. However this does not make the data approximated with theprecision of 1/3 step, it is necessary to take up the data SV' relativeto the film sensitivity which has been taken up when "1" takes place inthe bit with the weight of 1/2 step or 1/4 step as the dataapproximately with the precision of 1/8 step when "1" takes place in thebit with the weight of 1/8 step without condition as has already beenexplained. This is nothing but the execution of the approximation by therelation (6) and (7).

The set circuit 520 serves to convert the data SV' relative to the filmsensitivity SV into the film sensitivity data SV with the precision of1/8 step, placing "1" in the bit with the weight of 1/8 step. In casethis set circuit 520 detects "1" in the bit with the weight of 1/4 ofthe data SV' as to the film sensitivity introduced from the lower figurein sequence in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1-TB6, namely inthe bit of the data introduced in synchronization with the timing pulseTB1 or in the bit with the weight of 1/2, namely in the bit of the dataintroduced in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2, "1" isestablished in synchronization with the timing pulse TB0 for the nextword time so as to obtain the film sensitivity data SV with theprecision of 1/8 step in synchronization with TB0-TB6.

Hereby such set circuit 520 is shown in detail in FIG. 36, whereby, asis clear from the drawing, the fact that "1" is put in either of the bitwith the weight of 1/4 step synchronized with TB1 or in the bit with theweight of 1/2 step synchronized with TB2 out of the film sensitivitydata SV' introduced from the lower figure in sequence in synchronizationwith the timing pulse TB1-TB6 is detected through the AND gate AND1 bymeans of the timing pulse TB1 or TB2 put in through the OR gate OR1 insuch a manner that the fact that "1" is put in the bit with the weightof 1/2 step or 1/4 step of the input data SV' is detected and memorized,by applying the output of the above mentioned AND gate AND1 to the Jinput terminal of the Flip-Flop F1. At this time the Q output of theabove mentioned Flip-Flip 1 is "1", which is read out through the ANDgate AND2 in synchronization with the first timing pulse of the nextword time. This output of the AND gate AND2 is delivered insynchronization with the timing pulse TB0 as the bit of the filmsensitivity data SV with the weight of 1/8 step through the OR gate OR2so that after all the film sensitivity SV is taken out as a data withthe precision of 1/8 step in synchronization with the timing pulsesTB0-TB6.

In the following explanation the output ○1 of the above mentioned ORgate OR2 is called the film sensitivity setting data DTSV.

Further the above mentioned smallest aperture value; MNAL·SPDW settingmechanism 522 is constituted as is shown in FIG. 14, whereby the MNALsignal can be taken out in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1,the SPDW signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2 and thedata AVo (Grey code) relative to the smallest aperture value of the lensdevice 2 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3-TB6 from thehigher figures in sequence. The details are as has already beenexplained.

The smallest aperture value data AVo (Grey code) is delivered from thehigher figure in sequence in synchronization with the timing pulsesTB3-TB6 from the smallest aperture value·MNAL·SPDW mechanism 522 as hasalready been explained, whereby the information delivered from the abovementioned setting mechanism 522 includes the MNAL signal and the SPDWsignal so that it is necessary to sort out the smallest aperture valuedata AVo (Grey code) only. To this purpose the signal sorting circuit524. This signal sorting circuit 524 serves to sort out the smallestaperture value data AVo delivered in synchronization with the timingpulses TB3-TB6 in accordance with the timing pulses in such a mannerthat the data (Grey code) sorted by means of this signal sorting circuit524 is converted into the smallest aperture value AVo through the nextGrey code·binary code·converter 526. The necessity to set the smallestaperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be used in the Greycode has already been explained, whereby this Grey code·binarycode·converter 526 is constituted on the same principle as is shown inFIG. 16, in such a manner that the smallest aperture value data AVo(Grey code) delivered from the higher figures in sequence insynchronization with the timing pulses TB3-TB6 is converted into abinary code so as to produce the data AVo with the precision of 1/2 stepin synchronization with the timing pulses TB2-TB5.

Further the above mentioned signal sorting circuit 524 and the Greycode·binary code·converter 526 are shown in detail in FIG. 37, whereby,as is clear from the drawing, the smallest aperture value data AVo (Greycode) delivered from the higher figures in sequence in synchronizationwith the timing pulses TB3-TB6 is separated from the MNAL signal or theSPDW signal and so on by means of the AND gate AND3 supplied with theoutput of the NOR gate NOR1 supplied with the timing pulses TB1, TB2 aredirectly delivered to the J-terminal and through the inverter INV1 tothe K-terminal of the four bit parallel input parallel output shiftregister CD4035 (manufactured by RCA).

The logic circuit composition of this integrated circuit element CD4035is shown in detail in FIG. 38, while the transmision gate shown in FIG.38 is shown in detail in FIG. 39.

This CD4035 is so designed as to act as a series shift register when "0"is applied to the P/S terminal and as a parallel shift register when "1"is applied to the P/S terminal, whereby this P/S terminal is suppliedwith the Q output of the Flip-Flop 2 whose J input terminal is suppliedwith the timing pulse TB2 and where K input terminal is supplied withthe timing pulse TB6. Namely this Flip-Flop 2 is set in synchronizationwith the rising up of the clock pulse CP next to the timing pulse,namely the rising up of TB3, and reset in synchronization with therising up of the clock pulse CP next to the rising up of TB6, namely thefalling down of TB6 in such a manner that "0" is delivered to the P/Sterminal of CD4035 during the internal TB3-TB6 during which the smallestaperture value data AVo (Grey code) is delivered so as to make CD4035act as a series shift register.

In case now the series Grey codes inverted to each other are deliveredto the J and the K terminal of the above mentioned integrated circuitelement CD4035 from the higher figures in sequences while the elementCD4035 acts as a series shift register, which is equivalent to the casewhen the same series data is delivered to the J and the K terminal, theseries Grey codes are converted into a series binary code and stored.This operation is carried out while the timing pulses TB3-TB6 areproduced and the smallest aperture value data AVo (Grey code) isdelivered.

After the above mentioned operations the timing pulse TB7 starts to playpart, when the Flip-Flop 2 is reset so as to produce the Q output of "1"so that the CD4035 whose P/S terminal is supplied with the Q output actsas a parallel shift register, whereby this CD4035 delivers Q3 output toD2 input terminal, Q2 output to D1 input terminal and Q1 output to D0input terminal so that the CD4035 acts as reversed series register sofar as "1" is applied to the P/S terminal, namely during the intervalTB7-TB2. At this time the smallest aperture value data AVo converted ina binary way from the higher figures in sequence and stored in thisregister is derived from the Q0 terminal from the lower figures insequences in synchronization with the timing pulses TB7-TB2. This dataAVo is taken out through the AND gate AND4 supplied with the Q output ofthe Flip-Flop F2 in the reset state during the interval of timing pulsesTB714 TB2, whereby this data is different from other in the relationbetween the weight of bits and the timing pulses. Thus the data is takenout from the Q output terminal of the Flip-Flop F5 as the data insynchronization with the timing pulses TB2-TB6, being delayed by theinterval corresponding to three bits through the Flip-Flops F3-F5. Inthis way the smallest aperture value AVo is taken out as the data withthe precision of 1/2 step in synchronization with the timing pulsesTB2-TB6.

In the following explanation the Q output ○2 of the above mentionedFlip-Flop F5 is called the smallest aperture value data DTAO.

The smallest aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2obtained as mentioned above has a close connection with the vignettingerror AVc at the time of the light measurement with the totally openeddiaphragm so that this vignetting error AVc has to be taken intoconsideration at the time of operating for the exposure control by meansof the light measurement with the totally opened diaphragm. Thisvignetting error AVc can be obtained in accordance with the smallestaperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 to be used,whereby, however, in case of the system of the present embodiment, thedatas for the vignetting error AVc have been prepared in advance foreach of the thinkable smallest aperture value in such a manner that thevignetting error data AVc is selected in accordance with the inputsmallest aperture value AVo. Such vignetting error datas AVc are storedin the fixed data ROM 528 so as to be selected out in accordance withthe input smallest aperture value AVo and delivered from the lowerfigures in sequence as the data with the precision of 1/8 step insynchronization with the timing pulses TB0-TB5.

How to take out the above mentioned vignetting error is shown in detailin FIG. 37, whereby the data from each terminal Q0-Q3 of the registerCD4035 is decoded by means of the decoder CD4028 in such a manner thateither of the output Q2-Q9 of this decoder is mode "1". The output ofthe above mentioned decoder is delivered to the ROM in which a pluralnumber of the vignetting errors AVc have been stored so as to deliverthe form bit vignetting error data AVc written in the addresscorresponding to the above mentioned decoder output. The output of thisROM is delivered to each input terminal D1, D2, D3 and D4 of the timingbuffer CD4042. This timing buffer CD4042 is an integrated circuitelement manufacured by RCA, whereby it block diagram is shown in FIG.40. This timing buffer, to whose Pol terminal Vcc is applied, takes upthe output of the above mentioned ROM with the timing TB7 and deliversit with other timing than TB7, whereby the above mentioned registerCD4035 terminates the binary conversion of the smallest aperture valueAVo with the rising up of TB7, when the terminals Q0, Q1, Q2 and Q3 ofthe register CD4035 begin to deliver in a parallel way the smallestaperture value AVo converted in a binary way, so that the output of theabove mentioned ROM becomes the vignetting error AVc corresponding tothe input smallest aperture value AVo with the timing TB7 and inconsequence the necessary vignetting error AVc is obtained by taking upthe then output with the timing TB7.

As mentioned above, the vignetting error data AVc stored in the timingbuffer CD4042 is delivered respectively from the terminal Q0, Q1, Q2 andQ3 to the terminals X0, X1, X2 and X3 of the integrated circuit elementMC14539 (manufactured by MOTOROLLER) for the conversion of series data.The block diagram of this integrated circuit element MC14539 is shown inFIG. 41, the true value table in FIG. 42 and a concrete logic diagram inFIG. 43, whereby the vignetting error data Avc introduced in parallelthrough the terminals X0, X1, X2 and X3 is delivered out of the Zterminal as a series data in synchronization with the timing pulsesTB0-TB3 in accordance with the counter pulses CT1, CT1 and CT4respectively applied to the terminals A, B and ST. In this way thevignetting error AVc is delivered from the Z terminal of the integratedcircuit element MC145239 as a data with the precision of 1/8 step insynchronization with the timing pulses TB0-TB3.

In the following explanation the Z terminal output ○3 of the abovementioned integrated circuit element MC14539 is called the vignettingerror data DTAC.

Further the above mentioned TV·AV·ASLC setting mechanism 528 isconstituted as is shown in FIG. 18 so as to deliver the ASLC signal insynchronization with the timing pulse TB1 and the shutter time TV or theaperture value AV set by means of the dial 34 in synchronization withthe timing pulses TB2-TB6. The details is as has already been explained.

The data such as the shutter time TV, the aperture value and so on setby means of the dial 34 is taken up through the AV·TV·ASLC settingmechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2-TB6 as hasalready been explained, whereby whether the data delivered from thesetting mechanism corresponds to the shutter time TV or the aperturevalue AV can not be distinguished. Nevertheless whether the data istaken up as the shutter time or as the aperture value can bedistinguished by means of the aperture setting signal ASLC taken up insynchronization with the timing pulse TB1. Hereby the above mentioneddata is taken up from the above mentioned AV·TV·ASLC setting mechanism528 together with the above mentioned aperture setting signal ASLC,whereby the signal sorting circuit 532 serves to sort the abovementioned datas taken up in synchronization with the timing pulsesTB2-TB6 out of the output signals from the above mentioned settingmechanism 528. The data sorted out by means of the above mentionedsignal sorting circuit 532 can be used directly as the aperture valuedata AV, while the data has to be duplicated in order to be used as theshutter time data as has already been explained. The reason is that thesmallest setting unit of the aperture value AB by means of the dial 34is 1/2 step while the smallest setting unit of the shutter time by meansof the common dial 34 is 1 step so that the shutter time TV is devidedinto two in such a manner that the smallest unit of the shutter timedata TV corresponds to that of the aperture value AV and duplicated whenlater the data is used as the shutter time. The duplication circuit 530is used to realize the above mentioned purpose, whereby the data isdelivered as the shutter time data through the above mentionedduplication circuit 530. Further this duplication circuit 530 serves todeliver the datas taken up in synchronization of the timing pulsesTB2-TB6 as the datas in synchronization of the timing pulses TB3-TB7, bydelaying the datas by an interval for one timing pulse.

As explained above the set shutter time data TV is taken up as the datawith the precision of 1 step in synchronization of the timing pulsesTB3-TB7 while the set aperture value data AV is taken up as the datawith the precision of 1/2 step in synchronization of the timing pulsesTB2-TB6.

The circuit composition of the above mentioned signal sorting circuit532 and of the above mentioned duplication circuit 530 is shown in FIG.44, whereby from the output of the TV·AV·ASLC setting mechanism 528 onlythe signal relative to TV·AV· in synchronization of the timing pulsesTB2-TB6 is sorted out by means of the AND gate AND4 supplied with thetiming pulse TB1 through the inverter INV 2. The data thus sorted outcan directly be used as the information relative to the aperture valuebut has to be taken out as the data with the precision of 1 step insynchronization with the timing pulses TB3-TB7, being delayed by theclock time by means of the D shaped Flip-Flop F6, in order to be used asthe data relative to the shutter time.

In the following explanation the output ○4 of the above AND gate 4 iscalled the aperture setting data DTAV, while the Q output 5 of the abovementioned Flip-Flop F6 is called the shutter time setting data DTTV.

Further the afore mentioned largest aperture value setting mechanism 536is constituted, as is shown in FIG. 19, so as to deliver the data AMAX'relative to the largest aperture value AMAX of the photographic lensdevice 2 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1-TB6 as hasalready been explained.

This largest aperture value setting mechanism 536 does not produce thelargest aperture value itself but selects the desired largest aperturevalue data AMAX out of a number of the fixed datas stored in the fixeddata ROM 534. Namely as to the data AMAX' delivered from the largestaperture value setting mechanism 536 in synchronization of the timingpulses TB1-TB6, as is shown in FIG. 20, F11, F16, F22, F32, F46 and F64of the actual largest aperture value AMAX corresponds to the timingpulses TB1-TB6 respectively, and in consequence, the datas is introducedin series and stored in the series input-parallel output register 538from the above mentioned largest aperture value setting mechanism 536,whereby when the bit which produces "1" is found out of the bits of theregister 538, which of F11, F16, F22, F32, F45 and F64 the largestaperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 is can easily bedetermined. In consequence the parallel output of the above mentionedregister 538 is led to the fixed data ROM 534, to which the signal forthe largest aperture value AMAX is applied from the instruction ROM 504to be explained later, when the largest aperture value AMAX pointed outby the above mentioned register 538 is delivered.

Further the concrete composition for taking the largest aperture valueAMAX out of the fixed data ROM 534 will be explained later in detail.

On the other hand the MNAL signal and the SPDW signal delivered from theabove mentioned smallest aperture value MNAL·SPDW setting mechanism 522in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1 and TB2 is introduced intothe condition signal memory circuit 548 and separated from each other inaccordance with the timing pulses so as to be stored. As the result theMNAL signal respectively the MNAL signal or the SPDW signal respectivelythe SPDW signal can be obtained from the above mentioned conditionsignal memory circuit 548.

The above mentioned condition signal memory circuit 548 is constitutedas is shown in detail in FIG. 45, whereby the MNAL signal out of theMNAL signal and the SPDW signal delivered from the MNAL·SPDW settingmechanism 522 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1, TB2 isdetected and stored by means of the Flip-Flop F10 supplied with thetiming pulse TB2, while the SPDW signal is detected and stored by meansof the Flip-Flop F11 supplied with the timing pulse TB3.

As the result the MNAL signal is delivered from the Q output terminal ofthe above mentioned Flip-Flop F10 and the MNAL signal from the Q outputterminal, while the SPDW signal is delivered from the Q output terminalof the above mentioned Flip-Flop F11 and the SPDW signal from the Qoutput terminal.

Further the ASLC signal delivered from the above mentioned TV·AV·ASLCsetting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1 isintroduced into the above mentioned condition signal memory circuit 548and sorted in accordance with the timing pulses so as to be memorized.As the result the ASLC signal respectively the ASLC signal can beobtained from the above mentioned condition signal memory circuit 548.

The detail for the above is also shown in FIG. 15, whereby the ASLCsignal delivered from the TV·AV·ASLC setting mechanism 528 insynchronization with the timing pulse TB1 is detected by means of theFlip-Flop F9 supplied with the timing pulse TB2 so as to be stored, sothat the ASLC signal is delivered from the Q output terminal of theabove mentioned Flip-Flop F9 while the ASLC signal is delivered from theQ output terminal.

On the other hand the above mentioned condition signal memory circuit548 has taken up the datas sorted out by means of the above mentionedsignal sorting circuit 532 in synchronization with the timing pulsesTB2-TB6 so as to judge when the bulb mode is selected by the dial 34.Namely the bulb mode in this system takes place when all the bit of thedata set by the dial 34 produce "0" so that the bulb mode is judged bydetecting the case only "0" signals are delivered during the timeinterval of the timing pulses TB2-TB6. Namely the above mentionedcondition signal memory circuit 548 serves to detect and memorize thecase no "1" output is delivered from the output terminals of the abovementioned signal sorting circuit 532 during the time interval of thetiming pulses TB2-TB6. This memory signal is delivered from the abovementioned condition signal memory circuit 548 as the BLB signal for theshutter time being in the bulb mode or the inversed signal BLB.

The details for the above is also shown in FIG. 45, whereby the datasdelivered from the TV·AV·ASLC setting mechanism 528 in synchronizationwith the timing pulses TB1-TB6, from which data the ASLC signal insynchronization with the timing pulses TB1 has been excluded by means ofthe AND gate AND5 supplied with the timing pulse TB1 through theinverter INV 3, is led to the J-input terminal of the J-K Flip-Flop F7.This J-K Flip-Flop F7 is supplied with the clock pulse CP as clockinput, while the K-input terminal is supplied with the timing pulse TB1.Further the above mentioned Flip-Flop F8 is supplied with the clockpulse TB0 as clock input.

The Flip-Flop F7 is once brought into the reset state in the abovementioned composition in synchronization with the rising up of the nextclock pulses CP at the time point at which the timing pulse TB1 isapplied to the K input terminal of the Flip-Flop F7. In case at thistime even one "1" output is delivered from the AND gate AND5 during thetime interval of the timing pulses TB1-TB6, this Flip-Flop F7 is broughtinto the set state, whereby its Q output becomes "1". Because this "1"output is led to the K-terminal of the Flip-Flop F8, the Flip-Flop F8remains in the reset state even if the Flip-Flop F8 is supplied with TB0as the clock input in such a manner that its Q output is kept "0". Incase on the other hand no "1" output is delivered from the AND gate AND5during the time interval of the timing pulses TB1-TB6, this Flip-Flop F7remains in the reset state, whereby it Q output also remains "1".Because this "1" output is led to the K-input terminal of the Flip-FlopF8, the Flip-Flop F8 is brought into the set state when the Flip-Flop F8is supplied with TB0 as clock input, whereby its Q output is kept "1".This state is nullified with the next timing pulse TB0 when even one "1"output is delivered from the AND gate AND5 during the time interval ofthe timing pulses TB2-TB6. As explained above the BLB signal isdelivered from the Q output terminal of the above mentioned Flip-FlopF8, while the BLB signal is delivered from the Q output terminal.

By means of the above mentioned composition the MNAL signal, the MNALsignal, the BLB signal, the BLB signal, the SPDW signal, the SPDWsignal, the ASLC signal and the ASLC signal are delivered from the abovementioned condition signal memory circuit 548 in accordance with thestate of various condition set in the mechanical part 358.

On the other hand the mechanical part 358 delivers various datas, thecondition setting signal, the state judging signal and so on to theinput control part 360.

The analog output from the TTL light measuring means 378 or the analogsignal from the terminal 56 is selectively led to the A-D converterthrough the signal switching over circuit 380 controlled by the currentdetecter 386, whereby this A-D converter consists of a standard levelproducing means 550, the A-D converter control circuit 552, theintegrater 554, the integrater control means 555, the comparater 556,the counter 558, the Flip-Flops 560, 562 and the buffer register 564.

This A-D converter is the well known one generally called a dual lampA-D converter, which integrates the input analog data along the positivedirection for a certain determined time interval so as to obtain anintegral level proportional to the input analog data and then integratesthe data for the above mentioned integral level in the negativedirection in accordance with a certain predetermined level signal so asto obtain the digitally converted value of the above mentioned inputanalog data, by counting the standard pulse signals during the time inwhich the integration of the analog data put in at first in the negativedirection terminates.

In case of the A-D converter constituted as mentioned above, the abovementioned integrater 554 serves to integrate the input analog data inthe positive direction and the standard level signal in the negativesdirection, the above mentioned standard level producing means 550 servesto produce the above mentioned standard level and to clear theintegration value remaining in the above mentioned integrater controlmeans 555, the above mentioned A-D converter control circuit 552 servesto change over the signal introduced into the above mentioned integrater554, namely an analog data and the standard level signal and to changeover the lamps of the above mentioned integrater 554 in the positivedirection and in the negative direction, the above mentioned comparater556 serves to compare the output of the above mentioned integrater 554with the standard level (the earth level in the present embodiment) soas to detect the termination of the integration in the negativedirection, the above mentioned counter 558 serves to count a certaindetermined time for integrating the input analog data in the positivedirection for the determined time and to count the time for integratingthe standard level signal in the reversed direction, the above mentionedbuffer register 564 serves to take up and store the content of the abovementioned counter 558 at the time point at which the integration of thestandard level signal by means of the above mentioned integrater 554 inthe reversed direction is terminated, the above mentioned Flip-Flop 560serves to produce the signal for changing over the signal given to theabove mentioned integrater 554 through the above mentioned A-D convertercontrol circuit 552 and the signal for changing over the direction ofthe integration by the above mentioned integrater 554, namely forchanging over the lamp and the above mentioned Flip-Flop 562 serves toproduce the detection instruction signal for detecting the overflow ofthe counter as the result of the A-D conversion.

Hereby the comparater 556 is so designed as to produce "1" when there isan input integration value and "0" when the input integration value isbelow a certain determined level.

At the time of starting the A-D conversion in the above mentionedcomposition, at first the A-D converter control circuit 552 takes up ananalog data through the a input terminal and delivers it to theintegrater 554. Because at this time the Flip-Flop 560 still remains inthe reset state, the above mentioned integrater 554 is so set as tointegrate the data in the positive direction so that the above mentionedinput analog data is integrated by the above mentioned integrater 554 inthe positive direction, at the same time the counter 558 starts thecounting in synchronization with the clock pulse CP. As has already beenexplained the above mentioned counter 558 serves to control time and totake up the A-D conversion data, whereby the frequency of the inputclock pulse CP is divided accordingly so as to produce the standard timeto be counted.

When the above mentioned counter 558 is over-flowed after the abovementioned counting operation, namely a certain determined time haselapsed after starting the counting, all of the content of the counter558 becomes "0", while at the same time the Flip-Flop 560 is set. Namelythe fact the the Flip-Flop 560 is set means that a certain determinedtime has elapsed since the counter started the counting, which meansthat the integrater 554 has integrated the input analog data for acertain determined time. It goes without saying that the then output ofthe integrater 554 is proportional to the input analog data.

The output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop 560 is delivered to the A-Dconverter control circuit 552 in such a manner that the input to theintegrater 554 is exchanged for the standard voltage signal from thestandard level producing means 550 to be connected to the b terminal ofthe above mentioned A-D conversion control circuit 552, while at thesame time the above mentioned integrater 554 is so set as to integratethe data in the negative direction in such a manner that the abovementioned standard voltage signal is integrated in the reverseddirection by means of the above mentioned integrater 554. Thus inaccordance with the standard voltage from the b input terminal the datastored in the above mentioned integrater 554 as the result of the dataintegration is integrated in the reversed direction. On the other handthe counter 558 who was over-flowed and all of whose contents havebecome "0" continues counting. It goes without saying that the amountcounted by the counter 558 is proportional to the amount integrated bythe above mentioned integrater 554 in the reversed direction. When asthe result of the integration in the reversed direction the output ofthis integration 554 has reached a certain determined value, namely whenthe reversed integration corresponding to the integrated amount of theanalog data for a certain determined time has completed, the output ofthe comparater 556 changes from "1" to "0" in such a manner that at thistime in accordance with the variation of the output of the comparater556 the buffer register 564 immediately takes up and memorize the amountcounted by the above mentioned counter 558. The amount counted by thecounter 558 and stored in the buffer register 564 at this timecorresponds to the amount integrated by means of the above mentionedintegrater 554 in the reversed direction, namely the analog data havingbeen integrated by means of the above mentioned integrater 554 in thepositive direction for a certain determined time. In case of the systemof the present embodiment after the above mentioned operation, theamount counted by the counter 558 and stored in the above mentionedbuffer register 564 is used as the digital conversion data correspondingto the input analog data.

Further even after the above mentioned operation the above mentionedcounter 558 further continues counting until the counter 558 isover-flowed again, when all of the content of the counter 558 becomes"0" and at the same time the Flip-Flop 560 is reset while the Flip-Flop562 is set. With the reset of the above mentioned Flip-Flops 560, theabove mentioned A-D converter control circuit 552 once clears the abovementioned integrater 554 through the above mentioned integrater controlmeans 555, then takes up the analog delivered to the a input terminaland deliver it to the integrater 554 in such a manner that the abovementioned analog data is integrated from the beginning. Becausehereafter this A-D converter repeats the same operation as mentionedabove, the system of the present embodiment always takes up a new analogdata as the A-D conversion repeatedly so that the content of the bufferregister 564 is always renovated into the digital data corresponding tothe input analog data.

Hereby it is necessary to always detect the operation state of this A-Ddetector, for which purpose the logic circuit 566 is provided. Thislogic circuit 566 is supplied with the output signal of the abovementioned comparater 556, and of the Flip-Flops 560 and 562 so as todeliver the INT signal for showing that the input analog data is beingintegrated by means of the integrater 554, the ADC signal for showingthat the A-D conversion has completed and the reading out of the A-Dconversion data is possible or the ADOF signal for showing that as theresult of the A-D conversion the input analog data is so large that thecounter 558 is over-flowed.

The analog data introduced into the input control part 360 from themechanical part 358 as mentioned above is stored in the buffer register564 as digital conversion data DD, whereby this data DD is transferredto the central control part 362 through the signal switching overcircuit 568 in accordance with the instruction from the above mentionedlogic circuit 566 as the digital data in synchronization with the timingpulses TB₀ -TB₇ from the lower figures in sequence, being carried on theinput BAS line 370.

On the other hand, the INT signal delivered from the above mentionedlogic circuit 566 is carried on the BAS line 366 as the signal insynchronization of the timing pulse TB₇, while the ADCE signal iscarried on the BAS line 366 as the signal in synchronization of thetiming pulse TB₆. Further, this details will be explained later indetail.

The terminal 54 of the mechanical part 358 is supplied with the chargecompletion signal CSA, the external light measuring adapter mode signalOLM and so on, whereby these signals are, as has explained afore,classified into the CGUP signal by means of the current detector 386 asto whether the speed light device has been charged or not, the FATsignal for showing the full automatic shutter time control at the timeof the speed light photography and the OLM signal for the application ofthe external light measuring adapter. These signals are furtherconverted into two signals, namely CU and AO by means of the encoder570. As to the CU signal and the AO signal as is explained in FIG. 47,when the CU signal is "0", the exposure control in the system is carriedout in accordance with the light measuring data, whereby when the AOsignal is "0", the system is in the TTL light measurement photographicmode, while the AO signal is "1", the system is in the external lightmeasurement photographic mode. Further, when the CU signal is "1", thesystem is in the speed light photographic mode, whereby when the AOsignal is "0", the shutter time is controlled semi automatically whilewhen the AO signal is "1", the shutter time is controlled fullyautomatically. The CU signal and the AO signal are respectively given tothe terminals a and b of the multi-plexer 572.

The above mentioned multi-plexer 572 includes the input terminals a-f,being so designed as to convert the input signals coming through theabove mentioned input terminals into the series signals insynchronization with the timing pulses TB₁ -TB₆. The terminals c, d, ande of this multi-plexer 572 are respectively supplied with the AE locksignal AELK, the AE charge signal AECG and the wind up completion signalWNUP and the terminal f is supplied with the A-D conversion over flowsignal ADOF from the above mentioned logic circuit 566. As the resultthis multi-plexer 572 delivers the ADOF signal, the AELK signal, theAECG signal, the WNUP signal, the AO signal and the CU signal insynchronization with the timing pulses TB₁ -TB₆, whereby these seriessignals are further transferred from the above mentioned signal changeover circuit 568 to the central control part 362 in synchronization withthe timing pulses TB₁ -TB₆, being carried on the input BAS line insequence.

Hereby this signal change over circuit 568 is controlled by means of theinstruction of the above mentioned logic circuit 566 in such a mannerthat at the time point at which the transfer of the A-D conversion databecomes possible after the A-D conversion of the input analog data hasbeen completed, the output of the buffer register 564 is given to theinput BAS line 370, while in other state than mentioned above, theseries output signal of the multi-plexer 572 is given to the input BASline 370.

The block diagram of the above mentioned input control part 360 is shownin detail in FIG. 48. In the drawing, 557 is the frequency dividingcounter for producing the standard clock for counting by dividing theclock pulse into 32 parts. This standard clock is applied to the clockterminal of the counter 558 through the inverter INV4, so that thiscounter 558 counts the above mentioned standard clock by dividing thefrequency so as to deliver the counting data in eight bits from theterminals Q0-Q7. Hereby the highest bit Q7 of the output data of theabove mentioned counter 558 is given to the clock terminal of theFlip-Flop 560 through the inverter INV5. Hereby the Q output of thisFlip-Flop 560 is the D input of itself so as to constitute 1 bit as theextension of the highest bit of the above mentioned counter 558 insubstance. Further the output of the above mentioned inverter INV5 isintroduced to the NAND gate NAND1 whose one side input terminal isreceived the Q output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop 560 in such amanner that the output of this NAND gate NAND1 is given to the clockterminal of the Flip-Flop 562. In the same way as in case of the abovementioned Flip-Flop the Q output of this Flip-Flop 562 is the D input ofitself so as to constitute the 1 bit as extension of the Flip-Flop 560of the above mentioned counter 558 in substance.

Namely as is clear from the above mentioned explanation the frequencydividing counter 577, the counter 558, the Flip-Flops 560 and 562constitute as a whole a 15 bit frequency dividing counter. In thepresent embodiment, two integrated circuit element MC14520 (manufacturedby MOTOROLLER) are used in order to realize such a 15 bit frequencydividing counter. This integrated circuit element MC14520 is a dual upcounter including two 4 bit counter as is shown with a block diagramshown in FIG. 49, one of which is constituted with the logic diagram inFIG. 50. This by combining the above mentioned integrated circuitelement MC14520 as is shown in FIG. 15, it is possible to realize theabove mentioned 15 bit counter. This is realized by connecting four 4bit counters in series, whereby in case of the counter composed in thisway, the bits from the first to the fifth bit are used as the frequencydividing counter 557, the bits from the sixth to the thirteenth bit areused as the 8 bit counter, namely the counter 558 and the fourteenth andthe fifteenth bit are used as the Flip-Flop 560 and 562. The countercomposed as mentioned above is immediately reset upon the signal inputat the direct reset terminal.

In FIG. 48, the buffer register 564 is constituted with the parallel inparallel out type register so as to store the datas applied to the inputterminals D₀ -D7 in synchlonization with the input at the clock terminalc and deliver them from the output terminals Q₀ -Q7. The D₀ -D₇terminals of the buffer register 564 are respectively supplied with theoutputs from the terminals Q₀ -Q7 of the above mentioned counter 558 insuch a manner that the outputs from the terminals Q₀ -Q7 arerespectively given to the input terminals X₀ -X₇ of the signal sortingcircuit 568. Further the clock terminal c of this buffer register 564 issupplied with the output of the comparator 556 through the inverter INV8and in consequence, this buffer register 564 takes up the counting dataof the above mentioned counter 558 when the output of the abovementioned comparator 556 is changed from "1" to "0", namely theintegration in the negative direction by means of the integrator 554 hasbeen completed.

Further the above mentioned buffer register 564 can concretely andeasily realized by arranging two 4 bit parallel in parallel out typeshift register, namely two integrated circuit element CD4035(manufactured by RCA) shown in FIG. 48 parallely as is shown in FIG. 52.

The signal change over circuit 568 and the multi-plexer 572 are both themulti-plexer with the same composition in principle, being realizablewith the integrated circuit elements MC14512 (manufactured byMOTOROLLER). This integrated circuit element MC14512 has the compositionas is shown with the logic diagram in FIG. 53 and the characteristics asis shown in the fourth value table in FIG. 54. This integrated circuitelement MC14512 is supplied with 8 bit series data through the terminalsX₀ -X₇, whereby when the counter pulses as is shown in FIG. 32 are givento the terminals A, B and C while "0" signal is being applied to the DISterminal, the input data is transferred to the change over circuit 568through the Z terminal in sequence in synchronization with the timingpulses TB₀ -TB₇, whereby the output signals of the buffer registers Q₀-Q₇ are applied respectively to the terminals X₀ -X₇ while the counterpulses CT₁, CT₂ and CT₃ are applied respectively to the terminals A, Band C. Further the X₁ terminal of the multi-plexer 572 is supplied withthe ADOF signal for showing that the counter 558 is over-flowed as theresult of the A-D conversion, the X2 terminal with the AELK signal, theX3 terminal with the AECG signal, the X4 terminal with the WNUP signal,the X5 terminal with the A0 signal, and the X6 terminal with the CUsignal, while the terminals A, B and C are supplied respectively withthe counter pulses CT₁, CT2 and CT4. Further the output terminal Z ofthe change over circuit 568 and the output terminal Z of themulti-plexer 572 are connected to each other in a wired OR way so as tobe connected to the input BAS line 370. In such a composition the DISterminal of the above mentioned signal change over circuit 568 issupplied with the same signal as the change over control signal appliedto the DIS terminal of the above mentioned multi-plexer 572 through theINV9 so that either the data introduced through X0-X7 of the abovementioned signal change over circuit or various signals introducedthrough X0-X7 of the above mentioned multi-plexer 572 are delivered tothe above mentioned input BAS line in synchronization of the timingpulses TB0-TB7 in accordance with the state of the above mentionedchange over control signal.

Further the output of the above Flip-Flop 560 is applied to the Dterminal of the Flip-Flop F14 in synchronization with the clock pulse CPthrough the inverter INV7 while the output of the above mentionedFlip-Flop F14 is applied to the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F15 insynchronization with the timing pulse TB₀. Further Q output of thisFlip-Flop F15 is applied to the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F16 insynchronization with the timing pulses TB₀, while the Q output of thisFlip-Flop F16 is applied to the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F17 insynchronization with the timing pulse TB₀. The operation of theFlip-Flops F14-F17 in the above mentioned composition will be explainedin accordance with the timing chart shown in FIG. 55. When now theoutput of the Flip-Flop 560 changes from "1" to "0", namely the outputof the inverter INV7 changes from "0" to "1", the above mentionedFlip-Flop F14 is set in synchronization with the next clock pulse CP insuch a manner that "1" signal is applied to the D terminal of theFlip-Flop F15. Thus the Flip-Flop F15 is set in synchronization with therising up of the next timing pulse TB₀ so as to produce "1" as Q output.This Q output of the Flip-Flop F15 is applied to the D terminal of theFlip-Flop F15 so that the Flip-Flop F16 is set in synchronization withthe rising up of the next timing pulse TB₀ so as to produce "1" as Qoutput. By taking up the condition of the Q output of the Flip-Flop F15and the Q output of the Flip-Flop F16, the 1 word time immediately afterthe output of the above mentioned comparator 556 changes from "0" to "1"can be obtained. The 1 word time obtained in this way makes the base forobtaining the ADCE signal for the A-D conversion completion. The "1"output from the Q output terminal of the above mentioned Flip-Flop F16is further delivered to the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F17 so that theFlip-Flop F17 is set in synchronization with the rising up of the nexttiming pulse TB₀ so as to produce "1" as the Q output. Namely, by takingup the AND condition of the Q output of the Flip-Flop F16 and the Qoutput of the Flip-Flop F17, the next 1 word time since the output ofthe above mentioned comparator 556 has changed from "0" into "1" can beobtained. The 1 word time obtained in this way is used for transferringthe A-D conversion date during the 1 word time immediately after the 1word during the output of the ADCE signal for showing the A-D conversioncompletion is produced.

Further the Q output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop F15 and the Qoutput of the Flip-Flop F16 are delivered to the AND gate AND9 suppliedwith the timing pulse TB6, whereby, as the result, a signal is producedfrom the above mentioned AND gate AND9 in synchronization with TB6during the 1 word time immediately after the Q output of the Flip-Flop560 has changed from "1" into "0", which signal is carried on the BASline 366 through the OR gate OR4 as the A-D conversion completion signalADCE. Namely the change of the Q output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop560 from "1" into "0" means the change of the lamp of the integrator 554integrating in the negative direction, namely the complete completion ofthe A-D conversion. This will be explained in detail later.

Further the Q output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop F16 and the Qoutput of the Flip-Flop F17 are given to the AND gate AND10, whereby, asa result, as is shown in FIG. 55, a signal which is at high level duringthe next 1 word time after the above mentioned ADCE signal has beenproduced in delivered from the AND gate AND10. This output signal of theAND gate AND10 is given to the DIS terminal of the signal change overcircuit 568 as the data transfer control signal through the inverterINV9 and at the same time directly to the DIS terminal of themulti-plexer 572. As the result, during the next 1 word time after theabove mentioned ADCE signal has been produced, the data in the bufferregister 564, namely the digital data obtained through the A-Dconversion is delivered into the input BAS line from the lower figuresin sequence from the Z terminal of the signal change over circuit 568 insynchronization with the timing pulses TB₀ -TB7. At this time, "1"signal is applied to the DIS terminal of the multi-plexer 572 from theAND gate AND10 so as to control the output of the Z terminal. Namely inthe ordinary state signals such as the AELK signal, the AECG signal, theWNUP signal, the AO signal, the CU signal and so on are delivered intothe input BAS line 370 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB₁-TB6 from the Z terminal of the multi-plexer 572, while when the ADCEsignal has been produced after the A-D conversion completion the A-Dconversion digital data DD stored in the buffer register 564 isdelivered through the signal change over circuit 568 only during thenext word time.

On the other hand, the Q output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop 560 isdelivered to the AND gate AND8 supplied with the timing pulse TB7through the inverter INV10. Namely, while the Q output of the abovementioned Flip-Flop 560 is "0", a signal in synchronization with thetiming pulse TB7 is delivered from the above mentioned AND gate AND8.This output signal from the AND gate AND8 is carried on the BAS line 360through the OR gate OR4 as the INT signal for showing that theintegrator 554 is integrating the input analog data in the positivedirection. Namely, the fact that the Q output of the above mentionedFlip-Flop 560 is "0" means that the above mentioned integrater 554 isintegrating the input analog data in the positive direction. This willbe explained in detail later.

On the other hand, the output of the above comparater 556 is applied tothe D terminal of the Flip-Flop F13 in synchronization of the clockpulse CP. Further the Q output of this Flip-Flop F13 is applied to the Dterminal of the Flip-Flop F12 in synchronization with the clock pulseCP. The Q output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop F13 and the Q outputof the above mentioned Flip-Flop F12 are given to the AND gate AND7,while the output of this AND gate AND7 is given to the direct resetterminal R of the frequency dividing counter 557, the counter 558 andthe Flip-Flops 560 and 562 through the OR gate OR3. The reason for theabove composition is that in case the lamp has been changed over afterthe integration by means of the integrater 554 in the negative directionthere is a certain time lag (absolutely to the characteristics of theintegrater) until a positive output is obtained from the comparater 556once reset after the integration in the positive direction is startedwhile the counter 558 starts to operate at the same time with thedelivery of the positive output from the comparater 556, in such amanner that when the comparater 556 starts to deliver the positiveoutput, the frequency dividing counter 557, the counter 558, theFlip-Flops 560 and 562 are directly reset during the next 1 word time sothat the time for starting the counting by the counter 558 and the timefor starting the output by the comparater 556 are matched accordingly.

Further the Q output of the Flip-Flop 562 is applied to the clockterminal of the Flip-Flop F18 whose D input terminal is supplied withthe output signal of the comparater 556, in such a manner that in casethe counter 558 is over-flowed although the output of the comparater 556has not inverted from "1" into "0" namely the A-D conversion has notcompleted, while the integrater 554 is integrating in the negativedirection, the Flip-Flop 562 is set whereby "1" output is delivered fromthe Q terminal of the Flip-Flop F18 whose clock pulse is the output fromthe Q terminal of the Flip-Flop 562. The Q output signal of thisFlip-Flop F18 is, after A-D conversion, applied to the X₁ terminal ofthe multi-plexer as the ADOF signal for showing that the counter 558 isover-flowed.

The operations of the input control part 360 constituted as mentionedabove will be explained more in detail in accordance with the operationcharacteristics shown in FIGS. 56 and 57. Hereby FIG. 56 shows the casethe A-D conversion is carried out in order, while FIG. 57 the over-flowtakes place as the result of the A-D conversion.

At first, when the power source switch is closed, the clear signal PUCis delivered from the power up clear circuit not shown in the drawing,so as to clear and reset the frequency dividing counter 557, the counter558, the Flip-Flops 560 and 562, F14, F15 and F17. In this state the Qoutput of the Flip-Flop 560 is "0" and in consequence the A-D conversioncontrol circuit 552 brings the lamp of the integrater 554 in thepositive direction and at the same time delivers the input analog datato the integrater 554. At this time, the output of the comparater 556becomes "1" and almost at the same time the counter 558 starts thecounting up of the output pulse of the frequency dividing counter 557.While this integration is being carried out, the "0" output of theFlip-Flop 560 is given to the AND gate AND8 through the inverter INV10and in consequence this AND gate AND8 delivers the INT signal forshowing that the integrater 554 is integrating the input analog data tothe BAS line 366 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB7 throughthe OR gate OR4.

Hereby when the counter 558 is over-flowed during the above mentionedoperation, the output of the Flip-Flop 560 becaomes "1", while at thesame time all the bits of the content of the frequency dividing counter557 and of the counter becomes "0" so that the counting is started from"0" again. By means of the "1" output from the Q terminal of thisFlip-Flop 560, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 brings the lamp ofthe integrater 554 in the negative direction and at the same timedelivers the standard level signal from the standard level producingmeans 550 to the integrater 554. At the time point at which thisintegration in the negative direction is started, the value integratedby means of the above mentioned integrater 554 is in proportion to theabove mentioned input analog data. While this integration in thenegative direction is being carried out, the Flip-Flop 560 continues toproduce "1" output so as to control the output of the AND gate AND8 sothat it is natural that no INT signal is produced. When the outputsignal of the above mentioned integrater 554 has gone down to a certaindetermined level as the result of the integration by means of theintegrater 554 in the negative direction, namely when the integrationhas been completed, the output of the comparator 556 changes from "1" to"0". As the result at this time point the buffer register 564 whoseclock terminal C is supplied with the output signal of the abovementioned comparater 556 through the inverter INV8 takes up and storesthe counting data counted by the counter 558 and delivered from theterminals Q₀ -Q₇. The counting data taken up by the buffer register 564in this way is the digital value corresponding to the input analog dataas has already been explained.

Even after the above mentioned operation the counter 558 continues thecounting operation, whereby when the counter 558 is over-flowed theFlip-Flop 560 is reset so that the Q output becomes "0" while at thesame time the Flip-Flop 562 is set so that the Q output becomes "1". TheQ output of the Flip-Flop 562 is given to the clock terminal of theFlip-Flop F18 whereby the output of the comparater applied to the Dterminal of this Flip-Flop F18 has become already "0" so that theFlip-Flop F18 is not set.

On the other hand, the Q output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop 560gives "1" input to the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F14 through theinverter INV7 so that, as is clear from the timing pulses shown in FIG.55, during the 1 word time after the first timing pulse TB₀ after the Qoutput of the Flip-Flop 560 has become "0" the ADCE signal insynchronization with the timing pulse TB6 is given to the BAS line 366from the AND gate AND9 through the OR gate OR4. Namely in case of thissystem the A-D conversion is considered to be completed at the timepoint at which the counter 558 which continues counting during as wellas the integration by means of the integrater 554 in the negativedirection is over-flowed, so that the A-D conversion completion isdetected at the time point at which the Q output of the Flip-Flop 560changes from "1" to "0" as has already been explained. Further duringthe next 1 word time after the above mentioned ADCE signal has beendelivered "1" output is delivered from the AND gate AND10 during the 1word time to the DIS terminal of the multi-plexer 572 so as to controlthe signal output from the Z terminal of the multi-plexer 572 and at thesame time to the DIS terminal of the signal change over circuit 568 asthe "0" signal through the inverter INV9 in such a manner that, duringthe 1 word time during which this "1" signal is produced, the A-Dconversion data DD stored in the buffer register 564 is delivered intothe input BAS line 370 from the lower figures in sequence through the Zterminal in synchronization with the timing pulses TB₀ -TB7.

On the other hand, the Q output of the Flip-Flop 560 which has beenreset when the counter 558 was over-flowed is given to the A-Dconversion control circuit 552, which once clears the above mentionedintegrater 554, changes over the lamp into the positive direction and atthe same time delivers the input analog data to the above mentionedintegrater 554. The integrater 554 whose lamp has been changed over fromthe negative direction into the positive direction does not always startthe integration immediately but after a certain delay time due to thecharacteristics of the element so that it takes a certain determinedtime for the comparater 556 to start to deliver "1", the output of theintegrater 554 surpassing a certain level. On the other hand, after thecounter 558 has been over-flowed, the counter 558 immediately starts thecounting operation out of the state in which all the bits are "0" sothat there is a danger that the input analog data could not beintegrated by means of the integrater 554 exactly. In order to providefor the above the direct reset mechanism consisting of the Flip-FlopsF12 and F13 and the AND gate AND7 is provided in such a manner that thecomparater 556 starts to deliver "1" at the time of the integration inthe positive direction, which is detected so as to once clear and resetthe frequency dividing counter 557, the counter 558, the Flip-Flops 560and 562 so that the counting is started again from the state in whichall the bits are "0".

The above mentioned operation is repeated in such a manner that at everyA-D conversion cycle the A-D conversion completion signal ADCE and theA-D converted digital data DD are delivered. Further as has already beenexplained, excepting the word time during which the A-D converteddigital data DD is delivered, the AELK signal, the AECG signal, the WNUPsignal, the AO signal and the CU signal are delivered from the input BASline 370 in a repeated way in synchronization with the timing pulses TB₁-TB₆.

Further in case when the integration is carried out by means of theabove mentioned integrater 554 in the negative direction after theintegrated value corresponding to the input analog data has beenobtained through the integration by means of the integrating 554 in thepositive direction, the counter 558 is over-flowed before the output ofthe above mentioned integrater 554 becomes lower than a certaindetermined level, namely while the output of the comparater 556 remains"1" so that the Flip-Flop 562 is set, the Flip-Flop F18 whose D inputterminal is supplied with the output of the above mentioned comparater556 is set so as to deliver from the Q output terminal the ADOF signalfor showing the over-flow of the A-D conversion result, which signal isgiven to the X₁ terminal of the multi-plexer 572. On the other hand, atthe same time with the over-flow of the counter 558 the Flip-Flop 560 isreset so that the A-D conversion control circuit 552 supplied with the Qoutput of the Flip-Flop 560 clears the integrater 554 in such a mannerthat the output of the comparater 554 goes from "1" down to "0". Inconsequence the buffer register 564 whose clock terminal is suppliedwith the output of the above mentioned comparater 554 through theinverter INV8 takes up the then content of the counter 558, wherebybecause the counter 558 is over-flowed all of the bits are "0", so thatall of the bits of the data taken up by the buffer register 564 are "0".

Hereby even when the result of the A-D conversion over-flows, the ADCEsignal and the INT signal are delivered into the BAS line in accordancewith the output of the above mentioned Flip-Flop 560.

Hereby at the time of the speed light photography the result of the A-Dconversion over-flows when the speed light device 384 delivers an analogsignal for aperture control as the signal for showing the necessity forthe manual setting of the aperture value at the side of the cameradevice in such amount as over-flows the A-D converter 382. Thus at thistime, the data taken up by the buffer register 564 with all of the "0"bits are naturally disregarded in this system.

The analog data and various conditions or the state judging signal takenup by the input control part 360 from the mechanical part 358 asmentioned above are given to the central control part 362 through theinput BAS line 370 while the signal ADCE for showing the A-D conversionor the INT signal are carried on the BAS line 366.

Now let us revert to the central control part 362 again.

In the central control part 362 the BAS line 366 is connected to theinput BAS selecter 578. The above mentioned BAS selecter 578 serves tojudge whether the condition signal or the A-D converter data DD thesignal carried on the input BAS line after having detected the ADCEsignal delivered to the BAS line in synchronization with the timingpulse TB6 is so as to produce an instruction signal of the treatment ofthe input signal from the above mentioned input BAS line 370.

On the other hand, the above mentioned input BAS line 370 is connectedto the condition register 574 of the central control part 362 and to thesignal change over circuit 576. While the above mentioned signal changeover circuit 576 normally serves as the circulation circuit of the Dregister 516 for storing the A-D conversion data.

While the above mentioned condition register 574 is supplied with theinstruction signal for taking up the conditions from the above mentionedinput pulse selecter 378, it takes up and stores the ADOF signal, theAELK signal, the AECG signal, the WNUP signal, the AO signal and the CUsignal carried on the above mentioned input BAS line 370 in accordancewith the timing pulses TB₁ -TB6.

Further the above mentioned signal change over circuit 576 normallymakes the content DR of the D register circulate, whereby when it issupplied with the instruction signal for taking up the data from theabove mentioned input BAS selector 578, it takes up and stores the A-Dconversion data DD carried on the above mentioned input BAS line 370 inaccordance with the timing pulses TB₀ -TB7.

In consequence the above mentioned condition register 574 and the Dregister 516 normally and repeatedly supplied with the new settingcondition or operation state and the A-D conversion data DD through theinput BAS line 370 so as to store them, whereby especially the taking upperiod of the A-D conversion data is same as the A-D conversion periodof the above mentioned A-D converter. Further the above mentioned signalchange over circuit 576 is supplied with the AELK signal from the abovementioned condition register 574, whereby when it is supplied with thisAELK signal, even if it is supplied with the instruction signal fortaking up data from the above mentioned input BAS selecter 578, it nevertakes up the A-D conversion data newly, continuing the circulation ofthe data DR of the D register 516. By means of the above mentionedmechanism the AE lock is carried out in this camera system.

The mechanism how to take up the condition signal and the A-D conversiondata DD from the above mentioned input BAS line 370 into the centralcontrol part 362 will be explained below more in detail.

In case now the A-D conversion completion signal ADCE is carried on theBAS line in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6 after the A-Dconversion has been completed in the input control part 360, the A-Dconversion data DD is delivered to the input BAS line from the lowerfigures in sequence in synchronization with the timing pulses TB₀ -TB7during the next word time after the above mentioned ADCE signal isdelivered, as has already been explained, in such a manner that also atthe side of the central control part 362 the A-D conversion data DD canbe stored in the above mentioned register 516 by taking up the input BASline into the D register 516 in synchronization with the TB₀ -TB7 duringthe next word time after the ADCE signal in synchronization with thetiming pulse TB6 has been inspected. Further various signals are carriedon the input BAS line 370 from the input control part 360 during otherword times than the above, so that the condition register 574 has onlyto take up the signals from the above mentioned input BAS line 370 inaccordance with the timing pulses.

In consequence the above mentioned input BAS selecter 578 has only to beso designed as to take up the signal of the BAS line 366, to detectwhether the ADCE signal is delivered in synchronization with TB6 and todeliver the instruction signal for taking up the A-D conversion datafrom the input BAS line 370 during the next 1 word time.

From the above mentioned view point the above mentioned input BASselecter 578 in the present embodiment is constituted as is shown inFIG. 58. Namely as is clear from the drawing, the BAS line 366 isintroduced to the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F18 in synchronizationwith the timing pulse TB7, whereby the Q output of this Flip-Flop F18 isgiven to the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F19 in synchronization with thetiming pulse TB₀.

In the above mentioned composition, the Flip-Flops F18 and F19 carry outthe operation as is shown in FIG. 59. Namely the Flip-Flop F18 insychronization with the timing pulse TB7 is not set so far as its Dterminal input is not "1" at least in synchronization with TB6, namelyso far as there is no ADCE signal in the BAS line 366. The Q output ofthe Flip-Flop F18 at this time is "0", so that the Flip-Flop F19 whose Dterminal is supplied with this "0" output in synchronization with thetiming pulse TB₀ is in the reset state and its Q output (7) is "1". This(7) signal is given to the above mentioned condition register 574 insuch a manner that the condition register 574 takes up the content ofthe input BAS line.

Such a condition register 574 is constituted as is shown in detail inFIG. 60, whereby, as is clear from the drawing, the register 574consists of the shift register SR₁ and the latch L taking upsynchronization with the rising up of the clock pulse.

The D terminal of the above mentioned shift register SR₁ is connected tothe input BAS line 370 so as to take up the data from the input BAS line370 in synchronization with the clock pulse CP. In case of suchcomposition the signals carried on the input BAS line 370 withrespective clock pulses CP are all taken up by this shift register SR insequence so as to be delivered from the output terminal Q₀ -Q₅ insequence in synchronization with respective clock pulses CP.Consequently in this state the output datas from the output terminals Q₀-Q₅ of the above mentioned shift register SR₁ are all uncertain datas,whereby during the time during which no A-D conversion data DD is notcarried on the above mentioned input BAS line 370, namely during thetime of the timing pulse TB7 excepting the next 1 word time after theADCE signal has been delivered to the BAS line 336 the CU signal, the AOsignal, the WNUP signal, the AECG signal, the AELK signal and ADOFsignal are delivered respectively from the output terminals Q₀ -Q₅ ofthe shift register SR₁. This is clear from the fact that the abovementioned CU signal is carried on the input BAS line 366 insynchronization with the timing pulse TB5, the AO signal insynchronization with the timing pulse TB4, the WNUP signal insynchronization with the timing pulse TB3, the AECG signal insynchronization with the timing pulse TB2, the AELK signal insynchronization with the timing pulse TB₁, and the ADOF signal insynchronization with the timing pulse TB₀. In consequence by supplyingthe latch L, whose terminals D₀ -D₅ are supplied with the outputs fromthe output terminals Q₀ -Q₅ of the above mentioned shift register SR₁ insynchronization of the falling down of the clock pulses, with thesignals falling down only during the time during which the timing pulseTB7 is delivered, the latch L can take up and store the signals such asCU, AO, WNUP, AECG, AELK and ADOF. In the present embodiment, byapplying the timing pulse TB7 to the AND gate AND₁₁ supplied with thesignal (7) from the input BAS selector 578, a signal can be obtained insynchronization with the timing pulse TB7 whose output is controlledonly during the next 1 word time after the ADCE signal has beendelivered, whereby further by applying the obtained signal to the ANDgate AND12 supplied with the clock pulse CP a signal in synchronizationwith the clock pulse CP, namely a signal falling down during the timingpulse TB7 can be obtained so as to be given to the clock terminal of theabove mentioned latch L as the taking up signal.

By means of the above mentioned composition, the signal as to therenovated setting condition or operation condition is given to the abovementioned parallel in parallel out register constituting the latch Lduring each 1 word time excepting the next 1 word time after the ADCEsignal has been delivered to the BAS line 366. Hereby the CU signal isdelivered from the Q₀ terminal of the above mentioned parallel inparallel out register constituting the latch L, the CU signal from Q₀terminal, the AO signal from the Q₁ terminal, the AO signal from the Q₁terminal, the WNUP signal from the Q₂ terminal, the WNUP signal from theQ₂ terminal, the AECG signal from the Q3 terminal, the AECG signal fromthe Q₃ terminal, the AELK signal from the Q4 terminal, the AELK signalfrom the Q₄ terminal, the ADOF signal from the Q5 terminal and the ADOFsignal from the Q5 terminal.

Hereby this condition register 574 can be realized with the circuitcomposition as is shown in FIG. 61. As is clear from the drawing theshift register SR₁ shown in FIG. 60 is the integrated circuit elementCD4015 while the latch consists of two integrated circuit elementsCD4042.

The above mentioned integrated circuit element CD4015 (manufactured byRCA) is a dual 4 bit static shift register whose logic diagram is shownin FIG. 62, whereby the Q31 output is given to the D2 terminal so as toconstitute a 8 bit shift register in substance. In this embodiment 6bits out of the 8 bits are used as a shift register SR₁. Further as isclear from the logic diagram shown in FIG. 40, the above mentionedintegrated circuit element CD4042 is a 4 bit latch so designed as totake up the datas parallely in synchronization with the falling down ofthe clock input and keep the datas during the time during which theclock input is "0". Further it is clear that a 8 bit latch can beconstituted with two latch CD4042 in parallel. In the presentembodiment, 6 bits out of them are used as a latch L.

When on the other hand "1" signal is given to the D terminal of theFlip-Flop F18 shown in FIG. 58 from the BAS line 366 in synchronizationwith TB6, namely when there is the AECE signal, the above mentionedFlip-Flop F18 is set in synchronization with TB7 so as to produce the"1" Q output. In consequence the Flip-Flop F19 supplied with the abovementioned Q output in synchronization with the timing pulse TB₀ is setin synchronization with the rising up of the first timing pulse of thenext word time so as to produce the "1" Q output (6). Hereby theFlip-Flop F18 remains in the set state only until the rising up of thenext timing pulse TB7 so that the D input of the Flip-Flop F19 hasalready become "0" at the time of the rising up of the next timing pulseTB₀ after this Flip-Flop was set. In consequence the Flip-Flop F19remains in the set state only during the 1 word time since the rising upof the TB₀ still the next rising up of the TB₀ so that the Q output (6)is also "1" only during this 1 word time.

This (6) signal is given to the above mentioned signal change overcircuit 576 whereby the signal change over circuit 576 supplied with theabove mentioned (6) signal stops the circulation of the content of theabove mentioned D register 516 so as to introduce the data carried onthe above mentioned input BAS line 370 into the D register 516 onlyduring the 1 word from TB₀ to TB₇. The data introduced during this 1word time is the A-D conversion data DD carried on the input BAS line370 during this 1 word time at the side of the input control part 360.Further the part introduced into the D register 516 in this waycirculates through the above mentioned signal change over circuit 576till the introduction of the next data.

The circuit composition of the above mentioned change over circuit 576and the D register 516 are as is shown in FIG. 63, whereby as the Dregister 516 the integrated circuit element CD4021 (manufactured by RCA)of the 8 bit shift register as is shown in block diagram in FIG. 64 isadopted.

In case of the circuit composition shown in FIG. 63, the Q output (6) ofthe Flip-Flop F19 shown in FIG. 58 and the Q₀ output AELK of the latch Lshown in FIG. 60 are applied to the AND gate AND13 and in consequencewhen the AELK signal is "1" while the instruction signal (6) for takingup the data is "0", the output of this AND gate AND13 is "0". Inconsequence the output of the AND gate AND14 directly supplied with theoutput of the above mentioned AND gate AND13 is controlled while the ANDgate AND15 supplied with the output of the AND gate AND13 through theinverter INV9 is in the conductive state so that the content DR of the Dregister 516 circulates through the Q8 terminal, the above mentioned ANDgate AND15 and the above mentioned OR gate OR5.

On the other hand, even when the Q output of the above mentionedFlip-Flop F19, namely the instruction signal for taking up the data is"1", the AELK signal becomes "0" in the AE lock state and therefore theoutput of the above mentioned AND gate AND13 is "0" so that the Dregister 516 does not take up the A-D conversion data from the input BASline 370, keeping the content DR, namely the A-D conversion data DDtaken up before in circulation through the AND gate AND15 and the ORgate OR5.

When on the other hand, the AELK signal is "1" while further the Qoutput (6) of the above mentioned Flip-Flop F19, namely the instructionsignal for taking up the data becomes "1", the output of this AND gateAND13 becomes "1" in such a manner that the AND gate AND14 supplied withthe output of the above mentioned AND gate AND13 at this time is broughtinto the conductive state, whereby the output of the AND gate AND15supplied with the output of the AND gate AND13 through the inverter INV9is controlled. Thus the A-D conversion data DD carried on the input BASline 370 only during the time during which the Q output (6) of the abovementioned Flip-Flop F19 is "1" is taken up by the above mentioned Dregister 516 through the above mentioned AND gate AND14 from the lowerfigures in sequence in synchronization with the timing pulses TB₀ -TB₇.

By means of the above mentioned composition, the A-D conversion data DDand various conditions or condition signals obtained in the abovementioned input control part 360 are introduced into the central controlpart 362.

In FIG. 30, 500 is an operation circuit so designed as to carry out thedesired operation between the data AR of the A register 510 and the datapointed out by means of the data selector 502 in accordance with theoperation instruction from the instruction ROM504. Hereby the operationinstruction delivered from the above mentioned instruction ROM504 atthis time includes the afore mentioned eight operation control routinesin such a manner that an operation control routine is selectivelybrought into practice in accordance with the respective photographicmode.

The above mentioned operation circuit 500 cooperates with the auxiliaryregisters such as the B register 512 and the C register 514 beside the Aregister 510. Hereby 506 is the gate for making the data BR from theabove mentioned B register 512 circulate or taking up the data AR fromthe above mentioned A register 510, while 508 is the gate for making thedata CR from the above mentioned C register 514 circulate or taking upthe data AR from the A register 510.

The above mentioned data selector 502 is so designed as to selectivelygive one of the datas introduced through the nine terminals a, b, c, d,e, f, g, h and i to the above mentioned operation circuit 500 inaccordance with the above mentioned instruction ROM504.

The film sensitivity data DTSV is introduced through the terminal a ofthe above mentioned data selector 502, the smallest aperture value dataDTAO through the b terminal, the vignetting error data DTAC through thec terminal, the shutter time data DTTV through the d terminal and theaperture value data DTAV through the e terminal, whereby how these datassuch as DTSV, DTAO, DTAC, DTTV and DTAV are obtained is as has alreadybeen explained.

Further, out of some fixed datas stored in the fixed data ROM534 thedata pointed out by means of the instruction ROM504 is taken up throughthe f terminal of the above mentioned data selector 502.

The datas stored in the above mentioned fixed data ROM534 are the CSTOall of whose bits are "0", the CSTC, the CSTD and CSTE for otherspecified data, the CSTF all of whose bits are "1", TMIN for theshortest shutter time obtainable in the camera body 4 without control,the TMAX for the longest shutter time obtainable in the camera body 4without control, the TSYN for the speed light synchronization shuttertime at the time of the speed light photography, the constants CST₁ andCST₂ for the operation and the largest aperture value AMAX of thephotographic lens device 2 and so on, whereby these datas areselectively given to the f terminal of the data selector 502 inaccordance with the instruction from the instruction ROM504.

Further a plural number of the data AMAX relative to the above mentionedlargest aperture value are stored in the above mentioned fixed dataROM534, whereby these aperture values are accordingly selected anddelivered in accordance with the data AMAX' relative to the largestaperture value introduced from the lens device 2 into the camera body 4.

Hereby the fixed datas stored in the above mentioned fixed data ROM534are the constants for various operations, the restriction due to themechanism of the lens device 2 or of the camera body 4, for example theupper and the lower limit of the shutter time and so on, whereby theyare set correspondingly in accordance with the efficiency of the lensdevice 2 or of the camera body 4, the operation system, the system ofthe data setting or restriction and so on.

Further the respective contents DD, BR and CR of the D register 516, theB register 512 and C register 514 are selectively taken up through theterminals g, h and i of the above mentioned data selector 502.

Further through which of the terminals a-i of the above mentioned dataselector 502 the datas are introduced into the operation circuitcompletely depends upon the instruction from the instruction ROM504,whereby all of the datas selected by this data selector 502 areintroduced into the operation circuit 500.

The above mentioned operation circuit 500 serves to carry out theoperation control operation such as the introduction of the dataselected by means of the above mentioned data selector 502 into the Aregister 510, the storing of the result of the desired operation betweenthe data AR of the above mentioned A register with the data selected bymeans of the above mentioned data selector 502 into the A register 510,the setting of the carrier Flip-Flop 540 when the result of the abovementioned operation is "carry" or "borrow" or the exchange of thecontent AR of the above mentioned A register 510 for the content BR ofthe B register 512 or for the content CR of the C register 514.

Below the instruction ROM504 for giving the operation controlinstruction to the above operation circuit 500 will be explained.

The instruction ROM504 provided in the central control part 362includes, as has already been explained, eight operation controlroutines, whereby these eight routines are selected in accordance withthe state of the SPDW signal and the ASLC signal delivered from thecondition signal memory circuit 548 as well as of the state of the AOsignal and the CU signal delivered from the condition register 574. Theprogram selector 580 serves to determine the operation control routineof the above mentioned instruction ROM504 in accordance with the stateof the SPDW signal, the ASLC signal, the AO signal and the CU signal.

The above mentioned instruction ROM504 carries out the routine selectedand set by means of the above mentioned program selector 580, beingdesigned so as to produce the control signal for the system, whereby theprogram counter 582 is provided in order to carry out each routine. Tothe inhibit terminal of this program counter 582 the latch 584 isconnected, whereby this latch is provided in order to restrict thecounting operation of the program counter 582 in such a manner that theabove mentioned program counter 582 can not be started so far as no A-Dconversion data DD is obtained after the completion of the first A-Dconversion, whereby the above mentioned restriction is released so as tostart the counting operation of the above mentioned program counter 582at the same time when the first ADCE signal is detected by means of theabove mentioned input BAS selector 578.

The above mentioned program counter 582 is so designed as to count upone by one for each timing pulse TB₀, whereby in case of this system theoperation control operation for one step is carried out by means of theabove mentioned instruction ROM504 substantially during the 1 word timeof the timing pulses TB₀ -TB₇.

After then the above mentioned program counter 582 repeats the countingoperation continuously, delivering a signal every time when the countingoperation proceeds to a certain step. This signal means that the abovementioned instruction ROM504 has terminated the operation control forone routine and is given to the logic circuit 598. After a time elementbeing added, this signal is on the one hand delivered as the CALE signalto be carried on the BAS line 366 in synchronization of the timing pulseTB5 for showing the completion of one operation and on the other hand asthe RSND signal to be delivered with the next timing pulse TB₀ after theabove mentioned CALE signal has been delivered, so as to carry the datato transferred on the output BAS line 374.

Now detailed explanations will be made on the set up of such programselector 580, program counter 582, instruction ROM504 as mentionedabove.

FIG. 65 shows a block diagram for a control system for the instructionROM504, the logical circuit 598, the latch circuit 584, the programselector 580 and the program counter 582. In said drawing, the programselector 580 consists of integrated circuit element CD4019 (manufacturedby RCA), and said integrated circuit element CD4019 is an AND.ORselected gate as having its logic diagram shown in FIG. 66. Also whilethe program counter 582 consists of integrated circuit element CD4024(manufactured by RCA), said integrated circuit element CD4024 is aripple counter as having its logic diagram shown in FIG. 67.

Said program selector 580 has the CU signal which is the output of saidconditional register 574 inputted in the KA terminal thereof, and hasthe CU signal inputted into the KB terminal thereof, and the selector580 is so made that when the system is not set at a speed-lightphotographing mode each output signal of the terminals, A₁, A₂ isoutputted at each of the output terminals D₁, D₂, while each inputsignal of the terminals B₁, B₂ is outputted at each of the outputterminals D₁, D₂ at a time of speed-light photographing mode. While theoutput of the AND gate AND16 is given to the terminal A₁ of said programselector 580, and AND gate AND16 has SPDW signal and AO signal which isobtained through the inverter INV₁₀ inputted therein. Also ADOF signalis inputted into the terminal B₁ of said selector 580, and ASLC signalis inputted into the terminal A2 of the same, while AO signal and ASLCsignal are inputted into the terminal B2 of the same through the OR gateOR6.

In the above mentioned set up said program selector 580 can select fourcomputation control programs when the CU signal is "1", that is when thesystem is not set at a speedlight photographing mode and can select fourcomputation control programs when the CU signal is "1" that is at a timeof speed-light photographing mode, respectively, thus the eightoperation control routines explained before can be designated as awhole.

While said instruction ROM504 can carry out the instructions of 2⁸(=256) steps by combination of eight input terminals A₀ to A₇, thesystem of this example is so made as carrying out eight routinesconsisting of 32 steps, and by the combinations of the inputs from itsterminals A5 to A7 the above mentioned light operation control routinesi.e. each routine of 32 steps are carried out following the inputs fromthe terminals A₀ -A₄. Said instruction ROM504 has CU signal given to itsinput terminal A7, and receives the signal input from each of the outputterminals D₁, D₂ of said program selector 580 at each of the inputterminals A6, A5. Also, each of the input terminals A₀ to A₄ of saidROM504 receives each of the outputs Q₁ to Q₅ of the counter 582.

Said program counter 582 has such set up as making count-up one by onein synchronism with each of down rising of the timing pulse TB₀. For thestart up of the instruction ROM504, some A-D conversion data DD needs tobe accumulated at the D register 516 as a result of first A-Dconversion, and if said program counter 582 counts up while A-Dconversion is not completed after a power source switch is put in and noA-D conversion data DD are accumulated at said D register 516, it maycause erroneous operation. Therefore, this system employs such set upthat said program counter 582 first initiates count up operation onlyafter A-D conversions is completed at the input control part 360 in astate wherein AE lock is not done. That is, when first ADCE signal isplaced on the BAS line 366 in a state where AE lock is not placed byintroducing the Q output (6) of the Flip-Flop F19 (FIG. 58) of the inputBAS selector 578 provided at the central control part 362 and the outputof the AND gate AND21 receiving such AELK signal as showing that thesystem AE is not in a locked state into the J terminal of the JK typeFlip-Flop F20, said Flip-Flop F20, is set to make its Q output as "1".Therefore, the program counter 582, which has the Q terminal output ofsaid Flip-Flop F20 inputted into the direct reset terminal RST throughthe inverter INV₁₁, OR gate OR7, has the input at the direct resetterminal RST made as "0" at the same time when said Flip-Flop F20 is setand starts count-up action in synchronism with down rising of the timingpulse TB7.

While said instruction ROM504 has eight output terminals OP₀ to OP₇,instruction code is constituted by the outputs of 3 bits, OP7 to OP5,and the operand code is constituted by 5 bits, OP4 to OP₀. As suchinstruction ROM504, such integrated circuit element 1702A (manufacturedby INTEL) as having its block diagram shown in FIG. 68 is used in thisexample.

The output code of said instruction ROM504 has such meaning as shown inthe code explanation chart of FIG. 69.

Now, explanations will be made on the instruction code.

That is, OP7 is to determine whether an instruction relates to operationor to data exchange, wherein OP7 instructs operation when OP7 is "0",while it instructs data exchange when OP7 is "1".

When OP7 is "0", that is when operation instruction is given, OP6 is toinstruct the content of said operation wherein when OP6 is "0", itinstructs addition, while when OP6 is "1", it instructs subtraction.

Also at this time OP5 is to instruct the disposition of the result ofsaid operation, wherein when OP5 is "0" it instructs not to record theoperation result in the A register 510, while when OP5 is "1", itinstructs to record the operation result in the A register 510.

Contrary to this, when OP₁ is "1" that is when data exchange instructionis given, OP6 is to instruct the condition of data exchange, whereinwhen OP6 is "0", it is invalid as the carry Flip-Flop 540 is in resetstate, and when OP6 is "1", it is valid as the carry Flip-Flop 540 is inreset state.

Also at this time, OP5 is to instruct the condition of data exchange,wherein when OP5 is "0" it is invalid as the carry Flip-Flop 540 is inset state, while when OP5 is "1", it is valid as the carry Flip-Flop 540is in set state.

As what is mentioned above is consolidated and studied individually, itis revealed that when OP7 is "0", OP6 is "0", and when OP5 is "0", thecontent AR of the A register 510 and the data designated by the operandcode are added, but the result thereof is not written in the A register510, thus it means that nothing is done. Said instruction will be calledas NOOP in the explanations given hereinafter.

When OP7 is "0", OP6 is "0", and when OP5 is "1", the content AR of theA register 510 and the data designated by the operand code are addedthen the result thereof is written in the A register 510, that isso-called addition is instructed. This instruction will be called as ADDin the explanations given hereinafter.

When OP7 is "0", OP6 is "1", and when OP5 is "0", the data designated bythe operand code is subtracted from the content AR of the A register 510and the result thereof is not written in the A register 510, and thisoperation is to find out whether the carry Flip-Flop 540 is set as aresult of operation rather than to obtain the operation result, thus thecontent of the A register 510 and the data designated by the operandcode are compared. This instruction will be called as LT in theexplanations given hereinafter.

When OP7 is "0", OP6 is "1", and when OP5 is "1", the data designated bythe operand code is subtracted from the content AR of the A register 510then the result thereof is written in the A register 510, that isso-called subtraction is instructed. This instruction will be called asSUB in the explanations given hereinafter.

When OP7 is "1", OP6 is "0", and when OP5 is "0", it instructs that theexchange of the content AR of the A register 510 and the data designatedby the operand code is invalid when the carry Flip-Flop 540 is reset oris set, thus it instructs that nothing is to be done. This instructionwill be called as NOOP2 in the explanations given hereinafter.

When OP7 is "1", OP6 is "0", and when OP5 is "1", it instructs that theexchange of the content AR of the A register 510 and the data designatedby the operand code is invalid as the carry Flip-Flop 540 is reset, butis valid as the same is set, thus it instructs to conduct data exchangeonly when the carry Flip-Flop 540 is set. This instruction will becalled as SWC in the explanations given hereinafter.

When OP7 is "1", OP6 is "1", and when OP5 is "0", the exchange of thecontent AR of the A register 510 and the data designated by the operandcode is valid as the carry Flip-Flop 540 is reset but said exchange isinvalid as it is set, thus it instructs that the data exchange is to bedone only when the carry Flip-Flop 540 is reset. This instruction willbe called as SWN in the explanations given hereinafter.

When OP7 is "1", OP6 is "1", and when OP5 is "1", it is instructed thatthe exchange of the content AR of the A register 510 and the datadesignated by the operand code is valid either when the carry Flip-Flop540 is reset or set, thus it instructs to conduct data exchangeregardless of the state of the carry Flip-Flop 540. This instructionwill be called as SWU in the explanations given hereinafter.

In the case of said data exchange when the operand with which the dataexchange is to be done by the A register 510 is B register 512 or Cregister 514, the content AR of the A register 510 can be written in theoperand, but when the operand is fixed data or set data, the content ARof the A register 510 can not be written in the operand. Therefore inthis case, so-called data read out operation wherein the data of operandis one sidedly written in the A register 510 is done instead of dataexchange, but in the system of this example a data exchange instructionand a data read out instruction are not specifically distinguished, andsaid data exchange instruction works as such only when the operand is aregister, while it works as a data read out instruction when the operandis other than the register.

As has been explained above said instruction ROM504 has eightinstruction systems mentioned above.

Next, explanations will be made on operand code.

OP4 is to distinguish whether an operand is fixed data or variable data,and when OP4 is "0", an operand is fixed data and the fixed datadesignated by OP3 to OP₀ is designated out of the fixed data ROM534.Also when OP4 is "0", operands are variable data, and the variable datainputted from each of the input terminals a to i of the data selector502 are to be designated.

When OP4 is "0" that is concerning fixed data, the data designated byOP3 to OP₀ will be CST₀ data of total bits "0" when OP3, OP2, OP₁, OP₀are "0000", and will be the CSTC data of "11100000" when the same are"0010", and will be the CSTD data of "11010000" when the same are"0100", and will be the CSTE data of "00011111" when the same are"0110", and will be the CSTF data of total bits "1" when the same are"0111", also will be the slowest shutter speed TMIN controllable by thebody 4 of the camera device when OP3, OP2, OP1, OP₀ are "1000", and willbe the highest shutter speed TMA4 controllable by the body 4 of thecamera device when the same are "1001", and will be the maximum aperturevalue AMA4 controllable by the lens device 2 when the same are "1010",and will be shutter speed TSYN synchronized with speed-light beingcontrolled by the camera device body 4 when the same are "1011", andwill be the first constant CST₁ for operation when the same are "1100",and will be the second constant CST2 for operation when the same are"1101".

When OP4 is "1", that is concerning variable data, the data designatedby OP3 to OP₀ will be the content DR of the D register 516 that is DTPRwhich is AD conversion data DD when OP3, OP2, OP₁, OP₀ are "1000", andwill be DTSV at the time of "1001", DTTV at the time of "1010", DTAV atthe time of "1011", DTAO at the time of "1100", DTAC at the time of"1101", DTBR which is the content BR of the B register at the time of"1110", and DTCR which is the content CR of C register at the time of"1111".

The cross-reference table of the addresses and instructions of saidinstruction ROM540 and operand code is shown in FIG. 70(a) to (h).

What are shown in FIG. 70(a) are the routines selected in a case whenthe inputs of the terminals A7 to A5 of the instruction ROM504 are all"0" and the routines applied at a time of non speedlight photographingmode, or at a time when the diaphragm is not closed with a priority onshutter speed, or at a time of external light measuring mode. Thiscorresponds to the third routine shown in FIG. 29.

Also what are shown in FIG. 70(b) are routines selected in a case whenthe inputs at the terminals A7, A6 of the instruction ROM504 are "0" andthe input of the A5 terminal is "1", and said routines are applied whenthe diaphragm is not closed not being in a speedlight photographing modewith a priority on aperture value, or at a time of external lightmeasuring mode. This corresponds to the first routine shown in FIG. 29.

Also what are shown in FIG. 70(c) are the routines selected when theinputs at the terminals A7, A5 of the instruction ROM504 are "0" and theinput at the terminal A6 is "1", and said routines are applied at a timewhen speedlight photographing mood is not applied with priority onaperture value and diaphragm is closed not being under external lightmeasuring mode. This corresponds to the second routine shown in FIG. 29.

Also what are shown in FIG. 70(d) are routines selected when the inputat the terminal A7 of the instruction ROM504 is "0" and the inputs atthe terminals A6, A5 are "1", and said routines are applied whenspeedlight photographing mode is not applied with a priority on shuttertime and diaphragm is closed not being under external light measuringmode. This corresponds to the fourth routine shown in FIG. 29.

What are shown in FIG. 70(e) are routines selected when the input at theterminal A7 of the instruction ROM504 is "1", and the inputs at theterminals A6, A5 are "0", and said routines are applied when thecharging at a speedlight is completed and a speedlight photographingmode is set then the aperture value of the lens device 2 is set at thespeedlight device side, and at the same time the shutter speed at acamera device side is controlled semi-automatically. Said routines willbe called as the fifth routine in the explanations given hereinafter.

Also what are shown in FIG. 70(f) are routines selected when the inputsat the terminals A7, A5 of the instruction ROM504 are "1" and the inputat the terminal A6 is "0", and said routines are applied when theaperture value of the lens device 2 is set at the speedlight device sideand at the same time the shutter speed at the camera device side iscontrolled in a totally automatic manner. Said routines will be calledas sixth routine in the explanations given hereinafter.

Also what are shown in FIG. 70(g) are the routines selected when theinputs as the terminals A7, A6 of the instruction ROM504 are "1" and theinput at the terminal A5 is "0", and said routines are applied when theaperture value of the lens device 2 is set at the camera device side andat the same time the shutter speed at the camera device side iscontrolled semi-automatically. Said routines will be called as seventhroutine in the explanations given hereinafter.

Also what are shown in FIG. 70(h) are the routines selected when theinputs at the terminals A7, A6, A5 of the instruction ROM504 are "1",and said routines are applied when the aperture value of the lens device2 is set at the camera device side, and at the same side the shutterspeed at the camera device side is controlled in a fully automaticmanner. Said routines will be called as eighth routine in theexplanations given hereinafter.

Now, at a time of photographing using an external light measuringadapter, the above mentioned first or third routine is employeddepending on the state of ASLC signal, and in that case unnecessaryoperation steps will not be carried out. That is in a case of lightmeasuring using an external light measuring adapter, the fully openedaperture value AVo of the photographing lens device 2 and vignettingerror AVc at a time of light measuring need not be considered againstTTL light measuring, therefore the steps of conducting correctionoperation for the fully opened aperture value AVo and the vignettingerror AVc may be disregarded in carrying out said first and thirdroutines. Here, said steps in the first and third routines are ADD-DATOat the eight step and ADD-DATC at ninth step as being apparent from FIG.70(a), (b).

Also when the A-D converter is overflowed especially as the fifth andeighth routines are carried out, the signal ADOF showing that works asthe signal to show the necessity to manually set the aperture value ofthe lens device 2 at a time of speedlight photographing, but when theA-D converter 382 is overflowed as the first to eigth routines arecarried out, the signal ADOF showing that is to show that the dataobtained as a result of light measuring are too big. Therefore, in thatcase some warning needs to be issued, further, the content of theregister which is overflowed and has its content becoming unknown needsto be made as the maximum capacity of said register, that is the totalbits "1". This operation can be regarded as totally equivalent with theoverflow of the A register 510 in a case when the film sensitivity SV,the fully-opened aperture value AVo, the vignetting error AV, etc. areadded to BVo, the light measuring result. Therefore, this example is somade that when the A-D converter 382 is overflowed at a time not beingin a speedlight photographing mode, direct-set signal is given to thecarry Flip-Flop 540 in a step next to the above mentioned addition stepthat is in the A step out of the steps to carry out first to fourthoperation routines, for setting said carry Flip-Flop 540.

Also, when the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as a result ofoperation exceed the maximum or minimum limit of the aperture value ofthe lens device 2 or the limit of the shutter speed controllable by thebody 4, a warning to show the same needs to be made.

This can be easily realized by flickering the display aperture value ordisplay shutter speed of the digital display device 402. Such procedureis a step to distinguish whether the operation result falls within thelimit value for the aperture value or shutter speed after the same isintroduced as a result of operation, and the flickering display signalAVFL for aperture value or the flickering signal TVFL for shutter speeddisplay may be generated based on the set or reset state of the carryFlip-Flop 540, thus the output of the carry Flip-Flop 540 may beobserved at the E step and G step of the first to fourth operationroutines.

As has been mentioned above what generates the signals for displayingaperture value or shutter speed of the digital display device 402 in acase when the overflow generated as a result of A-D conversion, theoverflow generated as a result of addition of various data to the lightmeasuring data and the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as aresult of operation exceed the maginal value of control is a theorycircuit 586.

The theory circuit 586 receives the output of said carry Flip-Flop 540and the output of said program selector 580, and distinguishes theoutput of said carry Flip-Flop 540 at the specific address designated atthe program selector 580 and issues signal to flicker the shutter speedor aperture value displayed at the digital display device 402.

The flickering signal TVFL for shutter speed outputted from said theorycircuit 586 is given to the multiplexer 594 after once being memorizedat the Flip-Flop 588, while the flickering signal AVF for aperture isgiven to the multiplexer 594 after once being memorized at the Flip-Flop590.

Now, since the condition for flickering the shutter speed or aperturevalue displayed at the digital display device 402 have been previouslyexplained the explanation for the same will be omitted here. Anddetailed explanations will be made for under what state such flickeringsignal will be generated in this system.

Also said theory circuit 586 receives RSND signal from the theorycircuit 598 and said Flip-Flops 588, 590 are reset by said RSND signal.

The theories for generating such signal as disregarding the eighth andninth steps when the external light measuring adapter is used, fordirectly setting the carry Flip-Flop 540 by the ADOF signal generated atother times than speedlight photographing mode, and for givingflickering signal to the digital display device 402 against the ADconversion overflow, the over-flow generated as a result of addingvarious data, and the average of the marginal value for the aperturevalue or shutter speed obtained as a result of operation, are all havingclose relationship with the output of the program selector 580.

While the circuit arrangement diagram to realize said theories is shownin FIG. 71, and what is identified by 600 in said drawing is to show thedecoder of 4 bit latch--16 lines consisting of integrated circuitelement MC14514 (manufactured by Motollora). Said integrated circuitelement MC14514 has such set up as shown in the block-diagram of FIG. 72and the logic diagram of FIG. 72, and is so made as decode outputtingthe data of 4 bits being inputted from D1 to D4 at the 16 output linesof S0 to S15.

In the set up shown in FIG. 71 the outputs Q1 to Q4 out of the outputsQ1 to Q5 of the program selector 580 are inputted in the terminals D1 toD4 of the decoder 600. In the same drawing, the AND gate AND27 is detectthe eighth step and ninth step in the first or third routine at a timeof external light measuring mode for outputting the performance controlsignal ○8 of program, and is so made as receiving input of the signal toshow external light measuring mode obtained by giving CU signal and AOsignal to the AND gate AND30, and at the same time receiving theinversion signal of the Q5 output of said program counter 580 by theinverter INV12 and the signal of the outputs S8, S9 of said decoder 600through OR gate OR9, and outputting the signal ○8 following the ANDtheory of the signal to show that the system is at external lightmeasuring mode and of the signal to show that the output of said programcounter 580 is at eighth step or ninth step.

Also the AND gate AND28 is to detect the 10th step at the first tofourth routines when the result of A-D conversion by the A-D converter382 overflows at a time when the system is not at a speedlightphotographing mode and to output the set signal ○9 to directly set thecarry Flip-Flop 540, and is so made as receiving the input of the signalto show the A-D converter 382 overflows at the time when the system isnot at a speedlight photographing mode being obtained by giving CUsignal and ADOF signal to AND gate AND29, and at the same time asreceiving the inversion signal of the Q5 output of said program selector580 by the inverter INV12 and the input of the output S10 of saiddecoder 600, and as outputting the signal 9, following the AND theory ofthe ADOF signal at a time when the system is not at speedlightphotographing mode and of the signal to show that the output of saidprogram selector 580 is at the 10th step.

The AND gate AND25 is to give input to the J terminal of the Flip-Flop590 to output the signal AVFL for flickering the display aperture valueof the digital display device 402, and the AND gate AND26 is to giveinput to the J terminal of the Flip-Flop 588 to output the signal TVFLfor flickering the display shutter speed of the digital display device402. The AND gate AND24 has ASLC signal and CU signal inputted thereinand is to perform the signal output to show that aperture value isselected with priority at a time when the system is not at speedlightphotographing mode, and said output is inputted directly into said ANDgate AND26 and into said AND gate AND25 through the inverter INV13. Thisis done because what is obtained by operation at a time when aperturepriority mode is selected is shutter speed, thus it is to prevent thesignal which directs flickering from reaching the J terminal of theFlip-Flop 590 for outputting the AVFL signal as said signal comes, andcontrary to this at a time not being at aperture priority mode that isas shutter priority mode is selected what is obtained by operation isaperture value, thus it is to prevent the signal which directsflickering from reaching the J terminal of the Flip-Flop 588 foroutputting TVFL signal.

Said signal to direct flickering is given from the OR gate OR11 to bothof the AND gates AND25, AND26, and said OR gate output contains the twoconditions to output said signal to direct flickering.

One is a first condition outputted through the AND gate AND22, making itas the condition that the carry Flip-Flop 540 is set, wherein said ANDgate AND22 receives the input of the set signal CA from said carryFlip-Flop 540.

The other one is a second condition outputted through the AND gateAND23, making it as the condition that the carry Flip-Flop 540 is reset,wherein said AND gate AND23 receives the input of reset signal CA fromsaid carry Flip-Flop 540.

Said AND gate AND22 has the S11, S14 outputs of said decoder 600inputted therein through the OR gate OR10, and at a same time has the Q5output of said program selector 580 inputted therein through theinverter INV12, therefore it is so made as receiving the input of CAsignal from the carry Flip-Flop 540 and producing output "1" at a timewhen the program step by said program counter 580 is B step and E step.

Also said AND gate AND23 has the SO output of said decoder 600 and theQ5 output of said program selector 580 inputted therein, therefore it isso made as producing the output "1" at a time when the input of CAsignal is received from the carry Flip-Flop 540 and the program step bysaid program selector 580 is G step.

Also detailed explanations will be made later on the condition forproducing the carry signal CA from said carry Flip-Flop 540.

Now, each of said Flip-Flops 588, 590 receives the input of theinvention signal of the clock pulse CP and the timing pulse TB by theinverter INV14. That is, said two Flip-Flops 588, 590 are in synchronismwith the up rising of first clock pulse CP of the time of the timingpulse TB7.

Also each of said Flip-Flops 588, 590 receives the input of RSND signalat its K terminal. Said RSND signal is such that since each routinebeing proceeded by the program processing output of the program counter580 is as being apparent from FIG. 70 at L step, being common to eightroutines, as the output of said program selector 80 comes to M step andfurther the CALE signal to show completion of operation is outputted,then the signal to direct the transfer of each of data obtained as theresults of operation thereafter will be outputted, and the very signaljust mentioned is the RSND signal.

Said CALE signal and RSND signal are obtained through such logic set upof the theory circuit 598 as shown in FIG. 65.

Said CALE signal is outputted from the AND gate AND68 which receives theoutput of the AND gate AND20 receiving the Q5, Q4 outputs of saidprogram counter 582 and the inversion output of the Q3 output of saidprogram counter 582 by the inverter INV23. Said CALE signal is at highlevel among the 4 words from X step to R step of the program step asbeing apparent from FIG. 70.

Also said RSND signal is outputted from the AND gate AND 9 which has theQ2, Q3 outputs of said program counter 582 inputted therein through theOR gate OR8 and the output of said AND gate AND20, that is the signalwhich is at high level among 8 words from X step V step, i.e. the laststep of the program step inputted therein. Therefore said RSND signalwill be outputted as the signal being so set as being at high levelamong 6 words from Q step to V step, i.e., the last step of the programstep as being apparent from FIG. 70.

But the AND condition signal of the output of the AND gate AND18 that isthe Q3, Q0 output of said program counter 582 and the output of said ANDgate AND20 is given to the direct reset terminal RST of said programcounter 582 through the OR gate OR7. At this time the output of said ANDgate AND18 is so set as being at high level for 1 word of T step of theprogram step as being apparent from FIG. 70. But since said programcounter 582 is directly reset as the output of said AND gate AND18becomes to have high level, the output of said AND gate AND18 comes downto low level at a moment of up-rising.

Similarly, since said RSND signal comes down to low level at a momentwhen the program step comes into T step, said RSND signal will beoutputted as the signal being at high level among 3 words virtually fromQ step to S step.

Also, said CALE signal is inputted into the AND gate AND62, institutingthe partial theory circuit. Since said AND gate AND62 receives the inputof the timing pulse TB5, it produces output of "1" signal beingsynchronized with the timing pulse TB5 while the CALE signal is at highlevel. The CALE signal being in synchronism with said timing pulse TB5is placed on BAS line 366 for 4 words through the OR gate OR22. On theother hand said theory circuit 598 places the timing pulse TB4unconditionally on the BAS line 366 from the OR gate OR22.

Therefore, "0" signal will be placed for 4 bits being in synchronismwith the timing pulse TB0 to TB3 on the BAS line 366, and "1" signalwill be placed on the same in synchronism with the timing pulse TB4, andCALE signal will be placed on the same in synchronism with the timingpulse TB5, ADCE signal in synchronism with the timing pulse TB6, and INTsignal in synchronism with the timing pulse TB7.

Next, explanations will be made on the detailed circuit set up in takingin the data selector 502 and fixed data ROM534 shown in FIG. 30 also themaximum aperture value AMAX of the lens device 2 used following thecircuit set up diagram shown in FIG. 75.

Said fixed data ROM534 has 11 data, CSTO, CSTC, CSTD, CSTE, CSTF, TMIN,TMAX, AMAX, TSYN, CST1, CST2 housed in series and consists of six ofsaid series data arranged in parallel. But, the data AMAX only relatingto the maximum aperture value of the photographing lens device 2 isdifferent in each of the six parallel data, and houses the data relatingto the values of F11, F16, F22, F32, F45, F64 in F number. Said fixeddata ROM 534 can be basically made of such integrated circuit element1702A as shown in FIG. 68.

In such data arrangement, said fixed data ROM534 receives the outputs ofOP3 to OP0 of the instruction ROM504 at its A3-A6 input terminals, andhas specific data of said series data designated. Therefore, byinputting the counter pulses CT1 to CT4 at A0 to A2 terminalsrespectively, six data being exactly same except AMAX will be outputtedconsecutively from the lower unit in synchronism with the timing pulsesTB0 to TB7 from the output terminals Q0 to Q5 of said ROM 534.

While the output of said Q0 to Q5 will be inputted into the AND gatesAND31 to AND36 respectively, said AND gate AND31 to AND36 will beselectively conductive by the maximum aperture value of thephotographing lens device 2 used. The outputs of this AND gates AND31 toAND36 are integrated in the OR gate OR12, and the fixed data designatedby the instruction ROM504 will be outputted from said OR gate OR12.

On the other hand, data relating to the maximum aperture value AMAX ofthe photographing lens device 2 used are taken into the central controlpart 362 from the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 and aretaken into the shift register 358 of 6 bits. Said shift register 538 canbe made by using 6 bits of the integrated circuit element CD4015 havingits logic diagram shown in FIG. 62. The outputs of Q1 to Q6 of saidshift register 538 are always given to the input terminals D1 to D6 ofthe buffer register 602, and the content of said shift register 538 istaken in the buffer-register 602 and memorized in synchronism with theup rising of the timing pulse TB0 being given to said buffer register602 as clock. That is, the data AMAX' being taken in said shift register538 is in synchronism with TB1 to TB6, therefore since the AMAX' is in astate being completely taken in said shift register 538 at a timing ofTB7, content of the shift register 538 is taken in the buffer register602 and memorized in the up rising of TB0.

The Q1 to Q6 outputs of said buffer register 602 are given to said ANDgates AND31 to AND36 and make one out of the AND gates AND31 to AND36selectively conductive.

Here, said fixed data ROM534 receives the OP output of the instructionROM534 at its CS terminal, and as being apparent from the column OP4 ofoperand code shown in FIG. 69, outputs the data designated by theinstruction ROM504 through Q0 to Q5 terminals only when said OP4 is "0".

Also, said buffer register 602 can be made by combining three ofintegrated circuit elements CD4013 (manufactured by RCA). And saidintegrated circuit element CD4013 is D type Flip-Flop of dual type asbeing shown in the block diagram of FIG. 76.

When the fixed data housed in said fixed data ROM 534 are designated asoperand by the instruction ROM504 in the above mentioned set up, thefixed data designated against the signal line 10 will be outputtedconsecutively from lower unit in synchronism with the timing pulses TB0to TB7 from the wired OR gate OR13 receiving the output of said OR gateOR12.

On the other hand the output of the data selector 502 will be given tosaid wired OR gate OR13. Said data selector 502 is 8 channel dataselector consisting of integrated circuit element MC14512 (manufacturedby Motorolla) having its logic diagram shown in FIG. 53 and is so madethat the data inputted from its X0 to X7 terminals are outputtedselectively from Z terminal following the input signal from theterminals A, B, C. Each output of OP0, OP1, OP2 is inputted into each ofthe terminals A, B, C from the instruction ROM504, and as being apparentfrom FIG. 69, each of the various data, DR, DTSV, DTTV, DTAV, DTAO,DTAC, BR, CR are selectively outputted the Z terminal by combination ofthe output OP0, OP1, OP2. Also, this data selector 502 receives theinput of the OP4 signal at its DIS terminal through the inverter INV14,and receives the input of the OP3 signal through the inverter INV15 atits INH terminal, but as being apparent from the columns of said OP4,OP3 of the operand code shown in FIG. 69, said data selector 502 outputsout of the Z terminal the variable data inputted from the X0 to X7terminals only when said OP4, OP3 are "1", and outputs the same at thesignal line 10 through the wired OR gate OR13.

When the variable data selected by said data selector 502 are designatedas operand at the instruction ROM504 through such set up as having beingmentioned above, the variable data designated to the signal line 10 areoutputted consecuting from lower unit in synchronism with the timingpulses TB0 to TB7 from the wired OR gate OR13 receiving the Z terminaloutput of said data selector 502.

Also, the theoretical circuit 592 receives the inputs of MNAL signal,MNAL signal, BLB signal, SPDW signal, SPDW signal, ASLC signal from saidcondition signal memorizing circuit 548, and at a same time receives theinputs of AECG signal, WNUP signal, CU signal from said conditionregister 574. Said theory circuit 592 distinguishes the above mentionedvarious signals based on a certain logic and forms display controlsignal of the digital display device 402 against the output control part364 and the control signal of the output control part 364.

From said theory circuit 592, WNUP signal to show completion of filmwind up, the display instruction signal EDSP for the warning signal,"EEEEEE", the display instruction signal BDSP for "bulb" display, thedisplay instruction signal EFDS for "EF" to show completion ofspeedlight charging at a time of speedlight photographing mode, and thedisplay instruction signal MDSP for "M" to show the necessity formanually setting the aperture of the lens device 2 are outputted.

Said EDSP signal is generated when there is handling error of a cameradevice, and this output is made based on the two states, that is, of acase when the closing of the lens device 2 by the closing down lever 64is done in a state wherein the mark 12 is selected in the lens device 2as has been mentioned above, and of a case wherein the mark 12 isselected in the lens device 2 in such state as completing the wind up offilm and the AE lever 94 at the body 4 side is in a state of AEdischarge in a state wherein the closing of the lens device 2 by thediaphragm closing lever 64 is not done.

That is, said EDSP signal is outputted in a state satisfying thefollowing theoretical equation:

    EDSP=SPDW, MNAL+SPDW·MNAL·WNUP·AECG . . . (18).

Also BDSP signal is the signal outputted when the bulb signal BLB is"1".

Also EFDS signal is the signal outputted when CU signal is "1".

Also, said MDSP signal is outputted in such two states that the closingof the lens device 2 by the diaphragm closing lever 64 is not done in astate wherein aperture value is set by the aperture setting ring 8 ofthe lens device 2, or the diaphragm closing by the diaphragm closing 64is done at a time of shutter priority mode. That is, MDSP signal isoutputted in such state as satisfying the following theoreticalequation:

    MDSP=SPDW·MNAL+SPDW·MNAL·ASLC . . . (19).

Said theory circuit 592 has its logic diagram shown in FIG. 77. In saiddrawing, AND gates AND 37, AND38, AND39 and the OR gate OR14 aretheoretical set up to satisfy said equation (18), and EDSP signal isobtained from OR gate OR14. Also the AND gates AND40, AND41 and OR gateOR15 are theoretical set up to satisfy said equation (19), and MDSPsignal is obtained from the OR gate OR15.

The output of said theory circuit 592 and the outputs TVF, AVF of theFlip-Flops 588, 590 are then given to the multiplexer 594 and areconverted to such signal as synchronized with the timing pulses TB0 toTB7.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram of said multiplexer 594, and the integratedcircuit element MC14512 having its detailed logic diagram shown in FIG.53 can be applied to said multiplexer. Said multiplexer has the inputterminals X0 to X7, and the X0 terminal is grounded, and its X1 terminalreceives the input of WNUP signal, and its X2 terminal receives theinput of AVFL signal, its X3 terminal receives the input of TVFL signal,its X4 terminal receives the input of EDSP signal, its X5 terminalreceives the input of BDSP signal, its X6 terminal receives the input ofEFDS signal, and its X7 terminal receives the input of MDSP signal.These input signals are outputted in series to the signal line 11 fromthe Z terminal as the signal being synchronized with the timing pulsesTB0 to TB7 by the counter pulses CT1, CT2, CT4 being inputted in each ofthe terminals A, B, C.

As has been mentioned above WNUP signal is outputted at the signal line11 in synchronism with the timing pulse TB1, AVFV signal is outputted atthe same in synchronism with the timing pulse TB2, TVFL signal with thetiming pulse TB3, EDSP signal with the timing pulse TB4, BDSP signalwith the timing pulse TB5, EFDS signal with the timing pulse TB6, andMDSP signal with the timing pulse TB9.

Here, said multiplexer 594 receives the input of RSND signal at its INHterminal, and has the signal output from its Z terminal controlled whilethe RSND signal is outputted.

FIG. 79 is a logic diagram of the operation circuit 500 shown in FIG.30, and the AND gate AND45 in said drawing is to show a circulating gatefor A register 510, and the AND gate AND47 is to show a circulating gatefor B register 512, while the AND gate AND49 is to show a circulatinggate for C register 514, respectively. The A register 510, B register512, C register 514 circulate the contents AR, BR, CR, respectivelythereof, through each of said AND gates AND45, AND47, AND49.

This operation circuit 500 is controlled by the operation controlinstructions OP0, OP1, OP2, OP3, OP4, OP5, OP6, OP7 from saidinstruction ROM504. While the output of said instruction ROM504 isdivided into the instruction codes OP7, OP6, OP5 and the operand codesOP4, OP3, OP2, OP1, OP0 as shown in FIG. 69, each of said codes isdecoded to conduct required operation and control action in saidoperation circuit 500.

Also while this operation circuit 500 takes in various fixed data andvariable data through the data selector 502, these data are taken in theAND gate AND60 from the output signal line 10 of the circuit shown inFIG. 75. While this AND gate AND60 takes in the signal of the outputsignal line 8 of the circuit shown in FIG. 71 through the inverterINV21, this is done for controlling the taking in of the data ofdesignated operand only during the step unnecessary operation at a timeof external light measuring mode so that virtually unnecessary operationwill not be done. The output of said AND gate AND60 is given to the ANDgate AND43, the EXCLUSIVE OR gate EX2 and the AND gates AND57, AND59,wherein said AND gate AND43 is used in directly taking the data ofoperand into the A register 510, while said EXCLUSIVE OR gate EX2 andAND gates AND57, AND59 are used when the data AR of A register 510 andthe data of operand are operated.

In FIG. 79, the EXCLUSIVE OR gates EX1, EX2, EX3 and the AND gatesAND57, AND58, AND59, AND61, and OR gate OR21, the Flip-Flop F21constitute an operating part. Said set up of the operating part is wellknown addition subtraction circuit which functions as an additioncircuit when OP6, the input of the EXCLUSIVE OR gate EX1 is "0" andfunctions as a subtraction circuit when OP6 is "1". This is a set upfollowing such instruction system that addition is done when OP6 is "0"while the subtraction is done when OP6 is "1" as shown in the column forOP6 in FIG. 69. While the Flip-Flop F21 is a carry Flip-Flop to memorizethe carry generated from the OR gate OR21 and is ordinarily to memorizethe carry in operation, and the carry generated in operation of the lastunit that is the carry outputted from the OR gate OR21 with the timingof TB7 is controlled by the AND gate AND61 which receives the timingpulse TB7 through the inverter INV15. The carry outputted from said ORgate OR21 is given to J terminal of the carry Flip-Flop 540 through theAND gate AND56, and since this carry Flip-Flop 540 has the invertionsignal by the inverter INV16 of the timing pulse TB7 and the ORcondition signal by the OR gate OR23 of the clock pulse CP beinginputted as its clock input, said Flip-Flop 540 sets or resets insynchronism with the up-rising of the first clock pulse CP of the timingof TB7. That is, said carry Flip-Flop 540 is set by the carry generatedin the timing pulse TB7 that is the carry generated in the last step ofoperation.

Also since OP7 of instruction code becomes "1" at a time not being atoperation mode, as being apparent from FIG. 69, the AND gate AND56receiving the input of OP7 through the inverter INV17 has its outputcontrolled.

As has been mentioned above the carry generated as a result of operationis detected and memorized by the carry Flip-Flop 540, then is outputtedas CA signal from its Q output and as CA signal from the Q outputterminal.

Now, the operation result obtained by the above mentioned additionsubtraction circuit is outputted through the EXCLUSIVE OR gate EX3 andis given to the AND gate AND44. Since the output of said AND gate AND44is given to the A register 510 through the OR gate OR17, if said ANDgate AND44 is conducted through, said operation result will beintroduced into and memorized by the A register 510. As has beenmentioned the operation result is taken in the A register 510, as beingapparent from FIG. 69, at a time when the system is at operation modeand the instruction signal of the A register ON is issued. That is, whenOP7 is "0" and OP5 is "1", the AND gate AND45 for data circulation maybe come non-conductive while the AND gate AND44 for taking in theoperation result may become conductive, and what are provided for thatend are AND gate AND51, the inverter INV21, and NOR gate NOR2. Said ANDgate AND 51 receives the input of the inversion signal of OP5 and OP7obtained through the inverter INV21, and is so made as conducting the"1" output only when OP7 is "0" and OP5 is "1", that is, when the outputinstruction from the instruction ROM504 is ADD or SUB. Said "1" outputof the AND gate AND51 is given to the AND gate AND44 making said gate 44conductive and is given to the AND gate AND45 after being inversedthrough the NOR gate NOR2, prohibiting said gate 45.

Operation results are introduced into A register 510 through the abovementioned set up.

The AND gate AND43 is a gate provided to take the fixed or variable datainputted through the AND gate AND60 into A register 510, and the otherinput terminals receive the output of the AND gates AND52 and AND53through the OR gate OR16. Said AND gates AND52 and AND53 will not beconducted through unless at least OP7 is "1" that is at a time of dataexchange mode as being apparent from FIG. 69. Said AND gate 53 alsoreceives the output CA of the carry Flip-Flop 540 and the input of OP5,and, as being apparent from FIG. 69, is to produce "1" output when OP5is "1" and the carry CA is "1". Also said AND gates AND52 receives the Qoutput CA of said carry Flip-Flop 540 and the input of OP6, and as beingapparent from FIG. 69, produces "1" output when OP6 is "1" and the carryCA is "0". The output of the AND gate AND52 becomes "1" through theabove mentioned set up when SWC instruction of SWU instruction istransmitted, and the output of the AND gate AND53 becomes "1" when SWNinstruction or SWU instruction is transmitted.

If the output state of the carry Flip-Flop 540 matched with thecondition outputted from the instruction ROM504 at a time of dataexchange mode through the above mentioned set up, "1" output is producedfrom the OR gate OR16, making the AND gate AND43 conductive, thus thevariable or fixed data of operand being introduced through the AND gateAND60 will be taken in and memorized by A register 510. Also at thistime the "1" output of said OR gate OR16 is given to the AND gate AND45as "0" signal through NOR gate NOR2, therefore the circulation of Aregister 510 by said gate AND45 will be prohibited.

On the other hand, while the output of A register 510 is given to theAND gates AND46 and AND48, this is done to taken in the data of operandinto A register 510 when the data of operand is B register BR or Cregister CR at a time of data exchange mode and at a same time to shiftthe data which have been memorized so far in A register 510 to operand.

When B register 512 or C register 514 is selected as operand, as beingapparent from FIG. 69, the OP4, OP3, OP2, OP1 out of operand codes willall become "1". This will be detected by the AND gate AND50. On theother hand when OP0 is "0" at this time, B register 512 is selectedwhile C register 514 is selected when OP0 is "1", thus OP0 is directlygiven to the AND-gate AND55 and at a same time is given to the AND gateAND54 through the inverter INV20. Since the output of said AND gateAND50 and of said OR gate OR16 are given to said AND gate AND54, Bregister 512 is designated as operand in data exchange mode, and saidAND gate AND54 produces "1" output only when the condition for dataexchange is satisfied, and said "1" output is given to said AND gateAND46 through OR gate OR20. Therefore, said AND gate AND46 becomesconductive, thus the data of A register 510 will be taken into Bregister 512 through said AND gate AND46, OR-gate OR18. Also since "1"output of OR gate OR20 is given to the AND gate AND47 through theinverter INV18 at this time, the AND gate AND47 for circulating the dataBR of B register 512 will be prohibited. Also since the output of saidAND gate AND50 and the output of said OR gate OR16 are given to said ANDgate AND50 beside OP0 signal, said AND gate AND55 produces "1" outputand give the same to said AND gate AND48 only when C register 514 isdesignated as operand in data exchange mode and the condition for dataexchange is satisfied. Therefore, said AND gate AND46 becomesconductive, thus the data of A register 510 will be taken in C register514 through said AND gate AND48, OR gate OR19. Now, since the "1" outputof the AND gate AND55 is given to the AND gate AND49 through theinverter INV19 at this time, the AND gate AND49 for circulating the dataCR of C register 514 will be prohibited.

Here, since said carry Flip-Flop 540 receives the input of OP7 at its Kterminal, it is placed in reset state in synchronism with the up-risingof first clock-pulse CP of the time of the first timing pulse TB7 indata exchange mode, and the instructed data exchange will be completedat a time as entering into the timing of said TB7.

Said operation circuit 500 is to conduct necessary operation or dataexchange following the instruction from the instruction ROM504 throughthe above mentioned set up, and the controlled aperture value fordisplay in the digital display device 402 or the data relating toaperture value are obtained finally at the A register 510 regardless ofthe fact whether they are obtained as a result of operation or areoriginally set by activating said operation circuit 500 following eachroutine shown in FIG. 70, and the control data relating to shutter speedfor display or control will be obtained at B register 512 regardless ofthe fact whether it is obtained as a result of operation or isoriginally set, while the control data to control the diaphragm closingstep number of the lens device 2 is obtained at C register 514.

While RSND signal is outputted from the theory circuit 598 whichreceives the output from the program counter 582 as the operation bysaid operation circuit 500 is completed as has been mentioned above,said RSND signal is at high level during the 3 words after the operationis completed.

Said RSND signal is given to the AND gate AND42, NOR gate NOR2, OR gateOR20 of the operation circuit 500 shown in FIG. 79, therefore the ANDgates AND42, AND46 will become conducted, while AND gates AND45, AND47will be prohibitted. Therefore, the output of C register 514 is directlycoupled with A register 510 through the AND gate AND42, OR gate OR17,and the output of A register 510 is directly coupled with B register 512through the AND gate AND46, OR gate OR18, therefore, the data AR, BR, CRof each of said registers A, B, C will be outputted consecutively in theorder of the content BR of B register 512, the content AR of A register510, the content CR of C register 514, during 3 words wherein the signalof RSND is "1", from the signal line (12).

The output of the signal line (11) of the multiplexer 594 shown in FIG.78 and the output of the output line (12) of the operation circuit shownin FIG. 79 will be given to the output theory circuit 596. While saidoutput theory circuit 596 has such set up as having its logic diagramshown in FIG. 80, said output theory circuit 596 performs such role asplacing the timewise controlled data and signal on the output BAS line374.

Said output theory circuit 596 has OR gate OR24 at its output terminalto the output BAS line 374, and the output of the signal line (11) andeach of the outputs of AND gates AND64, AND63 will be given to said ORgate. The output of the signal line (11) is WNUP signal, AVFL signal,TVFL signal EDSP signal, BDSP signal, EFDS signal, MDSP signal being insynchronism with the timing pulses TB₁ to TB7 from the multiplexer 594,and is, as it is, placed on the output BAS line 374 through the OR gateOR24. The output of this multiplexer 594 has its output controlledduring 3 words during which RSND signal is at high level as has beenmentioned before.

On the other hand when said RSND signal becomes to have high level, saidhigh level signal makes the AND gate AND65 which receives the output ofthe signal line (12) from said operation circuit 500 conductive. Whilethe output of said AND gate AND65 is given to the AND gate AND64, saidAND gate AND64 receives the output of NAND gate NAND3 which has thesignal BLB to show bulb mode inputted from the set condition memorizingcircuit 548 and has the signal CU to show that the system is not at aspeed-light photographing mode inputted from the condition registor 574,therefore, said AND gate AND64 will be conductive unless the system isat speed-light photographing mode and the bulb is set as shutter speed.Therefore, the content BR, AR, CR of the B register 512, A registor 510,C register 514, respectively of the operation circuit 500 will be placedon the output BAS line 374 consecutively from the OR gate OR24 insynchronism with the timing pulse during 3 words during which RSNDsignal is "1", through said AND gate AND64.

On the other hand, in a state wherein the system is not at a speed-lightphotographing mode and the bulb is set as shutter speed, the output ofsaid NAND gage NAND3 will become "0", therefore the AND gate AND64 willbe prohibited. Therefore, the data outputted to the signal line (12)from the operation circuit 500 will not be placed on the output BAS line374.

But at a time of such bulb photographing mode as has been mentionedbefore aperture value is controlled in fully opened state and the fullyopened aperture value AV0 of the lens device 2 is displayed at thedigital display device 402.

Therefore while the data to control diaphragm step number may be all bit"0", the fully opened aperture value AV0 of the lens device 2 must betransferred to the output control part 360 for display of the fullyopened aperture value AV0. For that end the fully opened aperture valueAV0 of the lens device 2 used may be placed on the BAS line 374 in asame timing as the controlled aperture value that is the data AR of Aregister 510 are placed on the BAS line 374. Said AND gate AND62 has theQ5 output of the program counter 582 and the S₁₁ output of the decoder600 inputted therein, therefore, this AND gate AND62 will be made as "1"only for such 1 word period as being same as that the data AR of Aregister 510 is outputted from the operation circuit 500 to the outputline (12). AND gate AND63 has the output of said NAND gate NAND3inputted therein through the inverter INV22, and at a same time has theoutput of said AND gate AND62 and (2) signal from the circuit shown inFIG. 37 that is DTA0 given thereto, therefore when bulb is selected at atime not being at speed-light photographing mode, the fully openedaperture value data AV0 of the lens device 2 used will be placed on theoutput BAS line 374 through OR gate OR24 in a same timing that the dataAR of A register 510 is outputted from the operation circuit 500.

FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram to consolidatedly show what has beenexplained above about the signal and data placed on the BAS line 366,the input BAS line 370 and output BAS line 374.

That is, "0" signal is placed on the BAS line 366 during the timing ofthe timing pulses TB0 to TB3, and CALE signal is placed thereon insynchronism with the timing pulse TB5, and ADCF signal in synchronismwith the timing pulse TB6, and INT signal in synchronism with the timingpulse TB7, wherein said signals of BAS line 366 have important role fordetermining the timing for data transfer at each part of the inputcontrol part 360, the central control part 362, the output control part364.

Also the input BAS line 370 plays important role in transferring varioussignal and data from the input control part 360 to the central controlpart 362 based on the timing pulses TB0 to TB7 and as various signalsare transferred it has ADOF signal placed thereon in synchronism withthe timing pulse TB₁, similarly has AELK signal in synchronism with thetiming pulse TB2, AECG signal in synchronism with the timing pulse TB3,WNUP signal in synchronism with the timing pulse TB4, AO signal insynchronism with the timing pulse TB5, and CU signal in synchronism withthe timing pulse TB6, while in the case of data (in this case A-Dconversion data DD), data with an accuracy of 1/8 step will be placedthereon consecutively from lower unit in synchronism with the timingpulses TB0 to TB7.

Also the output BAS line 374 plays important role in transferringvarious signals and data from the central control part 362 to the outputcontrol part 364 based on the timing pulses TB0 to TB7, and at a time oftransferring various signals, it has WNUP signal placed thereon insynchronism with the timing pulse TB₁, and has TVFL signal placedthereon in synchronism with the timing pulse TB2, similarly AVFL signalin synchronism with the timing pulse TB3, EDSP signal in synchronismwith the timing pulse TB4, BDSP signal in synchronism with the timingpulse TB5, EFDS signal in synchronism with the timing pulse TB6, andMDSP signal in synchronism with the timing pulse TB7. And in the casesof data for example, shutter speed TV, aperture value AV, fully openedaperture value AVo, controlled diaphragm step number AVs, etc., the datawith an accuracy of 1/8 step are placed thereon consecutively from lowerunit in synchronism with the timing pulses TB0 to TB7.

Next, explanations will be made on the output control part 364. Theoutput control part 364 has two major functions. One is display controlfunction, and the other is exposure control function.

Various condition signals and various data are inputted in said outputcontrol part 364 from the central control part 362 through the outputBAS line 374. Since these signals and data are inputted under timewisecontrol into the output BAS line 374, the time at which the signals anddata are placed on the output BAS line 374 need to be found out in orderto find out what signals or data are inputted into said output BAS line374.

A synchronization circuit 660 which receives the signal input from theBAS line 366 is provided to obtain such time.

While detailed circuit set up diagram of said synchronization circuit660 is shown in FIG. 82, what is shown as 700 in said drawing is a ringcounter. Said ring counter 700 may be made by such integrated circuitelement CD4035 as having its logic diagram shown in FIG. 38.

Since the BAS line 366 is inputted into the D terminal of the Flip-FlopF22 in synchronism with the timing pulse TB6, CALE signal placed on theBAS line 366 in synchronism with the timing pulse TB5 is detected atsaid Flip-Flop F22. The Q output of said Flip-Flop F22 is given to the Dterminal of the Flip-Flop F23 which is synchronized with the timingpulse TB0. The Q output of said Flip-Flop F23 will be inputted in theclock terminal CLK of said ring counter 700 through the AND gate AND66which has the timing pulse TB0 inputted therein. Said ring counter 700returns its Q0, Q3 outputs to J and K terminals through the AND gateAND67. Also, the Q0 output of said ring counter 700 is outputted at thesignal line (13) and at a same time is outputted at the signal line (14)through the OR gate OR27 which receives the input of the clock pulse CP,while the Q1 output is outputted at the signal line (15) through the ORgate OR26 which receives the input of the clock pulse CP, and Q3 outputis outputted at the signal line (16) through the OR gate OR25 whichreceives the input of the clock pulse CP.

Also the Q output of said Flip-Flop F23 is inputted into the S terminalof the Flip-Flop F23, while Q output of the same is outputted at thesignal line (17). Power up clear signal PUC is given to the R terminalof said Flip-Flop F24.

Also direct reset signal is inputted from the signal line (18) explainedlater to the direct reset terminal R of the Flip-Flop F23.

Explanations will be made on the function of the set up mentioned abovefollowing FIG. 83.

Now, when CALE signal which is synchronized with the timing pule TB5 isplaced on the BAS line 366, the Flip-Flop F22 which is synchronized withthe timing pulse TB6 is set and its Q output becomes "1". Since saidCALE signal is outputted for 4 words, said Flip-Flop F22 continues "1"output during the 4 words.

Since the Q output of said Flip-Flop F22 is inputted in the D terminalof the Flip-Flop F23 which is synchronized with the timing pulse TB0,said Flip-Flop F23 is set in synchronism with the up-rising of nexttiming pulse TB0, and its Q output becomes "1". Since said Flip-Flop F22is at set state during the 4 words, said Flip-Flop F23 also continuesset state for the 4 words similarly.

Since the Q output of said Flip-Flop F23 is inputted into the AND gateAND66 which has the timing pulse TB0 inputted therein, such signaloutput as synchronizing with TB0 will be issued from said AND gate AND66for 4 words after said Flip-Flop F23 is placed in set state.

Since the output of said AND gate AND66 is given to the clock terminalCLK of the ring counter 700, said ring counter 700 produceds suchoutputs as shown in FIG. 83 from Q0, Q1, Q2, Q3 output terminals insynchronism with each up-rising of the timing pulse TB0. Also, the Q0,Q1, Q2 outputs of said ring counter 700 are inputted in the AND gateAND67, and the output of said AND gate AND67 is inputted in the J and Kterminal for issuing count output from Q0 terminal at a time of countstarting. Also the output polarity of said ring counter 700 isordinarily "1" and is "0" at the time of count output because suchoutput polarity is obtained by grounding T/C terminal.

Therefore such signal output as becoming to have "0" level only for nextone word period after CALE signal is first detected will be produced atthe signal line (13).

Also such pulse outputs as having up-rising characteristics at eachup-rising time of the timing pulses TB0 to TB7 will be outputted fromthe OR gates OR14, OR15, OR16 as shown in FIG. 83 from the signal lines(25), (26), (27), respectively. Here, it is apparent from therelationship among the sending out times of various signals and datamentioned above that the down-rising output of the signal line (14)corresponds to the word time during which various signals are placed onthe output BAS line 366, and the down-rising output of the signal line(15) corresponds to the word time during which the shutter speed data TVis placed on the output BAS line 366, while the down-rising output ofthe signal line (16) corresponds to the word time during which controlaperture step number data AVs is placed on the output BAS line 366.

On the other hand, while the Flip-Flop F24 is set by the Q output of theFlip-Flop F23, the output signal from the Q terminal of the Flip-FlopF24 to the signal line (17) is used to prevent the action of the cameramechanism after shutter release from being done unless the firstoperation is completed. This Flip-Flop F24 receives the power up clearsignal PUC at its reset terminal R. Also this BAS line 366 is inputtedin the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F25 which is synchronized with thetiming pulse TB0, and this Flip-Flop F25 is used for detection of INTsignal placed on the BAS line 366 during the period of the timing pulseTB7, that is the signal to show that the A-D converter of the inputcontrol part 360 is in integration of inputted analog data, and its Qoutput is placed on the signal line (19).

While the Flip-Flop F23 of said synchronizing circuit 660 receives theinput of the direct reset signal from the signal line (18) at its directreset terminal R, this is for so prohibiting the setting action of theFlip-Flop F23 that the taking in of data, etc. into the output controlpart 364 will not be done at any time except the time before shutterrelease is done and the time during which a self-timer is in actionafter shutter release is done. This is to prevent the hindrance toproper exposure control action by inputting of such other data asreceiving the effect of diaphragm closing and mirror up particularlywhen TTL light measuring is done, after shutter release is done and eachmechanism of the camera device starts action.

The various signals and data placed on the output BAS line 366 areseparated under timewise judgement by the output from the abovementioned synchronization circuit 660 and the timing pulses TB0 to TB7,and are taken into such functional parts of said output control part 364as corresponding respectively.

The various signals in said output BAS line 366 will receive separationbased on the timing pulses TB0 to TB7 by the demultiplexer 610 and areaccumulated at the output control register 622.

The set up containing such demultiplexer 610 and the output controlregistor 622 has its detailed arrangements shown in FIG. 84, and theintegrated circuit element CD4015 having its logic diagram shown in FIG.62 is used as the demultiplexer 610, and two of the integrated circuitelement CD4035 having its logic diagram shown in FIG. 38 are used as theoutput control registor 622.

In such set up, the demultiplexer 610 receives the input of the outputof signal line (14) of the circuit 660 shown in FIG. 82 at tis clockterminal C and the output control registor 622 has the AND conditionsignal of the timing pulse TB1 and the output of the signal line (13) ofthe synchronization circuit 660 shown in FIG. 82 inputted in its clockterminal C through the AND gate AND69. That is as has been explainedeach signal of WNUP, TVFL, AVFL, EDSP, BDSP, EFDS, MASP is inputted inthe output BAS line 374 as shown in FIG. 81 in synchronism with the thetiming pulses TB1 to TB7 in the word time next to that when CALE signal,which is synchronized with the timing pulse TB5, is placed on the BASline 366, therefore the demultiplexer 610 takes in said various signalsthe output of the signal line (14) as timing pulse during said wordtime. As the output of the signal line (13) becomes from low level tohigh level the AND gate AND69 conducts the signal output beingsynchronized with the timing pulse TB1, therefore each output of Q01,Q11, Q21, Q31, Q02, Q12, Q22 of said demultiplexer 610 is taken in andaccumulated at the output control registor 622 from the D0 to D6terminals of said registor. As a reset each signal of MDSP, EFDS, BDSP,EDSP, AVFL, TVFL, WNUP is outputted from each output terminal of Q0 toQ6 of said output control registor 622.

On the other hand, each of the data of shutter speed TV, aperture valueAV, control diaphragm step number AVs being placed on the output BASline 374 will have different handling between the data for control ofeach mechanism of camera device and the data for display.

Now, explanations will be made on the taking in of the data for display.The data used for display in the output BAS line 374 are the two,shutter speed data TV and aperture value data AV. These signals arerounded off to the next higher integer by counting fractions of 0.5 andover as a whole number and disregarding the rest through the displaycontrol circuit 652, and are converted to such shape as suitable todisplay of the digital display device 402, also after being adjusted tosuch degree as reducing the intervals between data taking in foreliminating flickering to prevent the flickering of the digital displaydevice by the variation in sudden change in data, the display aperturevalue is taken in the aperture value display registor 648 while thedisplay shutter speed TVDS is taken in the shutter speed displayregistor 650 respectively based on the word time during which each ofthe data is placed on the output BAS line 374 and is memorized.

Detailed logic set up diagram for the data take in circuit for suchdisplay is shown in FIG. 85.

In said drawing, what is shown as 998 is a circuit for rounding off toround off the data inputted from the output BAS line 374 by countingfractions of 0.5 and over as a whole number and disregarding the rest,and is made by the integrated circuit element CD4032 (manufactured byRCA). Said integrated circuit element CD4032 is constituted three piecesof series adders having their block diagram shown in FIG. 86 and havingtheir logic diagram shown in FIG. 87, but in FIG. 85 only one piecethereof is shown. Said rounding off circuit 998 receives the output dataof the output BAS line 374 at its A₁ terminal, and receives the input ofthe timing pulse TB₁ at B1 terminal. Also it receives the input of thetiming pulse TB7 at the carry terminal CA.

When the data are inputted in the A₁ terminal from the output BAS line374 in such set up, the bit of 1/4 step accuracy is inputted with thetiming of TB₁, and the timing pulse TB₁ is inputted in B₁ terminal withsame timing as above. That is, "1" is added only the bit of 1/4 stepaccuracy, and if "1" is placed at said bit with 1/4 step accuracy, carrywill reach the bit with 1/2 step accuracy and carry will be done, alsowhen "0" is placed at the bit with 1/4 step accuracy of data, carry willnot be done to the bit with 1/2 step accuracy. Therefore, as long as theoutput data from the S terminal of said rounding off circuit 998 are soobserved as viewing the upper units than the bit with 1/2 step accuracy,said output data will become data with 1/2 step accuracy having roundingoff by counting fractions of 0.5 and over as a whole number anddisregarding the rest with the bit with 1/4 step accuracy.

As has been explained above the data converted to the data with 1/2 stepaccuracy suitable to display and outputted from its S terminal in saidrounding off circuit 998 are given to the D terminal at each of theaperture value display register 648 and the shutter speed displayregister 650. Also the judgement as to what the data being rounded offin said rounding off circuit 998 and converted to have 1/2 step accuracyis related needs to be done by timewise judgement, therefore each ofsaid registers 648, 650 takes in data corresponding thereto respectivelyfollowing the control pulse inputted in the clock terminal C thereof,respectively. Also said rounding off circuit 998 is reset by receivingthe input of the timing pulse TB7 at its carry terminal CA.

Said aperture display registor 648 receives the Q output of theFlip-Flop F27 and the input of OR condition of the clock pulse OPthrough the OR gate OR31 at its clock terminal C, while said shutterspeed display registor 650 receives the Q output of the Flip-Flop F26and the input of OR condition of the clock pulse CP through the OR gateOR32 at its clock terminal C. The Q output of said Flip-Flop F26 becomesD input of said Flip-Flop F27, while the output of the OR gate OR29 isreceived through the inverter INV25 at the D input of said Flip-FlopF26. On the other hand, the Q output of said Flip-Flop F27 is given tothe terminal S of the Flip-Flop F28, while its Q output is given to theOR gate OR28. Said OR gate OR28 receives the ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz fromthe signal line (20) connected with the signal source explained laterthrough the inverter INV24 on the other hand, and the output signal ofsaid OR gate OR28 is given to said OR gate OR29. Said OR gate OR29 onthe other hand receives the signal output from the signal line (13)which is the Q0 terminal output of the ring counter 700 shown in FIG.82. Also the ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz from said signal line (20) is givenalso to the reset terminal R of the Flip-Flop F28 through the OR gateOR30. Power up clear signal PUC is also inputted in the reset terminal Rof said Flip-Flop F28 through said OR gate OR30. On the other hand,power up clear signal PUC is inputted also in each directly resetterminal R of said Flip-Flops F26, F27.

In such set up, explanations will be made on its function following thetiming chart shown in FIG. 88. Now, when the 2 Hz signal being sent fromthe signal line (20) becomes to have high level, the output of theinverter INV24 becomes to have low level. Since the Flip-Flop F28 inthis state is in reset state and its Q output is "0", the output of theOR gate OR28 is "0" therefore the OR gate OR29 can output the Q0 outputof the ring counter 700 being inputted from the signal line (13), thatis the signal which is ordinarily "1" and becomes "0" only during nextone word of the CALE signal. Since the output of said OR gate OR29 isgiven to the D terminal of the Flip-Flop F26 which is synchronized withthe timing pulse TB0 through the inverter INV25, said Flip-Flop F26 isplaced in set state only during the period of next one word after "1"output is made from said inverter INV25 for the period of one word.Therefore, since the length of period during which said Flip-Flop F26 isset corresponds to the same during which the shutter speed data TV isplaced on the output BAS line 374, the display shutter speed TBDS fromsaid rounding off circuit 998 is taken in and memorized at said register650 by giving the clock pulse for data taking in to the shutter speeddisplay register 650 through the OR gate OR32 which receives the Qoutput of said Flip-Flop F26 and the input of the clock pulse CP. On theother hand, since the Q output of said Flip-Flop F26 is inputted in theD terminal of the Flip-Flop F26 being synchronized with the timing pulseTB0, said Flip-Flop F27 is placed in set state only during the period ofone word next to the one word during which said Flip-Flop F26 is set.Therefore since the length of period during which said Flip-Flop F26 isset corresponds to the length of period during which the aperture valuedata AV is placed on the output BAS line 374, the display aperture valueAVDS from said rounding off circuit 998 is taken in and memorized atsaid register 648 by giving the clock pulse for data taking in to theaperture value display register 648 through the OR gate OR31 whichreceives the Q output of said Flip-Flop F27 and the input of the clockpulse CP.

Also since the Q output of said Flip-Flop F27 is given to the setterminal of the Flip-Flop F28, said Flip-Flop F28 is also set along withthe setting of the Flip-Flop F27 and the Q output thereof becomes "1".Since said Q output is given to the OR gate OR28 making its output "1",the output of the OR gate OR28 becomes "1" and is given to the OR gateOR29. The signal from the signal line (13) does not pass through OR gateOR29 and both Flip-Flops F26, F27 retain their reset state, thereforerenewal of taking in of corresponding data will not be done in theshutter speed display register 650 and the aperture value displayregister 648.

Since said Flip-Flop F28 has the inversion signal of the 2 Hz signalfrom the signal line (20) by the inverter INV24 in putted thereinthrough the OR gate OR30, it is reset as said 2 Hz signal becomes tohave low level. On the other hand, since said 2 Hz signal becoming tohave low level gives "1" signal to said OR gate OR28 through theinverter INV24, making its output "1", it keep the state in which thesignal from the signal line (13) can not be accepted.

Next, since the output of said Flip-Flop F28 becomes "0" when the 2 Hzsignal from the signal line (20) becomes to have high level, it isplaced in a state in which the signal from the signal line (13) can notbe accepted. Therefore new display shutter speed TVDS will be tanken inand memorized at the shutter speed display register 650 while newdisplay aperture value AVDS will be taken in and memorized at theaperture value display register 648 in a method being similar to thatmentioned above.

Since both shutter speed and aperture value will have then data fordisplay taken in every 2 Hz by the above mentioned set up, tickering orerror in reading out by variation in delicate data within the digitaldisplay device 402 can be prevented, thus very effective method of datataking in or display can be provided for digital display system.

As has been mentioned above the display aperture value AVDS and displayshutter speed TVDS which are taken in as the data with 1/2 step accuracywith 2 Hz interval into the aperture value display register 648 and theshutter speed display register 650, after being rounded off, will bedisplayed at the digital display device 402 through the next displaycontrol circuit 624 and the display driver 656.

Said display control circuit 624 is not to conduct merely the display ofaperture value or shutter speed, instead it needs to conduct the displayof signs and flickering control for display as shown in FIG. 10corresponding to the operating mode and working state of the cameradevice. Therefore various signals, TVFL, AVFL, EDSP, BDSP, EFDS, MDSP,etc. being taken in and accumulated at said output control register 622from the output BAS line 374 will have bearings.

Said display control circuit 624 has its detailed block diagram shown inFIG. 89, and in said drawing what is identified as 702 is a decoder ROMfor aperture value display and is to conduct the display of aperturevalue and such signs as "oP", "cL", "oo", "EE", etc. for the seconddisplay part 250 of the display device within the finder shown in FIG.9, while 704 is a decoder ROM for shutter speed display to conduct thedisplay of the shutter speed for a first display part 244, and 706 showsa decoder ROM for sign display to conduct display of such signs as"EEEE", "buLb", "bEF", "EF", etc. for the first display part 244.

While the digital display device 402 has dynamic driving given theretobased on such timing pulse TB1 to TB6 as mentioned before, the detailsof the same will be explained following the plan of the digital displaydevice shown in FIG. 90.

In said drawing, the first display part 244 consists of a displayelement 708 for fraction display, four 7 segment display elements 710,714 for displaying shutter speed and signs, and a decimal point displayelement 712. And a 7 segment display element 718 is display driven withthe timing of the timing pulse TB3, and a 7 segment display element 716is display driven with the timing of the timing pulse TB4, while the 7segment display element 714 and the fraction display element 708 aredisplay driven with the timing of the timing pulse TB5, and the 7segment display element 710 and the decimal point display element 712are display driven with the timing of the timing pulse TB6.

Also the second display part 250 in the same drawing consists of 7segment display elements 720, 724 and a decimal point display element722, while a third display part 252 consists of a display element 726for displaying "M". Said 7 segment display elements 724 and the "M"display element 726 are display driven with the timing of the timingpulse TB1, and the 7 segment display element 720 and the decimal pointdisplay element 722 are display driven with the timing of the timingpulse TB2.

Therefore, this digital display device 402 can have dynamic drivinggiven thereto by giving time sharing display signals being synchronizedwith the timing pulses TB0 to TB7 in 7 lines and in parallel with eachof said 7 segment display elements 710, 714, 716, 718, 720, 724 and bygiving such display signals as being synchronized to each of the timingpulses TB1, TB2, TB6, TB5, respectively in 1 line to said "M" displayelement 726, the decimal point display elements 722, 712 and thefraction display element 708. As for the indicator 402, R7A-122-9(manufactured by BOW RAR) may be used.

Said aperture value display decoder ROM702 consists of integratedcircuit element 1072A having such set up as having its block diagramshown in FIG. 68, and its input terminal A0 receives the input of thetiming pulse TB2, also the input of the aperture value display register648 is received at the input terminals A1 to A6 thereof, while the inputof EDSP signal from said output control register 622 is received by theinput terminal A7 thereof. Also the output of the NOR gate NOR3 whichreceives the inputs of the timing pulses TB1, TB2 is inputted into theCS terminal thereof through the OR gate OR40.

Therefore, said aperture value display decoder ROM702 has its outputrestrained except at least with the timing of TB2, TB2. Therefore, theinput at its A0 terminal will be "0" with the timing of TB1, and the A0terminal input thereof with the timing of TB2 will be "1". Thus, theoutput of 8 lines for display driving of the 7 segment display element724, 7 segment display element 720, and the decimal point displayelement 722 of the digital display device 402 will be done from theoutput terminals D0 to D7 with each of the timings of the timing pulsesTB1, TB2, corresponding to the input data from the aperture valuedisplay register 648.

Now the output of 7 lines, D0 to D6 of said decoder ROM702 will be usedfor segment selection of said 7 segment display elements 720, 724, whilethe output of 1 line, D7 of said decoder ROM702 will be used forselected driving of said decimal point display element.

Said shutter speed display decoder ROM704 consists of integrated circuitelement 1702A having such set up as shown in the block diagram of FIG.68, and the output of the OR gate OR38 which receives the inputs of thetiming pulses TB4, TB6 is received at the input terminal A0 thereof,while the output of the OR gate OR39 which receives the inputs of thetiming pulses TB5, TB6 is received at the input terminal A1. Also theoutput of the shutter speed display register 650 is received at theinput terminals A2 to A7 thereof. And the output of the NOR gate NOR3which receives the inputs of the timing pulses TB1, TB2 is received atthe CS terminal thereof through the inverter INV34, OR gate OR42 and ORgate OR43. Therefore, said shutter speed display decoder ROM704 has itsoutput restrained at least in the timing of TB1 and TB2. Therefore, theoutput of said decoder ROM704 will have meaning at the timings of TB3 toTB6, and when the timing pulses TB4, TB5, TB6 are not inputted, that isat a timing of TB3, the inputs at the A0, A1 terminals thereof will bothbecome "0", and when the timing pulse TB4 is inputted the input at theA0 terminal only thereof becomes 1", also when the timing pulse TB5 isinputted the input as the A1 terminal only thereof will become "1",while when the timing pulse TB6 is inputted, the inputs at both A0 andA1 terminals thereof become "1". Thus corresponding to the output fromthe shutter speed display register 650, outputs of 8 lines for displaydriving of the 7 segment display element 718, 7 segment display element716, 7 segment display element 714, fraction display element 708, 7segment display element 710 and decimal point display element 712 of thedigital display device 402 will be issued from the output terminals D0to D7 with each of the timings of the timing pulses TB3 to TB6. Also the7 line outputs, D0 to D6 of said decoder ROM704 will be used for segmentselection for said 7 segment display elements 710, 714, 716, 718, whilethe 1 line output D7 of said decoder ROM702 will be used for selecteddriving of said fraction display element 708 and said decimal pointdisplay element 722.

The above mentioned display decoder ROM706 consists of integratedcircuit elements 1702A having such set up as shown in the block diagramof FIG. 68, and the inputs of the timing pulses TB4, TB6 are received atthe input terminal A0 thereof through said OR gate OR38, while theinputs of the timing pulses TB5, TB6 are received at the input terminalA1 thereof through said OR gate OR39. Also the signals to direct thedisplay of "EF", "bEF", "buLb", "EEEE" are inputted respectively in theinput terminals A4 to A6. Further, the output of the NOR gate NOR3 whichreceives the inputs of the timing pulses TB1, TB2 is inputted in the CSterminal thereof through the inverter INV34, OR gate OR41. Thereforesaid shutter speed display decoder ROM706 has its output restrained atleast under the timings of TB1, TB2. Thus the output of said decoderROM706 will have meanings at the timings of TB3 to TB6, and now when thetiming pulses TB4, TB5, TB6 are all not inputted that is at the timingof TB3, both inputs at A0, A1 terminals thereof become "0" , while whenthe timing pulse TB4 is inputted the A0 terminal input only thereof willbecome "1". And when the timing pulse TB5 is inputted, the A1 terminalinput only thereof become "1", while when the timing pulse TB6 isinputted, the inputs at both A0, A1 terminals thereof become "1". Thussaid decoder ROM706 conducts the output of 7 lines for display drivingof the 7 segment display element 718, 7 segment display element 716, 7segment display element 714, 7 segment display element 710 respectivelyof the digital display device 402 from the output terminals D0 to D6with each of the timings of the timing pulses TB3 to TB6, correspondingto the inputs at A4 to A7 terminals thereof. The 7 line outputs, D0 toD6 of said decoder ROM706 will be used for segment selection for said 7segment display elements, 710, 714, 716, 718.

Now each of the D0 to D6 outputs of each of said decoder ROMs 702, 704,706 is integrated respectively and is given to the display drivingcircuit 656 as the 7 line signal as a whole. Also each of the outputs D7of said decoder ROMs 702, 704 is united to one and is given to saiddisplay driving circuit 656 through the OR gate OR37. As for theindication driving circuit 656, two of 75491 (manufactured by TI) may beused.

On the other hand, the signal to display the "M" sign display element726 can be obtained by outputting MDSP signal by the AND gate AND74 insynchronism with the timing pulse TB1. The output of said AND gate AND74is given to said display driving circuit 656 together with each of D7outputs of the decoder ROMs 702, 704 through the OR gate OR37.

Also said decoder ROMs, 702, 704, 706 have their outputs restrained byvarious factors. Especially each of the outputs of the decoder ROMs 704and 706 is outputted in synchronism with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6,either one thereof needs to be selected for output. Also, when thedisplay data for shatter speed needs to be flickered, the output of thedecoder ROM704 needs to be controlled with a certain cycle, and when thedisplay data for aperture value needs to be flickered, and output of thedecoder ROM702 needs to be controlled with a certain cycle. Further,when the display "EE EEEE" for error warning needs to be flickered, theoutput of the decoder ROMs 702, 706 need to be controlled with a certaincycle, and when the input analog data are integrated in the A-Dconverter at the input control part 360, that is when INT signal isinputted there is such fear that the emittance of light by the digitaldisplay devide 402 within a finder badly affects the TTL light measuringsystem, therefore it is necessary to control the outputs of all decoderROMs 702, 704, 706 to make the digital display device 402 inactive.Further when the camera device mechanism is conducting action forexposure there is such fear that emittance of light by the digitaldisplay device 402 within a finder badly affects exposure, and toprevent meaningless consumption of battery by unnecessary action of thedigital display device 402 during the operation of a self-timer or whenphotographing is done with long exposure time, it is necessary toconduct output control of all decoder ROMs, 702, 704, 706 to make thedigital display device inactive.

In FIG. 89, while signal input is made to the NOR gate NOR5 from thesignal line (21), the signal which becomes "1" before the exposurecontrol mechanism of the camera device starts action will be inputtedfrom the signal line (21), and the signal which becomes "1" after theexposure control mechanism of the camera device completes action will beinputted from the signal line (22). Therefore the signal output whichbecomes "1" when the exposure control mechanism of the camera device isin action will be made from said NOR gate NOR5. Said output of the NORgate NOR5 is given to the OR gate OR34. On the other hand the INT signalshowing that integration is in progress will be inputted from the signalline (19) into said OR gate. Therefore, the output of said OR gate OR34performs a function as a blanking signal to eliminate all of thedisplays by the digital display device 402. Since the output of said ORgate OR34 is inverted from the OR gate OR35 by the inverter INV27 and isgiven to the AND gate AND74 as "0" signal, the AND gate AND74 will haveits output controlled, thus blanking will be done on the selectiondisplay signal for "M" indication.

On the other hand, since the output of said OR gate OR35 is given to theCS terminal of the decoder ROM702 through the OR gate OR40, and to theCS terminal of the decoder ROM704 through the OR gates OR42, OR43,further to the CS terminal of the decoder ROM706 through the OR gatesOR42, OR43, therefore blanking will be done over each of the outputs ofsaid decoder ROMs 702, 704, 706, thus the display of the digital displaydevice 402 will be controlled.

Now, the block pulse CP is given to the OR gate OR35, and at a time whenthe output of said OR gate OR34 is "0", such signal as beingsynchronized with the clock pulse CP is always outputted, and the signalbeing synchronized with the clock pulse CP will be used for issuing theblanking so that unnecessary data display will not be made at thedigital display device 402 when the output content of each of thedecoder ROMs 702, 704, 706 varies.

Now, when the digital display part 402 is made to conduct the display ofshutter speed at the first display part 244, and to conduct the displayof aperture value or such signs as "cL", "oP", "oo" etc. at its seconddisplay part 250, further if necessary to conduct "M" display at itsthird display part 252, BDSP signal, EDSP signal, EFDS signal arenaturally "0", therefore blanking signal is impressed on the CS terminalof the decoder ROM 702 at other time than TB1 and TB2 as mentioned aboveand blanking signal is impressed to the CS signal of the decoder ROM704with the timing of TB1 and TB2 as has been mentioned above. On the otherhand, the output signal of the AND gate AND73 which receives the inputof BDSP signal, EDSP signal and EFDS signal is inputted in the CSterminal of said decoder ROM706, thus the output of the NOR gate NOR4what has its output becoming "1" is given as blanking signal through theOR gate OR41, thus the output of this decoder ROM76 is controlled.

Therefore, said digital display device 402 makes display of shutterspeed at its first display part 244 based on the output from the decoderROMs 702, 704 and makes display of aperture value or of such signs as"cL", "oP", "oo", etc. at its second display part 250, further ifnecessary makes "M" display at its third display part 252.

While it has been already mentioned that "1" is outputted as AVFL signalfor flickering the display of aperture value when the aperture valueobtained as a result of operation exceeds the limit controllable by thelens device 2 in such display state, in this case said AVFL signal isgiven to the NAND gate NAND3 which has ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz giventhereto, from the signal line (20) having the ON-OFF signal of 2 Hzplaced thereon, through the inverter INV33, therefore, the ON-OFF signalof 2 Hz is outputted from said NAND gate NAND3 and is inputted in theNAND gate NAND4. On the other hand, while said NAND gate NAND4 receivesthe input of the NAND gate NAND2, since the EDSP signal out of theinputs to said NAND gate NAND3 is "0", the output thereof is "1",therefore said NAND gate NAND4 conducts output of ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz.The output of said NAND gate NAND4 is inputted in the CS terminal of thedecoder ROM702 and places blanking with 2 Hz on the output of said ROM.Therefore, the aperture value display made at the second display part250 of the digital display device 402 by said decoder ROM702 will beflickered with 2 Hz.

Also, while it has already been explained before that when the shutterspeed obtained as a result of operation exceeds the limit which can becontrolled with the body 4, "1" is outputted as TVFL signal to flickerthe display of shutter speed, in this case said TVFL signal is given tothe AND gate AND72 to which the ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz is given throughthe inverter INV33 from the signal line (20) on which the ON-OFF signalof 2 Hz is placed, therefore the ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz will be outputtedfrom this AND gate AND72. The output of said AND gate AND72 is inputtedin the CS terminal of the decoder ROM704 through the OR gate OR43,placing the blanking with 2 Hz on the output of said ROM. Therefore, theshutter speed display displayed at first display part 244 of the digitaldisplay device 402 is flickered with said decoder ROM704.

Next, while it has been mentioned before that "1" signal is outputted asEFDS signal from the central control part when the charging completionsignal is given to the input control part 360 in a speedlightphotographing mode, at this time the display of "EF" showing the shutterspeed controlled and charging completion is made at the first displaypart as shown in FIGS. 10(c), (d).

Also the shutter speed controlled is displayed by the fraction displayelement 708, the 7 segment display elements 710, 714 and the decimalpoint display element 712, wherein the decoder ROM704 and the timingpulses TB5, TB6 are related, also "EF" display to show chargingcompletion is done by the 7 segment display elements 716, 718, whereinthe decoder ROM706 and the timing pulses TB3, TB4 are related.

Now, when "1" as EFDS signal is inputted in the A4 terminal of thedecoder ROM706 shown in FIG. 89, and the signal outputted from saiddecoder ROM706 to between the timing pulses TB3, TB4 is made "EF"display at the 7 segment display elements 716, 718 at the first displaypart.

On the other hand, the signal for the display of the shutter speed willbe made to the decoder ROM704 from the shutter speed display register650. Also, since the shutter speed at this time is slower than theshutter speed synchronized with speedlight (for example 1/60 second), itwill not exceed the scope of display by the 7 segment display elements710 and 714 at the first display part.

Since EFDS signal is inputted in the AND gate AND73 in such state, saidAND gate AND73 receives the input of the timing pulses TB3, TB4 throughthe OR gate OR44, therefore said AND gate AND73 is to make "1" outputwith the timing of TB3, TB4. Since said "1" output is inputted in theNOR gate NOR4 making its output "0", blanking will be placed only forthe timing of TB3, TB4 on the decoder ROM704 which has the output ofsaid NOR gate NOR4 inputted in the CS terminal through the OR gate OR43after being inverted through the inverter INV32, also the decoder ROM706which has the output of said NOR gate NOR4 inputted in the CS terminalthrough the OR gate OR41 will have blanking placed thereon during theperiod of timing other than TB3, TB4 that is for the timing of TB5, TB6.Therefore, in a speedlight photographing mode the display of shutterspeed and "EE" will be made on the first display part 244 of the digitaldisplay device. On the other hand, at the second display part 250 ofsaid digital display device 402, the output of aperture value data willbe made from the aperture value display registor 648 unless thespeedlight is at total light emitting mode, and the signal output of thedisplay aperture value will be made from the decoder ROM702 followingsaid data, and the aperture value display will be made. Also "M" displaywill be made as MDSP signal is made as "1" at the third display part 252of the digital display device 402.

While it has been explained before that when bulb is selected as shutterspeed, "1" signal is outputted as BDSP signal, at this time display of"buLb" will be made at the first display part as shown in FIG. 10(b).While this "1" signal is inputted in the AND gates AND70, AND71, saidAND gate AND70 has EFDS signal inputted therein through the inverterINV30, while said AND gate AND71 and EFDS signal directly inputtedtherein, therefore, as long as EFDS signal is "0", the output of the ANDgate AND70 will become "1" and is inputted into the input terminal A6 ofthe decoder ROM706. As a result signal output is made from said decoderROM706 to make the display of "buLb" at the first display part 244 ofthe digital display part 402. Since BDSP signal is inputted in the NORgate NOR4 under said state, making its output "0", the decoder ROM704,which has the output of said NOR gate NOR4 inputted into the CS terminalthrough the OR gate OR43 after being inverted through the inverterINV32, wil have blanking placed thereon, while the decoder ROM706, whichhas the output of said NOR gate NOR4 inputted in the CS terminal throughthe OR gate OR41, will make the signal output for displaying "buLb".Therefore the first display part 244 of the digital display device 402will make the display of "buLb" in a bulb photographing mode. On theother hand the fully opened aperture value of the lens device 2 usedwill be displayed at the second display part 250 of said digital displaydevice 402, following the output signal from the aperture displayregister 648 as long as MDSP signal is not "1", and if MDSP signal is"1", the display of aperture value will not be made, instead the displayof "M" will be made at the third display part 252. Also this is as shownin FIG. 10(b).

While it has been already explained above that when bulb is selected asshutter speed, "1" signal is outputted as EFDS signal and as BDSPsignal, respectively, the display of "bEF" will be made at the firstdisplay part as shown in FIGS. 10(c), (d). When "1" is inputted as EFDSsignal and BDSP signal, the output of the AND gate AND71 which receivesboth inputs will become "1" and is inputted in the A5 terminal of thedecoder ROM706. As a result signal output will be made from said decoderROM706 to make the display of "buLb" at the first display part 244 ofthe digital display device 402. Since the BDSP signal is inputted in theNOR gate NOR4 under such state, making its output "0", the decoderROM704, which has the output of the NOR gate NOR4 inputted in the CSterminal through the OR gate OR43 after being inverted through theinverter INV32, will have blanking placed thereon, while the decoderROM706, which has the output of the NOR gate NOR4 inputted in the CSterminal through the OR gate OR41, will make the signal output fordisplaying "bEF". Thus the display of "bEF" will be made at the firstdisplay part 244 of the digital display device 402 in speedlightphotographing mode and under bulb photographing mode. On the other handthe output of aperture value data will be made at the second displaypart 250 of the digital display device 402 from the aperture valuedisplay register 648 as long as the speedlight is not under total lightemitting mode, and the signal output for display aperture value will bemade from the decoder ROM702 following said data, thus aperture valuedisplay will be made. Also "M" display will be made at the third displaypart 252 of the digital display device 402 as long as MDSP signalbecomes "1".

Also when "1" signal is inputted as EDSP signal, the flickering displayof "EEEE EE" will be made at the first and second display parts 244, 250of the digital display device.

Thus, when "1" signal is inputted as EDSP signal, EDSP signal isinputted in the A7 terminal of the decoder ROM702 for having the displayof "EE" made, and at a same time EDSP signal is inputted in the A7 inputterminal of the decoder ROM706 to make the signal output for displaying"EEEE". On the other hand since said EDSP signal is given to the NANDgate NAND2 which has the ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz given thereto through theinverter INV33 from the signal line (20) having the ON-OFF signal of 2Hz placed thereon, the ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz is outputted from said NANDgate NAND2 and is inputted in the NAND gate NAND4. On the other hand,while said NAND gate NAND4 receives the input of the NAND gate NAND3,the output of said NAND gate NAND3 is "1" as long as the AVFL out of theinputs thereinto is "0", therefore said NAND gate NAND4 makes ON-OFFsignal output of 2 Hz, and said signal is inputted in the CS terminal ofthe decoder ROM702 through the OR gate OR40, placing the blanking overthe output of said ROM 702 with 2 Hz. Therefore, the "EE" display placedat the second display part of the digital display device 402 by saiddecoder ROM702 will be flickered with 2 Hz. Also the ON-OFF signal of 2Hz, being the output of said NAND gate NAND2 is inverted through theinverter INV28 and has phase matched with that of the ON-OFF signal of 2Hz which is the output of said NAND gate NAND4, then is inputted in theCS terminal of the decoder ROM706, placing the blanking with 2 Hz overthe output of said ROM706. Therefore the "EEEE" display placed at thefirst display part 244 of the digital display device 402 by said decoderROM706 will be flickered with 2 Hz. On the other hand since said EDSPsignal is inputted in the NOR gate NOR4, said NOR gate NOR4 will make"0" output, and the decoder ROM704, which has the "0" output of the NORgate NOR4 inputted in its CS terminal through the OR gate OR43 afterbeing inverted through the inverter INV32, will have its outputcompletely controlled. As has been mentioned above when "1" signal isinputted as EDSP signal the flickering display with 2 Hz intervals of"EEEE EE" will be made at the digital display device 402.

Next, detailed explanations will be made on how the taking in of datafor control is made from the output BAS line 374.

While the data for control being placed on the output BAS line 374 arethe data TV for shutter speed control and the data AVs for control ofdiaphragm closing step number, said shutter speed control data TV isplaced on the output BAS line 374 in the next one word period after theCALE signal is placed on the BAS line 366 as the data of 1/8 stepaccuracy being synchronized with the timing pulse TB0 to TB7 asmentioned above. Also said diaphragm closing step number control dataAVs is, as mentioned before, placed on the output BAS line 374 in oneword period which is the third word after the CALE signal is placed onthe BAS line 366 as the data with 1/8 step accuracy being synchronizedwith the timing pulses TB0 to TB7. That is, said shutter speed controldata TV is synchronized with the output of the output signal line (15)of the synchronization circuit 660 shown in FIG. 82, while the diaphragmclosing step number control data AVs is synchronized with the output ofthe signal line (16). That is, while the shutter speed control data TVmay be taken in from the output BAS line 374 in synchronism with theoutput of said signal line (15), since said shutter speed control dataTV corresponds to APEX value, that is the logarithmically compressedvalue of reciprocal of actual shutter time, some operation step will beneeded to obtain the data corresponding to actual shutter time from theshutter speed data TV corresponding to APEX value. That is, in order tomake said shutter speed data as the signal with such size ascorresponding to actual shutter time, it is necessary to substract saidshutter time control data from the APEX value of the reference shutterspeed. The data obtained from said subtraction corresponds to the stepnumber corresponding to the APEX value of controlled shutter time, saidactual time can be obtained by exponentially expanding thus obtaineddata based on the standard shutter speed. As has been mentioned above inorder to obtain actual time from such shutter speed as corresponding toAPEX it is necessary to subtract the shutter speed data TV from thestandard shutter speed, and an operation circuit 612 is provided forthat end.

As has been mentioned above the controlled shutter speed data TVsobtained through the operation circuit 612 is inputted in the shuttertime control registers 614 and 626, and each of said registers 614, 626separates said shutter time control data TV from the output BAS line 374and takes in and accumulates the same based on the control signal todesignate the taking in time of shutter speed data from saidsynchronization circuit 660. Here, said shutter time control register614 is provided for memorizing the interger part of said shutter timedata TV, while said shutter control register 626 is provided formemorizing the fraction part of said shutter time data TVs.

On the other hand, the diaphragm closing step number control data AVsmay be taken in from the output BAS line 374 in synchronism with theoutput of said signal line (16), while said diaphragm closing stepnumber control data AVs is separated from the output BAS line 374 and istaken in and memorized at the diaphragm closing step number controlregister 628 based on the control signal to designate the taking in timeof said data AVs from said synchronization circuit 660.

The set up to take in the above mentioned data for control data TV anddiaphragm closing step number control data AVs has its detailed logicdiagram shown in FIG. 91.

As being apparent from FIG. 91 the shutter time control registers 614and 626 are concentrated in the integrated circuit element CD4015 whichuses the output of the signal line (15) shown in FIG. 82, while thediaphragm closing step number control register 628 is made of theintegrated circuit element CD4015 which uses the output of the signalline (16) shown in FIG. 82 as clock terminal C input.

Said integrated circuit element CD4015 has its detailed logic diagramshown in FIG. 62.

In the set up shown in FIG. 91, a well known subtraction circuit is madeof AND gates AND 75, AND76, AND77, AND78, OR gates OR45, OR46 EXCLUSIVEOR gates EX4, EX5, inverter INV35, Flip-Flop F29, NOR gate NOR5, and thedata being inputted in the output BAS line 374 in synchronism with thetiming pulses TB0 to TB7 are subtracted from the data inputted in theNOR gate NOR5 in synchronism with the timing pulses TB0 to TB7, then theresult thereof is outputted from the EXCLUSIVE OR gate EX5 insynchronism with the timing pulses TB0 to TB7. Here, the timing pulseTB9 is inputted in the AND gate AND78 through the inverter INV35 toprevent the carry generated at the last stage of operation forpreventing the jumping in of the carry into the operation in the nextTB0 to TB7.

While APEX equivalent value of shutter time which constitutes thestandard for shutter time control will be inputted in the NOR gate NOR5,since the maximum speed of 1/2000 second is used as the standard shuttertime in this example, such binary code datum as corresponding to theshutter time for 1/2000 second will be inputted in the NOR gate NOR5.Said datum is, as will be shown later shown also, "10101000", thus whenthis datum is synchronized with the timing pulses TB0 to TB7, "1" inputwill be given to said NOR gate NOR5 with the timing pulses TB7, TB5,TB3. To realize such set up, in this example, the input with the timingpulses or TB3, TB5, TB7 is made to said NOR gate NOR5.

While the output data from the EXCLUSIVE OR gate EX5 of the subtractioncircuit having the above mentioned set up will be given to the inputterminal D of the shutter time control registors 614+626, it is notunknown whether said data are actually corresponding to the controlledshutter time TV or not. Therefore, in this example said shutter timecontrol registors 614+626 distinguish the shutter time control data TVout of the outputs of said subtraction circuit 612 and take in andaccumulate the same by inputting the signal outputted from the outputsignal line (15) of said synchronization circuit 660 in the clockterminal of said registors 614+626 in same word time as that the data TVon the shutter speed is placed on the output BAS line 374.

The shutter time control data TV are outputted in parallel from upperunit to lower unit out of each terminal of Q0 to Q7 of said shutter timecontrol registors 614+626 through the above mentioned procedure, whereinQ0 to Q4 outputs thereof correspond to integer part while Q5 to Q7correspond to fraction part.

On the other hand, while the diaphragm closing step number controlregister 628 receives the output BAS line 374 at the input terminal D,the signal outputted from the output signal line (16) of saidsynchronization circuit 660 is inputted in the clock terminal of saidregister with same word time as that the diaphragm closing step numbercontrol data AVs are placed on the output BAS line 374, therefore saidregister 628 distinguishes the diaphragm closing step number controldata AVs out of the data of said output BAS line 374 and take in andaccumulate the same. The diaphragm closing step number control data AVswill be outputted in parallel from upper unit to lower unit out of eachoutput terminal of Q0 to Q7 of said diaphragm closing step numbercontrol register 628 through the above mentioned procedure.

As has been mentioned above the exposure control action at the mechanismpart 358 of this camera system will be done based on the shutter timecontrol data TV accumulated at the shutter time control registers614+626 and the diaphragm closing step number control data AVsaccumulated at the diaphragm closing step number control register 528,and now explanations will be made on the camera mechanism part 358 andthe functional sequence thereof.

While it has been explained before that this camera system has itsaction controlled through the three electro-magnetic mechanicalconversion means that is the shutter release means 396, the diaphragmcontrol means 398 and the shutter speed control means 400 provided atthe mechanical part 358, now explanations will be made on the action ofeach control means mentioned.

Major portion of the mechanism of this camera system is not different atall from conventional camera mechanism.

Said shutter release means 396 is an electro-magnetic solenoid shown inGerman Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2,461,151, linked with a triggermechanism which runs the mechanical sequence of the camera device bybeing electrified for a certain period of time, and by power supply inpulse shape to this electro-magnetic solenoid such mechanical sequencemechanisms as start to running of AE lever 94 for presetting theaperture value from the body 4 side, diaphragm closing driving of thelens device 2, jump up of a mirror, start of leading screen of a focalplane shutter.

Also said diaphragm closing control means 398 is an electro-magneticsolenoid shown in German Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2,461,151 tobias the clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 to clamp releasing sideby being electrified, and by power supply to said electro-magneticsolenoid said AE lever 94 can make running action in a clamp releasedstate, and is clamped by suspension of power supply. In such mechanismbefore the camera mechanism starts running of mechanical sequence, saiddiaphragm control means 398 is electrified to retain the clampingmechanism of the AE lever 94 at a clamp releasing side to place the AElever 94 in a state wherein it can start running along with the start ofrunning of mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism.

Next, when the AE lever 94 start running following the mechanicalsequence the amount of its run is detected and the clamping mechanism ofsaid AE layer 94 is returned to clamping position by suspending powersupply to said diaphragm control means 398 as said amount of run reachesa prescribed value to clamp said AE lever 94. The aperture value of thelens device 2 can be preset as mentioned above, and this has beenexplained before.

Also said shutter speed control means 400 is an electro-magneticsolenoid shown in German Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2,461,151, tocontrol the start of running of the follower screen of a focal planeshutter by being electrified, and by power supply to thiselectro-magnetic solenoid said shutter follower screen will be placed ina state wherein its running is restrained while the restraining of therunning of said shutter follower screen is released by suspension ofpower supply. In such set up at a same time as the start of running ofmechanical sequence of said camera mechanism said shutter speed controlmeans 400 is electrified to restrain the running of the shutter followerscreen, and after said shutter follower screen runs, time counting isstarted and as the time counted thereby reaches a prescribed value thepower supply to said shutter speed control means 400 is stopped, therebyreleasing the restraining of the running of the shutter follower screento have the shutter follower screen start running, thus the control ofexposure time can be effected.

Also when the running of the shutter follower screen is completed themechanical sequence mechanism performs return action for the mirror andthe diaphragm closure driving lever 98. etc.

Said shutter release means 396, diaphragm control means 398, shutterspeed control means 400 need to have their operation timing andfunctioning time precisely controlled, and for that end the signal forprecise sequence control obtained, under various conditions will beneeded, and a control signal generation circuit 646 is provided for thatpurpose. Driving control signal will be given from said control signalgeneration circuit 646 to said shutter release means 396, diaphragmcontrol means 398 and shutter speed control means 400 with such timingas having proper exposure control action and for proper length of time,and said control timing as well as time are made based on the operatingtime of a self-timer, the timing by which the AE lever 94 runs throughthe diaphragm closing step numbers accumulated in the diaphragm closingstep number control register 628, the timing at which the actual timecorresponding to the shutter time data accumulated at the shutter timecontrol registers 614, 626 passes, and the time to compensate themechanical delay of mechanical sequence mechanism, etc.

The output data of said shutter time control register 626 and the outputdata of said diaphragm closing step number control register 628 areinputted in the data selecter 632 and are given in the down counter 642selectively based on the instruction from said control signal generationcircuit 646.

On the other hand, the output data of said shutter time control register614 and the output data of a constant generation circuit 616 provided togenerate such constant data as corresponding to the time for varioustimewise control are inputted in the select-gate 618 and are givenselectively to the frequency dividing circuit 620 based on theinstruction from said control signal generation circuit 646.

Also said down counter 642 has the pulse signal FPC which is inputtedalong with the running of the AE lever 94 and the output pulse signal ofsaid frequency dividing circuit 620 inputted in the clock terminalthereof through the select-gate 640, and the data inputted from saiddata selector 632 are subtraction counted based on the pulses beinginputted through said select gate 640, then the carry generated as aresult of such subtraction count is given to said control signalgeneration circuit 646.

Now, when diaphragm closing step number control is done in such set upthe diaphragm closing step number control data AVs is given from saiddiaphragm closing step number control registor 628 to the down counter642 through said data selector 232. On the other hand, the pulse signalFPC which is outputted corresponding to the amount of run by the AElever 94 is inputted through the select gate 640 to the clock terminalof the down counter 642.

When the AE lever 94 runs at this time the diaphragm closing step numbercontrol data AVs are subtracted by said pulse signal FPC in the downcounter 642. When carry in outputted from said down counter 642 throughsuch procedure, said carry is to show that the number of input pulses ofthe pulse signal FP matches with said diaphragm closing step numbercontrol data AVs and show that the position to which the AE lever 94runs at that time is the preset position for the diaphragm closing stepnumber of the lens device 2. Therefore, the control signal generationmeans 646 in which said carry is inputted clamps said AE lever 94through said diaphragm control means 398, thereby the diaphragm closingstep number of the lens device 2 can be preset to the same value as thatof said diaphragm closing step number control data AVs.

When shutter time control is done, the data for below the decimal pointout of the shutter time control data TV will be given from the shuttertime control registor 626 to the counter 640 through said data selector.Said down counter 642 adds "1" to said data below decimal point makingit as the data being eight folded, then said data are taken in. On theother hand the output pulse of said frequency dividing circuit 620 isinputted in the clock terminal of said down counter 642 through saidselect gate 640. At this time the frequency dividing circuit 620 takesin the data for integer part out of the shutter time control data TVthrough the select gate 618 out of said shutter time control registor614, then frequency divide and pulse output the same by the pulse signalof 1/8 of the standard time, wherein the data taken in said down counter642 are subtracted based on the output pulse of said frequency dividingcircuit 620. When carry is outputted from said down counter 642 throughthe above mentioned procedure, said carry is to show that the outputpulse number of said frequency dividing circuit 620 matches with thedata relating to the shutter time control below the decimal point, andto show that the actual time corresponding to said shutter time controldata.

Therefore, the control signal generation means 646 in which said carryis inputted starts the running of the shutter follower screen throughsaid shutter speed control means 400, thereby the shutter time can becontrolled to such actual time as corresponding to said shutter timecontrol data TV.

Now further detailed explanations will be made on the shutter timecontrol. Said shutter time control data TV is given in the data with 1/8step accuracy, and said data are now represented by ##EQU2## wherein P,α therein are integer values. Said data corresponds to the actualexposure time represented by the following equation against the standardtime Y: ##EQU3##

But as the digital circuit to operate ##EQU4## will become verycomplicated circuit, in this example, it is proximated by the followingequation: ##EQU5## Therefore actual exposure time TR will be representedby ##EQU6## Also, since said equation can be replaced by the equation:##EQU7## actual exposure time TR for shutter time can be obtained bymaking such frequency dividing pulse as ##EQU8## by frequency dividing Pstep of the pulse signal Y/8 being 1/8 of the standard time Y by thefrequency dividing circuit 620 and by subtraction counting the data, 8+αbeing taken in the down counter 642.

Now, the data to specify self timer time, the data to compensate theaction delay in mechanical sequence and to determine the function timeof said shutter release means 396, and the data to generate the ON.OFFsignal of 2 Hz which has been explained before are outputted out of saidconstant generation circuit 616 and each one of them is frequencydivided and is converted to actual time, then is given to said controlsignal generation circuit 646 and is used as the standard for the outputcontrol signal against said shutter release means 396, diaphragm controlmeans 398, and shutter speed control means 400.

Next, explanations will be made on the detailed function of said outputcontrol part 364 and the detailed circuit set up to realize the same.

The control state of a camera device is divided into eight states in thecamera system of this example.

This is done as the function of the camera device consists of varioussequences and the function of electric control circuit needs tocorrespond to such sequence.

While the signal CC0 to CC7 are made to specify said eight control statein this camera system, explanations will be made on the function of thecamera device corresponding to each of the signals CC0 to CC7 followingFIG. 92.

The state of CC0 signal is a cycle to repeat the light measuring by theinput control part 360 or taking in the analog data and A-D conversion,operation by the central control part 362, and the display of variousdata by the output control part 364, and the CC0 signal will be retainedwith the loop of (III) until the shutter release button 18 is pressed. Aphotographer can confirm the display of various data by the digitaldisplay device 402 within the finder 13 in this state and can performchange of set data, etc. Said CC0 signal is retained unless EDSP signalis "1" or the first CALE signal after a power switch is put isoutputted.

The state of CC2 signal is a cycle corresponding to the time duringwhich the self timer is in operation, and while the display of variousdata by the digital display device 402 is stopped, the light measuringby the input control part 360 or taking in of analog data and A-Dconversion and the operation by the central control part 362 will berepeated, and during said period LED lamp 32 is flickered to notify aphotographer that the self-timer is in action. The shifting from thestate of CC0 signal to the state of CC2 signal will be done when theshutter release button 18 is pressed and the SR signal becomes "1" at atime when SELF signal is "1" (I). Also, in the state of CC2 signal asSELF signal becomes "0" or EDSP signal becomes "1", the camera device isreturned from the state of CC2 signal to the state of CC0 signal (II).

The states of the signals CC3-CC6 are shifted completely in parallelwith the shifting of mechanical sequence of the camera device mechanismpart 358, and the shifting is done to the state of CC3 signal, powersupply to the diaphragm control means 398 is started and the clampmechanism of the AE lever 94 is biased to clamp releasing side, placingin a state to allow the AE lever 94 to run.

Here, the state of said CC3 signal is obtained by shifting from thestate of CC2 signal when the state of CC2 signal in which a self-timeris in action (V), or by directly shifting from the state of CC0 signalwhen SELF signal is "0" at a time when the shutter release button 18 ispressed.

Also said state of CC3 signal is retained for a predetermined period oftime, then shifting is made to the state of CC1 signal.

At said state of CC1 signal the shutter release means 396 of the cameradevice mechanical part 358 is electrified and a trigger mechanism forstarting the running of mechanical sequence is activated. Said state ofCC1 signal is also retained for a predetermined length of time and isshifted to the next state of CC5 signal (VII), then the mechanicalsequence of the camera device starts running by the action of saidtrigger mechanism.

Said state of CC5 signal is a diaphragm control cycle and such actionsas mirror up, running of AE lever 94, etc. are done by said mechanicalsequence. In said state of CC5 signal, substraction counting of saiddiaphragm closing step number control data AVs by the pulse signal FPCoutputted corresponding to the amount of run made by the AE lever 94,and the shifting from said state of CC5 signal to the state of CC4signal (VIII) is made when the number of pulse of said pulse signal FPmatches with said data AVs or if it does not match after an elapse of apredetermined period of time, and at this time power supply to saiddiaphragm control means 398 is stopped and the AE lever 94 is clampedand its running its controlled. That is in said state of CC5 signal,diaphragm presetting is made from the body 4 side of the lens device 2.

And the shifting to the state of CC4 signal, after said state of CC5signal is completed upon an elapse of a predetermined period of time, isdone when the pulse number of the pulse signal FPC does not match withsaid data AVs, and the same is applied to a case when diaphragmpresetting is manually made at the lens device 2 side or a case when theaperture value AMAX of the minimum aperture is automatically selected.

Also when said state of CC5 signal is reached power supply to theshutter speed control means 400 is started to control the running of theshutter rear screen.

Also at said state of CC5 signal, the presetting of aperture and thediaphragm closing action of the lens device 2 by the diaphragm drivinglever 98 are done in parallel.

Next as shifting from CC5 signal to the state of CC4 signal is made theshutter leading screen starts running by the progress of mechanicalsequence. Since the exposure onto a film surface is not done immediatelyby said start of running of shutter leading screen and there is amechanical delay time, said state of CC4 signal is set for a purpose ofcompensation of said time also.

Next while CTST signal is inputted by the start of the shutter leadingscreen, said state of CC4 signal is shifted to the state of CC6 signal(IX).

The state of CC6 signal is a shutter speed control cycle and thecounting of actual time based on the shutter time control data TVs andthe standard time Y is made after entering into the state of CC6 signal,and after an elapse of such period of time as corresponding of theshutter time control data TVs the state of CC6 signal is shifted to thestate of CC7 signal (X).

In said state of CC7 signal power supply to the shutter speed controlmeans 400 which is previously electrified is stopped and the shutterfollower screen is started to stop the exposure on the film surface.Also after the running of the shutter follower screen is completed themechanical sequence conducts the quick return of the mirror and thediaphragm driving lever.

Here, in the state wherein BDSP signal is "1", as long as the signal SRfrom the switch SW2 which is linked with the shutter release button 18is "1", the state of CC6 signal is retained, and when said SR signalbecomes "0", return to the state of CC0 signal from the state of CC6signal is made (XII). This is a function provided in view of the factthat the release button 18 is used for directly controlling shutterspeed in manual manner in bulb photographing mode.

Also the state of CC7 signal is a state wherein so-called post displayis made, that is data which constitute the basis for the exposurecontrol already performed can be confirmed within the finder 13 afterphotographing is completed. As entering into said state of CC7 signalthe action control for the digital display device 402 is released andthe display of various photographing information is done, wherein saidphotographing information relates to the exposure control alreadyperformed. Also said state of CC7 signal is a state existing when thesignal SR is "1" as the state of CC6 signal is shifted to the state ofCC7 signal that is as the shutter release button 18 is kept pressed, andwhen said signal SR becomes "0", the state of CC0 signal is immediatelyresumed (XI).

Also when the film wind up is done by the motor drive device mentionedbefore or by manual action even if the shutter release button 18 is keptbeing pressed in the state of CC7 signal, the system is returned fromthe state of CC7 signal to the state of CC0 signal. This is an importantfunction to retain the shutter release button 18 is a pressed state whencontinuous photographing is done by the motor drive device.

As has been mentioned above in the camera system of this example theoutput control part 364 is placed in the eight control state of said CC0signal to CC7 signal.

The sequence of each of the signals CC0 to CC7 mentioned above and thestate of power supply state to the electro-magnetic solenoids of theshutter release means 396, the diaphragm control means 398, and theshutter control means 400 in the state of each of said signals will beshown in the schematic sequence diagram of FIG. 93.

In FIG. 93, "FC1", "FC2", "FC3" are signals which constitute the basisto obtain said signals CC0 to CC7.

Now, before explanations are made on said control signal generationcircuit 646 and the CC0 to CC7 signals, the function which constitutesthe basis for control based on the diaphragm closing step number dataAV_(s) and the shutter time control data TV and the function forobtaining other timewise control signal will be explained.

FIG. 94 is to show detailed set up of the shutter time control register614, the constant generation circuit 616, the select-gate 618, thefrequency dividing circuit 620, and what are shown by 618A to 618D insaid drawing are select-gates consisting of integrated circuit elementsCD4019 having its detailed logic diagram shown in FIG. 66, and four ofthe same constitute the select-gate 618 shown in FIG. 30. Also thefrequency dividing circuit 620 consists of integrated circuit elementsMC14536 (manufactured by MOTOROLA). Also said integrated circuit elementMC14536 is a programmable timer having its block diagram shown in FIG.95. Said programmable timer can conduct frequency dividing up to 24steps as a whole and is so made as frequency dividing the pulse signalinputted from In terminal and outputting the same from D0 terminal basedon the 4 bits data inputted from each of the terminals A, B, C, D andthe signal inputted from the terminal 8b. Said input data from each ofthe terminals A, B, C, D are to conduct frequency dividing up to the16th step, while said terminal 8b is to conduct frequency dividing forfurther 8 steps. In FIG. 94, the Flip-Flop F39 is to frequency dividethe clock-pulse and to input its Q output into the In terminal of saidfrequency dividing circuit 620. While the pulse signal of 64 KHz is usedas clock pulse in the system of this example, the ON pulse of 32 KHzwill be impressed to the In terminal of said frequency dividing circuit620 through the above mentioned set up.

Said pulse of 32 KHz constitutes the basis for making the 1/8 time ofthe standard time Y explained previously, and said frequency dividingcircuit 620 is so made that when the inputs in its input terminals A, B,C, D are all "0" and the input in the terminal 8b is "1", the pulsesignal of 16 KHz that is the pulse signal with such cycle ascorresponding to Y/8 which is obtained by multiplying the standard timeof 1/2000 second by 1/8 times, is outputted from the D0 terminal of thesame. That is, this frequency dividing circuit 620 is to frequencydivide the pulse signal of 16 KHz based on the input data from the inputterminals A, B, C, D and the input signal into the terminal 8b and tooutput the same from its D, 0 terminals to the signal line (30). Andsaid frequency dividing circuit 620 has a reset terminal R and is resetfollowing the input signal from the signal line (29) explained later.

Said select-gate 618A has the lower 4 bits of the integer part of theshutter time control data inputted in its terminals A1 to A4 from the Q1to Q4 of the shutter time control register 614, and has the data toobtain the self time of 8 seconds that is the data "1010" inputted inthe terminals B1 to B4, also has CC6 signal explained later inputted inthe terminal Ka and has the input of CC2 signal, explained later, at theterminal Kb.

That is, said select-gate 618A outputs the data relating to selftimefrom its terminals D1 to D4 at the time of CC2 signal, and outputs thelower 4 bits of integer part of the shutter time control data TV at thetime of CC6 signal.

Also the select-gate 618B has the fixed data to designate the time ofCC3 and CC4 signals, explained later, inputted in its terminals A1 toA4, also has the fixed data to designate a certain time as the time ofCC5 signal, explained later, inputted in its terminals B1 to B4. Alsothe time of 2 m sec. is used as said time of CC3 and CC4 signals, thusthe data of "0110" are inputted in said terminals A1 to A4.

Also the time of 30 m sec. is used as the time of said CC5 signal inview of the running time of the AE lever 94, etc., thus the data, "1010"are inputted in said terminals B1 to B4.

Also said select-gate 618B receives the inputs of the signals CC1, CC3through the OR gate OR57 at the terminal Ka, and receives the input ofCC5 signal at the terminal Kb. That is, this select-gate 618B outputsthe data relating to the time of 2 m sec. from its terminals D1 to D4 atthe time of the signals CC1 to CC3, and outputs the data relating to 30m sec. from its terminals D1 to D4 at the time of CC5 signal.

Also the select-gate 618C has the D1 to D4 outputs of said select-gate618A inputted in its terminals A1 to A4 and has the D1 to D4 outputs ofsaid select-gate 618B inputted at its terminals B1 to B4, also has CC2signal and CC6 signal inputted through the OR gate OR55 in the Katerminal and has the CC1 signal, CC3 signal and CC5 signal inputtedthrough the OR gates OR56, OR57 at the terminal Kb.

That is, said select-gate 618C is to output the D1 to D4 terminaloutputs of said select-gate 618A from its D1 to D4 terminals at the timeof CC2, CC6 signals and outputs the D1 to D4 terminal outputs of saidselect-gate 618B from its terminals D1 to D4 at the time of CC1, CC3,CC5 signals.

Also the select-gate 618D has the D1 to D4 outputs of said select-gate618C inputted at its terminals A1 to A4, and has the data to make thesignal of 2 Hz that is the data "1101" inputted in its terminals B1 toB4, also has the signals CC1, CC2, CC3, CC5, CC6 inputted in itsterminal Ka through the OR gates OR54, OR55, OR56, OR57 at its Katerminal, and has the inverted signal of the input at said terminal Kathrough the inverter INV47 inputted in its terminal Kb.

That is, this select-gate 618D is to output the D1 to D4 terminaloutputs of said select-gate 618C from its terminals D1 to D4 at the timeof each of signals CC1, CC2, CC3, CC5, CC6, and to output the datarelating to said 2 Hz signal from its D1 to D4 terminals at the othertimes than above that is at the time of each of signals CC0, CC4, CC7.

The D1 to D4 outputs of said select-gate 618D are inputted in each ofthe terminals A to D of said frequency dividing circuit 620.

On the other hand, the Q0 terminal output of said shutter time controlregister 614 that is the highest bit of the shutter time control data TVis inputted in the terminal D of said frequency dividing circuit 620through the inverter INV45, the OR gate OR53 from the NAND gate NAND29which receives the input of CC6 signal.

Also the output of said NAND gate NAND29 is inputted in the terminal 8bof said frequency dividing circuit 620 through the AND gate AND91 whichhas CC2 signal inputted therein through the inverter INV46.

In the above mentioned set up explanations will be made on the state ofA to D inputs of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and the input at theterminal 8b for every state of each of CC0 to CC7.

In the time of the signals CC0, CC4, CC7, since the input in theterminal Kb of the select-gate 618D becomes "1" also the input in theterminal 8b of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "1", eachinput at each of the input terminals A, B, C, D of the frequencydividing circuit 620 and at the terminal 8b becomes "1", "0", "1", "1","1", respectively, that is such pulse output as frequency dividing thepulse of 16 KHz by "110" steps that is the pulse output of 2 Hz will bemade from the terminals D, 0 of said frequency dividing circuit 620.

In the time of CC2 signal, since the inputs in the terminals B1 to B4 ofthe select-gate 618A are inputted in the terminals A, B, C, D of thefrequency dividing circuit 620 through the select-gates 618C, 618D andthe input in the terminal 8b becomes "0", each input in each of theinput terminals, A, B, C, D at the frequency dividing circuit 620 and inthe terminal 8b becomes "0", "1", "0", "1", "0", respectively, thereforesuch pulse output as frequency dividing the pulse of 16 KHz by "1010"steps plus 8 steps. That is the pulse output of 16 second cycle will bemade to the signal line (20) from the D0 terminal of said frequencydividing circuit 620.

Said pulse of 16 seconds cycle uses the time when said pulse firstup-rises from "0" to "1" that is the time when 8 seconds elapse afterfrequency dividing is started as the time when self-timer time iscompleted.

Next in the time of signals CC3 and CC1, since the inputs at theterminals A1 to A4 of the select-gate 618 are inputted in the terminalsA, B, C, D of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through theselect-gates 618C, 618D and the input at the terminal 8b of thefrequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "1", each input at the inputterminals A, B, C, D of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and the inputterminal 8b becomes "0", "1", "1", "0", "1", respectively, therefore,such pulse output as frequency dividing the pulse of 16 KHz by "0110"steps that is the pulse output of 4 m sec. cycle will be made in thesignal line (30) from the D0 terminal of the frequency dividing circuit620. Said pulse of 4 m sec. cycle uses the time when said pulse firstup-rises from "0" to 37 1", that is the time when 2 m sec. elapse fromthe frequency dividing is started as the time when the signals CC3 orCC1 are completed.

In the time of CC5 signal, since the inputs at the terminals B1 to B4 ofthe select-gate 618B are inputted in the terminals A, B, C, D of thefrequency dividing circuit 620 through the select-gates 618C, 618D alsothe input in the terminal 8b of the frequency dividing circuit 620becomes "1", each input at the input terminals A, B, C, D of thefrequency dividing circuit 620 and at the terminal 8b becomes "0", "1","0", "1", "1", respectively, therefore such pulse output as frequencydividing the pulse of 16 KHz by "1010" steps that is the pulse output of64 m sec. cycle will be made to the signal line (30) from the terminalD0 of said frequency dividing circuit 620. Said pulse of 64 m sec. cycleuses the time when said pulse first up-rises from "0" to "1" that is thetime when 32 m sec. elapse after frequency dividing is started as thetime of completion of CC5 signal.

In the time of CC6 signal, the inputs at the terminals A1 to A4 of theselect-gate 618A that is the lower 4 bits of integer part of the shuttertime control data TV are inputted in the terminals A, B, C, D of thefrequency dividing circuit 620 through the select-gates 618C, 618D, alsowhen the highest bit of integer part of the shutter time control data TVis "0", the input at the terminal 8b of the frequency dividing circuit620 becomes "1", and when the highest bit of integer part of the shuttertime control data TV is "1", the input at the terminal D of thefrequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "1" and the input at the terminal8b becomes "0".

Therefore, such pulse signal as corresponding to the above mentionedY/8×2^(P) of the equation (22), being obtained by frequency dividing thepulse signal of 16 KHz based on the shutter time control data TV isoutputted from the terminal D0 of the frequency dividing circuit 620.

Also said pulse signal is used to down count such data as correspondingto the above mentioned 8+α in the equation (22) at a later stage, andthe fact that the actual time of shutter time has elapsed is detected bythe time when said down counting is completed.

FIG. 96 is to show detailed set ups of the shutter time control registor626, the diaphragm closing step number control registor 628, the dataselector 632, the down counter 642, the select-gate 640 shown in FIG.30, the data selector 632 in said drawing consists of a select gatewhich employs two of integrated circuit elements CD4019 having itsdetailed logic diagram shown in FIG. 66 arranged in parallel, and hasthe outputs at the terminals Q0 to Q7 of the diaphragm closing controlregistor 628 inputted in its terminals B7 to B0, also has the outputs atthe terminals Q5 to Q7 of the shutter time control data TV that is the 3bits portion below decimal point of the shutter time control data TVinputted in its terminals A2 to A0. Also said data selector 632 has "1"signal inputted in its terminal A3, and has the terminals A4 to A7grounded. That is, said data selector 632 receives the input of the data8+α shown in the equation (22) at the terminals A0 to A3, and receivesthe input of the diaphragm closing step number control data AV. Also,said data selector 632 has CC4 signal inputted in its terminal Ka andhas CC3 signal at the terminal Kb. Therefore, in the time of CC3 saiddata selector 632 outputs the diaphragm closing step number control datafrom its terminals D0 to D7, while outputs the data 8+α of the equation(22) from its terminals D0 to D7.

The outputs at D0 to D7 of said data-selector 632 are inputted in J0 toJ7 of the down counter 642, and at a time when CC3 signal or CC4 signalis inputted through OR gate OR59 in the PRE terminal, said down counter642 takes in and memorizes the output data of the terminals D0 to D7 ofsaid data-selector 632.

Now, this down counter 642 is made by using two of the integratedcircuit elements CD4029 having its detailed logic diagram shown in FIG.34, and subtraction counts the data inputted from said terminals J0 toJ7 and memorized based on the input CLK at its clock terminal, andoutputs the signal to show that from the terminal C02 when carry(borrow) is generated as a result. Said output signal at C0 terminal isordinarily "1" and becomes "0" when carry is generated, and this signalis inputted in the terminal D of the Flip-Flop F40 being synchronizedwith the clock pulse CP, therefore when subtraction counting by saiddown counter 642 is completed the signal synchronized with the clockpulse CP is outputted at the signal line (25).

On the other hand, said down counter 642 receives the input of thesignal FPC at its clock terminal CLK through the NAND gates NAND31,NAND29 in the time of CC5 signal, also receives the D0 terminal outputof the frequency dividing circuit 620 that is the signal output of thesignal line (30) through the NAND gates NAND31, NAND30 in the time ofCC6. Therefore, the function of this down counter 642 will be explainedbased on the sequence shown in FIG. 93.

Said down counter 642 taken in the output data of the diaphragm closingstep number control registor 628 from J0 to J7 terminal through the dataselector 632 in the time of CC3 signal. Then as shifted to the time ofCC5 signal, FPC signal is inputted through NAND gates NAND30, NAND31 andthe diaphragm closing step number control data AVs memorized in the timeof CC3 signal are down counted, and, as a result, when the subtractioncounting is completed, the output signal at C02 terminal is shifted from"1" to "0". At this time the AE lever 94 will have run to such positionas presetting the amount of diaphragm closing corresponding to thediaphragm closing step number control data AVs. Of course, the amount ofrun at this time has suitable amount of compensation given theretoconsidering the mechanical delay time until the clamping of the AE 94 bythe diaphragm control means 398 is done. The fact that the output signalat the C02 terminal becomes "0" at this time is detected by theFlip-Flop F40, and such signal output is made as being synchronized withthe clock pulse CP to show that the AE lever 94 runs to such position ascorresponding to the diaphragm closing step number control data AVs.

Also said down counter 642 takes in from the terminals J0 to J3 throughthe data selector 632 such data as placing "1" at the bit correspondingto the lowest bit of integer part in addition to the output data at theterminals Q5 to Q7 of the shutter time control registor 626 that is thedata below decimal point of the shutter time control data TV, virtuallyas integer data that is as the data, 8+α, multiplying 8 times in thetime of CC4 signal. Then, as shifted to the time of CC5 signal while theD0 terminal signal output of the frequency dividing circuit 620 will beinputted into the clock terminal CLK from the signal line (30) throughthe NAND gates NAND30, NAND31, such pulse output having pulse cycle ofY/8×2^(P) as frequency dividing the pulse signal of 16 KHz, the obtainedby multiplying the standard time Y by 1/8 time will be made at thissignal line (30) in the time of CC6, as has been explained above.Therefore, the 8+α memorized at the time of CC4 signal is down countedfollowing the pulse signal with the cycle of Y/8×2^(P), and as a resultas the subtraction counting is completed the C02 terminal output signalis shifted from "1" to "0". At this time, such length of time asY/8×2^(P) ×(8+α) has elapsed after entering into the time of CC6, andapproximate actual time corresponding to the shutter time control dataTV(=P+α/8) is obtained. The fact that the output signal at C02 terminalbecomes "0" is detected by the Flip-Flop F40 and such signal output assynchronized with the clock pulse CP will be made to show the fact thatsuch actual time as corresponding to the shutter time control data TVhas elapsed after entering into the state of CC6 signal.

FIG. 97 shows a detailed circuit diagram of the above mentioned controlsignal generation circuit 646 and constitutes a theory circuit to obtainthe above mentioned control signals CC0 to CC7.

What is shown as 990 in said drawing is a decoder made of integratedcircuit element having its detailed logic diagram shown in FIG. 35, andis to decode FC1, FC2, FC3 which represents each Q output of theFlip-Flopw F32, F33, F34 and outputs the same as the signals CC0 to CC7.Here each of said signals FC1, FC2, FC3 is as shown in FIG. 93 and isoutputted from the Q output terminals of the Flip-Flops F32, F33, F34.These Flip-Flops F32, F33, F34 are synchronized with the clock pulse CP.

Now the setting condition for the Flip-Flop F32 is represented by SFC1,the resetting condition of the same by RFC₁, and the setting conditionfor the Flip-Flop F33 is represented by SFC2, the resetting condition ofthe same by RFC2, while the setting condition for the Flip-Flop F34 bySFC3, the resetting condition therefor by RFC3, and the direct resettingcondition for all of said Flip-Flops F32, F33, F34 is represented byFDR.

The fact that said condition FDR is satisfied means that the Flip-FlopsF32, F33, F34 are reset without any relationship with the clock pulseCP. Therefore "1" output is made from the decoder 990 as the CC0 signal.That is the system will be placed in or returned to the state of CC0signal.

Said condition FDR is satisfied when the power up clear signal PUC isinputted, or at the state of CC2 signal that is the EDSP signal becomes"1" during the action of self-timer, or at the state as not being in thestate of CC7 signal and that the wind up of film is not completed andWNUP signal is "0", or when the wind up is completed and the WNUP signalbecomes "1", further such time as corresponding to 2 Hz has elapsed inthe state of CC7 signal.

Now, the FDR is satisfied when CCP signal is "1", and the WNUP signal is"1", further the 2 Hz signal is "1", because film wind up is completedin a state wherein the shutter release button 18 is kept pressed andthen after an elapse of such period of time that next operation resultis taken into a register for display the system enters into next controlstate, and it is an important condition for conducting continuousphotographing in a state wherein the shutter release button 18 is keptpressed, using a motor driving device.

And AND gates AND85, AND86, AND87, OR gates OR47, OR48, OR49 and theinverter INV42 relate to satisfy said condition FDR.

The fact that the condition for CC2 signal is satisfied means that theFlip-Flop F33 is placed in a set state and the Flip-Flops F32, F34 areplaced in reset state, and for that end the condition SFC2 needs to besatisfied.

That is, in order to create the state of CC2 signal, it is necessarythat the condition SFC2 is satisfied as the shutter release button 18 ispressed and the SR signal becomes "1" when the EDSP signal is "0" underthe state of CC0 signal and the condition FDR is not satisfied, and thesignal from the signal line (17) is "1", that is the operation at thecentral control part 362 is completed and the signal from the signalline (23) is "1", that is when the transfer of data from the centralcontrol part 362 to the output control part 364 is not done.

When the SELF signal is "0" at this time for having the condition SFC1also satisfied simultaneously, the system will be shifted from the stateof CC0 signal to the state of CC3 signal without going through the stateof CC2 signal.

When the SECF signal becomes "0" and the SR signal becomes "0" under thestate of said CC2 signal, the condition RFC2 is satisfied as theself-timer photographing is regarded as completed and the system will bereturned to the state of CC0.

On the other hand, under the state of CC2 signal, when the signal of thesignal line (30) becomes "1", that is "1" output is made from the D0terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and the signal of thesignal line (23) is "1", the condition SFC1 is satisfied and the systemis shifted to the state of CC3 signal.

The system is shifted from the state of CC3 signal to the state of CC1signal when the signal of the signal line (30) becomes "1", that is when2 m sec. have elapsed thereby satisfying the condition RFC2.

The shifting from the state of the CC1 signal to the state of the CC5signal is made when the signal of said signal line (30) becomes "1",that is 2 m sec. have elapsed, thereby satisfying the condition SFC3.

The shifting from the state of CC5 signal to the state of CC4 signal ismade when MDSP signal is "0" and the signal of signal line (25) becomes"1", that is when the AE lever 94 runs as much as such amount ascorresponding to the diaphragm closing step number control data AVs orwhen the signal of said signal line (30) becomes "1" that is 30 m sec.have elapsed, thereby satisfying the condition RFC1.

The shifting from the state of CC4 signal to the state of CC6 signal ismade when the shutter leading screen starts running and CTST signalbecomes "1", satisfying the condition of SFC2.

The shifting from the state of CC6 signal to the state of signal CC7 ismade when BDSP signal is "0" and the output of signal line (25) becomes"1", that is counting of actual time corresponding to the shutter timecontrol data is completed, thereby satisfying the condition SFC1.

When BDSP signal is "1" and SR signal becomes "0" under the state of CC6signal, the conditions RFC2 and RFC4 are satisfied and the system isreturned to the state of CC0 signal.

Also when the SR signal becomes "0" under the state of CC7 signal theconditions RFC1, RFC2 and RFC4 are satisfied and the system is returnedto the state of CC0 signal.

Now, what is related to SFC1 is a logic set up by AND gates, AND79,AND80, AND87, NAND gates NAND5, NAND6, NAND7, NAND16, NAND23, invertersINV36, INV37, INV38, INV39, and Flip-Flop F35.

Also what is related to RFC1 is a logic set up by AND gates AND81,AND90, NAND gates NAND8, NAND9, NAND10, NAND11, NAND19, inverter INV44,Flip-Flop F31, OR gates OR50, OR51, OR52.

Also what is related to SFC2 is a logic set up by NAND gates NAND17,NAND18, NAND24, Flip-Flops F30, F31 and inverter INV48.

Also what is related to RFC2 is a logic set up by NAND gate NAND12,NAND14, NAND20, NAND8, NAND9, Flip-Flop F36, AND gates AND81, AND88, ORgates OR50, inverters INV37, INV38, INV44.

Also what is related to SFC3 is NAND gate NAND13, AND gate AND89, ORgate OR51, inverter INV43 and Flip-Flop F37.

Also what is related to RFC3 is a logic circuit by NAND gates NAND9,NAND14, NAND21 and inverter INV37.

And said control signal generation circuit 646 gives the direct resetsignal to the direct reset terminal R of the frequency dividing circuit620 through the signal line (29).

The condition for the output "1" being done at said signal line (29) isthat it is made when the SR signal becomes "0" under the state of CC7signal and during the one bit of the first clock pulse CP after theconditions SFC1, SFC2, RFC2, SFC3 are satisfied, wherein the content ofthe above mentioned frequency dividing circuit 620 is totally cleared bysaid direct reset signal.

What is related to making "1" output at said signal line (29), is alogic set up made by NAND gates, NAND9, NAND22, NAND25, NAND26, NAND27,NAND28, inverters INV37, INV40 and OR gate OR50.

While power supply signals are given by said control signal generationcircuit 646 to the shutter release means 396, the diaphragm controlmeans 398, and the shutter speed control means 400, the power supplysignal is given to the shutter release means 396 at the time of CC1signal, and power supply signal is given to the diaphragm control means398 at the time of CC3, CC1 and CC5 signals, while power supply signalis given to the shutter speed control means 400 at the time of CC5, CC4and CC6.

To realize said actions, CC1 signal is given directly to the shutterrelease means 396, and the inverted signal by the inverter INV41 of FC1signal and CC7 signals are given to the diaphragm control means 398through the AND gate AND82, while the FC3 signal and the output signalof the inverter INV41 are given to the shutter speed control means 400through the AND gate AND82.

Also direct reset signal is given by said control signal generationcircuit 646 through the signal line (18) to the direct reset terminal Rof the Flip-Flop F23 shown in FIG. 82.

This is done to prohibit that new operation data are inputted to theoutput control part 364 from the central control part 362 duringexposure control action, and said signal will become "1" when the ANDcondition for each Q output of the Flip-Flops F32, F34 is satisfiedthrough the AND gate AND84.

To provide further explanations, while control signal is issued fromsaid control signal generation circuit 646 to the driving circuit 404 toflicker the LED display device 32 which shows that a self timer is inaction and a power source is normal, the set up of the driving controlcircuit of said LED display device 32 is shown in FIG. 98.

What is shown as 800 in the drawing is a frequency dividing circuit of15 steps, which frequency divides the clock pulse CP of 64 KHz by 15steps to generate ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz. Said 2 Hz signal is given tothe AND gate AND100.

Also what is shown as 808 is a well-known battery check circuit being somade as outputting "1" signal when the balance in the battery issufficient as the battery is checked.

The output of said battery check circuit 808 is given to said AND gateAND100 through OR gate OR100 together with said CC2 signal and theoutput signal of said AND gate AND100 is given to the LED drivingcircuit 404.

When the CC2 signal for the self-timer in action is "1" or the balanceof battery is sufficient as a result of battery check in such set up asmentioned above, ON-OFF signal of 2 Hz is given to said LED drivingcircuit 404, thus the LED display device 32 makes flickering display.

While the explanations given so far are not necessarily sufficient, theset up of the camera system of this example is as mentioned above.

The reference table of FIG. 99 shows in what form each of the data isused in operation. In this table, binary codes of 8 bits with 1/8 stepaccuracy corresponding to each APEX series of object brightness BV, filmsensitivity SV, shutter speed TV, aperture value AV, fully openedaperture value AVo, the aperture value of most closed diaphragm AMAX,exposure EV, and the set aperture value from the speedlight side arecorresponded and binary codes of 8 bits with 1/8 step accuracy aresimilarly corresponded as the converted digital values against theanalog data when A-D conversion is made at the input control part.

Also the vignetting error ROM528 shown in FIG. 37 is to output thebinary code data for such vignetting error AVc as shown in FIG. 100against the given fully opened aperture value AVo.

A reference table for the binary code for each input of the aperturevalue display decoder ROM702, the shutter speed display decoder ROM704,the sign display decoder ROM706 shown in FIG. 89 is shown in FIG. 101.

In the system of this example, data are handled in such binary codes asshown each of the reference tables of FIG. 99, FIG. 100, FIG. 101, andeach operation routine shown in FIG. 70 is all made based on such binarydata as shown in said reference tables.

Thus, it is deemed that ones with ordinary skill in the art can easilyunderstand the portions in this specification where explanations are notsufficient or as to what actions will be made by the operation circuitshown in the block diagram of FIG. 79, following the operationinstructions shown in FIG. 69 by referring to each operation routineshown in FIG. 70 and FIGS. 99, 100, 101 and in addition to all otherdrawings attached.

While the camera system of the present invention provides a number ofadvantages in picture taking, etc., they will be listed below:

1. While exposure control mechanism in a conventional camera device ismade of chiefly by analogic electric circuits and mechanical linkingmechanisms, the camera system to which the present invention is appliedcan have its circuits digitallized and large scale integration ofcircuits can be done therefore a compact set up with little erroneousoperations can be obtained, and it is suitable for application to acamera device with limitation in its housing space.

2. While an automatic exposure control function used conventionally in acamera device of TTL light measuring system has such case that theintention of a photographer can not be sufficiently satisfied becauseeither one system out of aperture value priority or shutter timepriority can be selected, in the camera system of the present inventionthe aperture priority and shutter time priority can be freely selectedby change over of a switch, thus the application field for automaticexposure photographing is widened.

3. While a technique to concentratedly display various informationwithin a finder of a camera device has been well known, in the camerasystem of the present invention is so made that information necessaryfor photographing is displayed within a finder digitally and in a veryefficient manner, thus a photographer can obtain various information inphotographing through a finder so that most proper camera operation canbe done based on said information.

4. Since any one of the modes of automatic exposure photographing,manual exposure photographing, speedlight photographing, external lightmeasuring photographing can be freely selected in a camera system of thepresent invention, the photographing mode needed by a photographer canbe most properly selected.

5. While an ordinary camera device employs such set up conventionallythat shutter speed is selected and set by a shutter dial and aperturevalue is selected and set by a diaphragm ring, respectively, in a camerasystem of the present invention, shutter speed and aperture value can beset by a common dial, therefore its handling characteristics can begreatly enhanced.

6. Since all controls in a camera device to which a camera system of thepresent invention is applied can be electrically done, for example ashutter which constituted heretofore a mechanical closing and openingmechanism can be replaced with an electric switch, therefore theadjustment of shutter button pressing power for shutter release can bedone with very simple set up, thus the hand shakings at a time ofshutter button pressing can be sufficiently overcome.

7. A camera system of the present invention is so made that when selftime or exposure time is converted to actual time the time datacorresponding to APEX value can be converted to actual time data in avery simple circuit set up and actual time is obtained by a standardtime clock with electric generation type, therefore very accurate selftime and exposure time can be obtained.

8. Since self time is digitally controlled in a camera system of thepresent invention the setting of self time can be freely and variablydone, further self time does not have to be set every time shutterrelease is done, thus troublesome handling for self time setting willbecome unnecessary. Also since mechanical spring mechanism as in aconventional system is not used there will be no operating noise andsetting is easy, further the extent for setting time can be made wide.

Also since display of action can be made with electric display means,such advantage can be secured that the action state of the system can beviewed from a distance.

9. Since exposure time is digitally controlled in a camera system of thepresent invention, the setting range for exposure time can be widened,particularly a mechanical governor is not used for a low speed shutter,long shutter time can be set freely without being restricted bymechanical arrangement, further action noise accompanying to the actionof a low speed shutter can be eliminated. Also exposure time can beobtained with very high level of accuracy by using such oscillator withhigh level of accuracy as a crystal oscillator, thus accurate exposurecan be made.

10. Compensation of vignetting error for the amount of light measured byTTL system generated near fully opened side of a lens device is not doneby a mechanical linking system in a camera system of the presentinvention, instead said system is so made as selecting plural number ofvignetting error data which have been memorized beforehand based on thefully opened aperture value of a photographing lens device used,therefore, mechanical errors can be minimized.

11. In a camera system of the present invention, unless a shutterrelease is done, light measuring and operation therefor will be repeatedand every time aperture value and exposure time are obtained as theresults of operation said values are memorized in registers, anddisplayed within a finder, thus not only a photographer can learn theinformation concerning photographing beforehand, but the aperture valueand exposure time actually obtained in photographing can be obtainedalways for new conditions and new object, even when the set condition ischanged, therefore photographing condition for an object can be freelyselected. Also since the direction of error in the set aperture value orexposure time against appropriate exposure is displayed in a finder, anot only photographer can adjust the appropriate exposures in anaccurate manner, but such effect as high key or low key, etc. can beassumed.

12. Since the control in a camera system of the present invention ismade in such manner that as long as a shutter release is done, lightmeasuring and A-D conversion are done repeatedly and the result of saidA-D conversion is memorized in a registor every time the conversion iscompleted, said A-D conversion data memorized in the registor can beeasily retained, thus AE locking mechanism, which has been constitutedconventionally by mechanical clamping mechanisms or analogicalcapacitors, etc., can be obtained with very simple circuit set up,further it has such special feature that since it has such set up asmemorizing and retaining the A-D conversion data of amount of lightmeasured such conditions as the set aperture value, the set shutterspeed value, and the film sensitivity etc. which constitute the basisfor operation can be freely changed, thus extent of freedom at a time ofAE locking can be largely widened compared to that in a conventional AElocking system in which the result of operation based on the amount oflight measured is retained.

13. A camera system in the present invention employs such set up thatthe digital display within a finder is put out when a camera device isin an exposure control action including a self-timer action for greatlyreducing power consumption of a battery power source, thus a cameradevice can be operated in a stable manner for a long time, also economyin use is improved.

14. While in such set up as conducting digital information display byLED display device within a finder there is such fear that lightemittance by said LED display device within a finder badly affects thelight measuring information as TTL light measuring is done, such set upis used in a camera system of the present invention as taking in thelight measuring information within a certain length of time with veryquick cycle and putting out the LED display device in between, thereforethe LED display device is put out in every prescribed period of timewith very quick cycle. Therefore, there will be no such troubles asflickering of display, etc. yet the bad effect which may be given to TTLlight measuring by the LED display device is eliminated, thus allowingvery accurate light measuring.

15. While frequent changes in the display data in digital display causetickering or flickering in display, etc. making it difficult to read outor distinguish the same, and sometimes there may be a fear for erroneousread out, a camera system of the present invention has such set up thatthe renewal of digital display is done with such degree of cycle as canbe distinguished by a photographer without relationship with the cycleof change in the data to be displayed, thus readout of digital displaysimple and a risk of erroneous readout is reduced.

16. While as digital data with comparatively high level of accuracy areused as the data for operation and control in exercising exposurecontrol, even if data with similarly high level of accuracy are used indigital display of data, it may cause unnecessary confusion for aphotographer, and there is a fear for lowering photographing efficiency,in a camera system of the present invention although digital data withcomparatively high level of accuracy are used as the data for operationand control, in digital display of data the accuracy is reduced byconducting rounding off by counting a fraction of 0.5 or over as a wholenumber and disregarding the rest, etc., that is the data are rounded offfor data display, thus the efficiency in reading out data is enhancedallowing smooth photographing action.

17. While there is a necessity to manually set aperture value at acamera device side as an automatic light adjusting speedlight is used inspeedlight photographing, the aperture at a camera device side can beautomatically controlled from a speedlight side in a camera system ofthe present invention, thus speedlight photographing can be made quiteefficient.

18. Also while shutter speed at a camera device side needs to bemanually matched with the shutter speed synchronized with the speedlightor lower shutter speed when speedlight photographing is done in aconventional system, resulting in such fear as having erroneous handingin speedlight photographing, in a camera system of the present inventionsuch signal is issued from a speedlight side in speedlight photographingas controlling the shutter speed at camera side to the shutter speedsynchronized with the speedlight, allowing automatic control of theshutter speed of camera device to the shutter speed synchronized withthe speedlight. Such set up may be also possible that such control willnot be applied only when a shutter speed at lower side than thatsynchronized with the speedlight is selected at a camera device side,thus the extent of freedom in automatic speedlight photographing isenlarged.

19. While various conditions or data need to be set manually based onthe result of light measuring when photographing is done based on theresult of external light measuring for example spot light measuring orincident light measuring in a conventional automatic exposure controlcamera of TTL light measuring type, automatic exposure control based onthe result of light measuring can be done when external light measuringis done in a camera system of the present invention, thus field ofapplication of automatic exposure control is greatly enhanced.

As has been listed above numbers of advantages which can be obtained asa camera system of the present invention is employed and mechanical andelectrical problem incidental to exposure control can be consolidatedlyeliminated, thus it has great practical value.

Said technical thought of a camera system of the present invention isnot limited to the above mentioned example instead there may be variousmodifications thereof and it is quite natural as a camera system of thepresent invention intends to establish an efficient total system in aphotographic system.

Now, while explanations were not made in the above example, variousadditional function or modifications which are conceivable for making acamera system of the present invention to have further usefulness willbe explained below.

A. While power source is supplied to all functional parts duringoperation of a camera device in the above example, there may be partsnot requiring power supply depending on the functioning state of acamera. For example, while a camera device is doing exposure controlaction a parts actually requiring power supply is an output control partonly, but an input control part, and a central control part do not needpower supply. Therefore, such set up may be employed that when a cameradevice is in exposure control action that is between the sequences CC3,CC1, CC5, CC4, CC6, CC7 signals shown in FIG. 93, power supply to aninput control part and a central control part is stopped for savingpower.

B. While the above example has such set up that when a self setting isreleased as a camera device is in a state of self timer action, thesystem is returned to a state of waiting for shutter button, on theother hand it may have such set up that exposure control is done at asame time when a self setting is released. This can be effectivelyapplied to a case when photographing needs to be done immediately duringoperation of a self timer, thus a photographer can respond at once toshutter chances. Such set up can be realized by replacing the output ofNAND gate NAND8 in the circuit shown in FIG. 97 with the input of NANDgate NAND15.

C. While the above example has such set up that the brightness of adigital display device is always controlled to a constant value, thereading out of display may become easier as the brightness of display ischanged depending on the brightness of object field of view, as long assuch digital display is done within a finder. That is the brightness ofdisplay may be increased for bright object field of view, while thebrightness of display may be reduced for dark object field of view. Suchcontrol may be effected by controlling the voltage for driving a digitaldisplay device or changing the duty of pulse voltage based on the lightmeasuring information.

D. While the above example has such set up that newal of data of adigital display device is done with a certain time interval, for examplewhen brightness in object field of view suddenly changes there is apossibility that extremely by deviation is generated between the controlstate of a camera device and display content by a display device. A setup may be employed to renew the display data in a display device withoutrelationship with the renewal cycle of display data of a display devicewhen extremely big deviation takes place between display data andcontrol data.

E. While the operating time of a self timer in the above example is apredetermined constant time, such set up may be employed as making theoperating time of a self timer variable so that a photographer canselect free self time. Such set up may be realized easily by inputtingvariable data in the input at B1 to B4 of the digital selecter shown inFIG. 94 through a digital switch, etc.

F. While the above example has such set up that even when an automaticlight adjusting speedlight is used film sensitivity is set at aspeedlight side in speedlight photographing mode and control data forcontrolled aperture value are inputted in a camera device, such set upmay also be used that controlled aperture value is operated at a cameradevice side following film sensitivity set at a camera side based on thecontrol data being sent from a speedlight side to a camera device side,as far as film sensitivity is concerned. Such set up may be easilyrealized by adding such routine as adding film sensitivity to operationroutines at a time of speedlight photographing.

While a camera system of the present invention can employ various kindsof modified embodiments as have been mentioned above, there will be nospecific explanations made here as to the scope or extent which can beeasily presumed by extended thought for obtaining a realistic systemallowing reasonable and efficient picture taking, but those havingordinary skill in the cast can have good understanding on this matter.

What is claimed is:
 1. A photographic camera comprising:an exposureparameter indicating device including:(a) at least one display unithaving a plurality of light emitting elements each with a one-wayconductive characteristic and arranged so as to represent apredetermined pattern; (b) a plurality of switching elements connectedto a corresponding light emitting element of said display unit so as toenable at least one light emitting element corresponding to saidpredetermined pattern; and (c) timing pulse generating means having aplurality of timing pulse output lines connected to said display unit soas to apply a driving voltage in sequence to each of said light emittingelements having the one-way conductive characteristic; said film speedinformation generating device including:(a) a single data output line;(b) a film speed dial having positions corresponding to a plurality offilm speed information values; (c) a digital data plate having a numberof patterns corresponding to the positions of said film speed dial, eachof the patterns of said digital data plate composed of a plurality ofmarks arranged to represent one of said film speed information values;(d) detecting means having a plurality of electrical elements to receivethe timing pulses from said timing pulse generating means and fordetecting the marks on the digital data plate one after another insynchronism with each timing pulse, each of said electrical elements ofsaid detecting means being connected to one of the timing pulse outputlines of said timing pulse generating means corresponding thereto; (e)means coupled to the detecting means for supplying output digitalsignals from said detecting means corresponding to each of the marks;and (f) a plurality of diodes each connected between said electricalelements corresponding thereto and the timing pulse output linecorresponding thereto for preventing reverse current.
 2. A photographiccamera, comprising:an exposure parameter indicating device including:(a)at least one display unit having a plurality of light emitting elementseach with a one-way conductive characteristic and arranged to representa predetermined pattern; (b) a plurality of switching elements connectedto a corresponding light emitting element of said display unit so as toenable at least one light emitting element corresponding to saidpredetermined pattern; and (c) timing pulse generating means having aplurality of timing pulse output lines connected to correspondingdisplay segments of said display unit so as to apply in sequence adriving voltage to each of said light emitting elements having theone-way conductive characteristics; a film speed information generatingdevice including:(a) a single data output line; (b) a digital data platehaving a pattern of a plurality of marks representing the film speedinformation; (c) detecting means having a number of electrical elementsfor receiving the timing pulses from said timing pulse generating meansand for sequentially detecting the marks of said digital data plate insynchronism with each timing pulse, each of the electrical elements ofsaid detecting means being connected to one of the timing pulse outputlines of said timing pulse generation means corresponding thereto; (d)means coupled to the detecting means for supplying output digitalsignals from said detecting means corresponding to the states of saidmarks one after another to said single data output line; and (e) aplurality of diodes each connected between said electrical elementcorresponding thereto and the timing pulse output line correspondingthereto for preventing reverse current.
 3. A photographic cameracomprising:an exposure parameter indicating device including:(a) atleast one display unit having a plurality of light emitting elementsarranged to represent a predetermined pattern each with a one-wayconductive characteristic; (b) a plurality of switching elementsconnected to a corresponding light emitting element of said display unitto enable at least one light emitting element corresponding to saidpredetermined pattern; and (c) timing pulse generating means having aplurality of timing pulse output lines connected to said display unit soas to apply a driving voltage in sequence to each of said light emittingelements; a film speed information generating device including:(a) asingle data output line; (b) a film speed dial having positionscorresponding to a plurality of film speed information values; (c) adigital data plate provided with a number of patterns corresponding tothe positions of said film speed dial, each of the patterns of saiddigital data plate having a pluraltiy of conductive means which arearranged to indicate one of said film speed information values; (d)detecting means coupled to said pulse generating means and said platefor receiving timing pulses from said timing pulse generating means andincluding a plurality of electrical brushes arranged to be able to comeinto contact with the conductive means of said digital data platerespectively, each of said brushes of said detecting means beingconnected to one of the timing pulse output lines of said timing pulsegenerating means corresponding thereto; (e) conductive connection meansconnected to the conductive means of said digital data plate and to saidsingle data output line to transfer to said single data output lineoutput digital signals corresponding to the state of the conductivemeans of said digital data plate in contact with said brushes; and (f) aplurality of diodes each connected between said brushes correspondingthereto and the timing pulse output lines corresponding thereto forpreventing reverse current.
 4. A photographic camera according to claim3, wherein said digital data plate is mounted on an insulating plate. 5.A photographic camera according to claim 4, wherein said conductiveconnection means is arranged to said insulating plate.
 6. A photographiccamera according to claim 5, wherein the conductive means of said digialdata plate are arranged on a concentric circle respectively.
 7. Aphotographic camera according to claim 3, which further comprisesinverting means for inverting the digital signal from said conductiveconnection means.
 8. A photographic camera comprising:an exposureparameter indicating device including:(a) at least one display unithaving a plurality of light emitting elements each with a one-wayconductive characteristic and arranged to represent a predeterminedpattern; (b) a plurality of switching elements each connected to acorresponding light emitting element of said display unit so as toenable at least one light emitting element corresponding to saidpredetermined pattern; and (c) timing pulse generating means having aplurality of timing pulse output lines connected to correspondingdisplay segments of said display unit so as to apply in sequence adriving voltage to each of said light emitting elements; a minimumaperture information generating device including:(a) a single dataoutput line; (b) a digital data plate having an indication partconsisting of a plurality of marks representing a smallest aperturevalue; (c) detecting means having a number of electrical elementscoupled to said timing pulse generating means and said plate forreceiving said timing pulses and detecting the marks of said digitaldata plate one after another, in synchronism with each timing pulse,each of said electrical elements of said detecting means being connectedto one of the timing pulse output lines of said timing pulse generatingmeans corresponding thereto; (d) means coupled to said detecting meansfor sequentially supplying digital output signals of said detectingmeans corresponding to the states of said marks to said single dataoutput line; and (e) a plurality of diodes connected between said brushcorresponding thereto and the timing pulse output line correspondingthereto for preventing reverse current.
 9. A photographic camera capableof permitting use of an interchangeable lens and having a minimumaperture information generating device and an exposure parameterindicating device, said exposure parameter indicating deviceincluding:(a) at least one display unit having a plurality of lightemitting elements each with a one-way conductive characteristic andarranged to represent a predetermined pattern; (b) a plurality ofswitching elements connected to a corresponding light emitting elementof said display unit so as to enable at least one light emitting elementcorresponding to said predetermined pattern; and (c) timing pulsegenerating means having a plurality of timing pulse output linesconnected to said display unit so as to apply a driving voltage insequence to each of said light emitting elements having the one-wayconductive characteristic;said minimum aperture information generatingdevice including: (a) a single data output line; (b) signal meansmounted on said interchangeable lens, the signal means having a lengthcorresponding to a smallest aperture value; (c) a digital data platehaving a number of patterns corresponding to a plurality of smallestaperture information values, said patterns of said digital data platehaving a plurality of conductive means each arranged to indicate one ofsaid smallest aperture information values; (d) contact means which comesinto contact with one of said patterns corresponding to the length ofsaid signal means in response to attachment of said interchangeable lensto the camera; (e) detecting means coupled to the data plate forsequentially transferring, to said single data output line, outputdigital signals corresponding to the states of the conductive means ofsaid digital data plate contacted by said contact means in synchronismwith the timing pulses from said timing pulse generating means; and (f)a plurality of diodes each connected between said conductive meanscorresponding thereto and the timing pulse output line correspondingthereto for preventing reverse current.
 10. A camera according to claim9, wherein said digital data plate including a plurality of conductorrings; each of said conductive means which forms said patterns isarranged on each corresponding conductive ring.
 11. A camera accordingto claim 9, wherein each of said contact means includes a plurality ofbrushes connected to each corresponding conductive means.
 12. A cameraaccording to claim 11, wherein said brushes are electrically connectedto each other, and are also connected to said detecting means.
 13. Acamera according to claim 12, wherein said digital data plate includes acommon conductor ring connected to said detecting means.
 14. A cameraaccording to claim 11, wherein said signal means is mounted on aninterchangeable lens and includes a pin of a length corresponding to thesmallest aperture value.
 15. A camera according to claim 14, whichfurther comprises a lever for moving said brushes to a positioncorresponding to the length of the pin in response to attachment of saidinterchangeable lens to the camera.
 16. A photographic cameracomprising:an aperture size information generating device and anexposure parameter indicating device, said exposure parameter indicatingdevice including:(a) at least one display unit having a plurality oflight emitting elements each with a one-way conductive characteristicand arranged to represent a predetermined pattern; (b) a plurality ofswitching elements each connected to a light emitting element of saiddisplay unit to enable at least one light emitting element in saidpredetermined pattern; and (c) timing pulse generating means having aplurality of timing pulse output lines each connected to said displayunit to sequentially apply a driving voltage to each of said lightemitting elements having the one-way conductive characteristic; saidaperture size information generating device including:(a) a single dataoutput line; and (b) pulse transfer control means having a number ofelectrical control elements and connected between said timing pulsegenerating means and said single data output line to enable said timingpulses being sequentially generated to be transferred to the data outputline in accordance with selected aperture size information, each of saidelectrical elements of said pulse transfer control means correspondingto one of the timing pulse output lines of said timing pulse generatingmeans corresponding thereto; and (c) a plurality of diodes eachconnected between one of said electrical elements and the one of thetiming pulse output lines corresponding thereto for preventing a reversecurrent.
 17. A camera according to claim 16, wherein said pulse transfercontrol means comprises:(a) a plurality of conductive marks arranged todenote said aperture size information; (b) electrical connecting meansconnected to all of said marks and also to said single data output line;and (c) contact means having brushes contacting said conductive marks,said generating means being arranged to supply the pulses tocorresponding brushes of said contact means.
 18. A photographic cameracomprising:an exposure parameter indicating device including:(a) atleast one display unit having a plurality of light emitting elementseach with a one-way conductive characteristic and arranged to representa predetermined pattern; (b) a plurality of switching elements connectedto corresponding light emitting elements of said display unit so as toenable at least one light emitting element corresponding to saidpredetermined pattern; and (c) timing pulse generating means having aplurality of timing pulse output lines connected to said display unit soas to apply in sequence a driving voltage to each of said light emittingelements; an aperture size information generating device including:(a) asingle data output line; (b) a digital data plate having a patterncomposed of a plurality of conductive marks denoting aperture sizevalues; (c) detecting means having a plurality of electrical elementsand coupled to said timing pulse generating means for receiving saidtiming pulses and detecting the marks of said digital data plate oneafter another in synchronism with each of said timing pulses, each ofsaid electrical elements of said detecting means corresponding to one ofthe timing pulse output lines of said timing pulse generating means; (d)supply means coupled to said detecting means and said data output linefor sequentially supplying output digital signals which result from thecontact of said detecting means and the digital data plate to saidsingle data output line; and (e) a plurality of diodes each connectedbetween one of said electrical elements and the timing pulse output linecorresponding thereto for preventing reverse current.
 19. A photographiccamera comprising:an exposure parameter indicating device including:(a)at least one display unit having a plurality of light emitting elementseach with a one-way conductive characteristic and arranged to representa predetermined pattern; (b) a plurality of switching elements connectedto a corresponding light emitting element of said display unit to enableat least one light emitting element in said predetermined pattern; and(c) timing pulse generating means having a plurality of timing pulseoutput lines connected to said display unit so as to apply in sequence adriving voltage to each of said light emitting elements having theone-way conductive characteristic; an aperture size informationgenerating device including:(a) a single data output line; (b) anaperture dial having a plurality of positions corresponding to aplurality of aperture size information values; (c) a digital data platecoupled to said dial and having patterns corresponding to the positionsof said aperture dial, each of said patterns of the digital data plateincluding a plurality of conductive means arranged to denote one of saidaperture size information values; (d) contact means coupled to saidtiming pulse generating means for receiving said timing pulses andhaving a plurality of electrical brushes each being arranged to contactone of the conductive means of said digital data plate, each of saidbrushes corresponding to one of the timing pulse output lines of saidtiming pulse generating means; (e) conductive connection means connectedto the conductive means of said digital data plate and to said singledata output line to transfer to said single data output line outputsignals corresponding to the states of the conductive means of saiddigital data plate which are in contact with said brushes; and (f) aplurality of diodes each between one of said brushes and the timingpulse output line corresponding thereto for preventing reverse current.20. A camera according to claim 19, wherein said digital data plate isdisposed on an insulating plate.
 21. A camera according to claim 20,wherein said conductive connection means is arranged on said insulatingplate.
 22. A camera according to claim 20, wherein each of the pluralityof conductive means of said digital data plate is arranged with othersin a concentric circle.
 23. A camera according to claim 19, wherein saidsingle data output line comprises inverting means for inverting thestate of the digital signal from said conductive connection means.
 24. Aphotographic camera comprising:an exposure parameter indicating deviceincluding:(a) at least one display unit having a plurality of lightemitting elements each with a one-way conductive characteristic andarranged to represent a predetermined pattern; (b) a plurality ofswitching elements each connected to a light emitting element of saiddisplay unit so as to enable at least one light emitting element in saidpredetermined pattern; and (c) timing pulse generating means having aplurality of timing pulse output lines connected to said display unit soas to apply in sequence a driving voltage to each of said light emittingelements having the one-way conductive characteristic; a shutter speedinformation generating device including:(a) a single data output line;and (b) pulse transfer control means having a plurality of electricalelements and connected between said timing pulse generating means andsaid single data output line to enable said timing pulses beinggenerated in sequence to be transferred to the data output line inaccordance with selected shutter speed information, each of saidelectrical elements of said pulse transfer control means correspondingto one of the timing pulse output lines of said timing pulse generatingmeans; and (c) a plurality of diodes each connected between one of saidelectrical elements and the timing pulse output line correspondingthereto for preventing reverse current.
 25. A camera according to claim24, wherein said pulse transfer control means comprising:(a) a pluralityof conductive marks arranged to denote said shutter speed information;(b) electrical connecting means connected to all of said conductivemarks and also to said single data output line; and (c) contact meansprovided with brushes which are arranged to contact with each of saidconductive marks, said timing pulses being arranged to be supplied tocorresponding brushes of said contact means.
 26. A photographic camera,comprising:an exposure parameter indicating device including:(a) atleast one display unit having a plurality of light emitting elementseach with a one-way conductive characteristic and arranged to representa predetermined pattern; (b) a plurality of switching elements eachconnected to a light emitting element of said display unit to enable atleast one light emitting element in said predetermined pattern; and (c)timing pulse generating means having a plurality of timing pulse outputlines connected to said display unit so as to apply in sequence adriving voltage to each of said light emitting elements having theone-way conductive characteristic; a shutter speed informationgenerating device including:(a) a single data output line; (b) a digitaldata plate having a pattern composed of a plurality of conductive markswhich denote shutter speed information; (c) detecting means having anumber of electrical elements and coupled to said timing pulsegenerating means for receiving said timing pulses and detecting themarks of said digital data plate one after another in synchronism witheach of said timing pulses, each of said electrical elements of saiddetecting means corresponding to one of the timing pulse output lines ofsaid timing pulse generating means; (d) supply means coupled to saiddetecting means and said output line for sequentially supplying outputdigital signals which results from the contact of said detecting meansand the digital data plate to said single data output line; and (e) aplurality of diodes each connected between one of said electricalelements and the timing pulse output lines corresponding thereto forpreventing reverse current.
 27. A photographic camera having a shutterspeed information generating device and an exposure parameter indicatingdevice,said exposure parameter indicating device including:(a) at leastone display unit having a plurality of light emitting elements each witha one-way conductive characteristic and arranged to represent apredetermined pattern; (b) a plurality of switching elements eachconnected to a corresponding light emitting element of said display unitto enable at least one light emitting element in said predeterminedpattern; and (c) timing pulse generating means having a plurality oftiming pulse output lines each connected to said display unit so as tosequentially apply a driving voltage to each of said light emittingelements having the one-way conductive characteristic; said shutterspeed information generating device including:(a) a single data outputline; (b) a shutter speed dial having a plurality of positionscorresponding to a plurality of shutter speed information values; (c) adigital data plate coupled to said dial and having patternscorresponding to the positions of said shutter speed dial, each of saidpatterns of the digital data plate having a plurality of conductivemeans which are arranged to denote one of said shutter speed informationvalues; (d) contact means coupled to said timing pulse generating meansfor receiving said timing pulses and having a plurality of electricalbrushes each being arranged to contact one of the conductive means ofsaid digital data plate, each of said brushes corresponding to one ofthe timing pulse output lines of said timing pulse generating means; (e)conductive connection means connected to the conductive means of saiddigital data plate and to said single data output line to transfer tosaid single data output line signals corresponding to the states of theconductive means of said digital data plate which are in contact withsaid electrical brushes; and (f) a plurality of diodes each connectedbetween one of said brushes and the timing pulse output linecorresponding thereto for preventing reverse current.
 28. A cameraaccording to claim 27, wherein said digital data plate is disposed on aninsulating plate.
 29. A camera according to claim 28, wherein saidconductive means is arranged on said insulating plate.
 30. A cameraaccording to claim 28, wherein each of the plurality of conductive meansof said digital data plate is arranged with others on a concentriccircle.
 31. A camera according to claim 27, wherein said single dataoutput line comprises inverting means for inverting the state of thedigital signal from said conductive connection means.
 32. A photographiccamera capable of permitting exposure value control either in a shutterpriority automatic exposure mode or in an aperture priority automaticexposure mode, the camera comprising:(a) an exposure parameterindicating device, the indicating device including:(I) at least onedisplay unit having a plurality of light emitting elements each with aone-way conductive characteristic and arranged to represent apredetermined pattern; (II) a plurality of switch elements eachconnected to one of said light emitting elements of said display unit soas to enable at least one light emitting element having the one-wayconductive characteristic in said predetermined pattern; and (III)timing pulse generating means having a plurality of timing pulse outputlines connected to said display unit so as to sequentially apply adriving voltage to each of said light emitting elements having theone-way conductive characteristic; (b) a single data output line; (c)mode switch means selectively switched between a first state and asecond state according to the mode desired; (d) setting means forsetting an exposure parameter factor; (e) a digital data plate having aplurality of conductive marks arranged to denote said exposure parameterfactor and associated with said setting means; (f) electrical connectingmeans connected to all of said conductive marks and also to said singledata output line; (g) contact means provided with brushes capable ofcontacting with said conductive marks and for sequentially contactingthe marks corresponding to the exposure parameter factor selected bysaid setting means, said timing pulses being arranged to be supplied tocorresponding ones of said brushes of said contact means; (h) sortingmeans coupled to the output line for dividing the output signals of saidsingle data output line into a mode signal according to the state ofsaid mode switch and a digital exposure parameter value according to theexposure parameter factor; (i) exposure control means; (j) operationstep control means for controlling said exposure control means toperform an exposure control in said shutter priority automatic exposuremode according to the digital exposure parameter value when the modesignal represents the speed reference automatic exposure mode and forcausing the exposure control means to perform an exposure control insaid aperture priority automatic exposure mode according to the digitalexposure parameter value when the mode signal represents the aperturepreference automatic exposure mode; and (k) a plurality of diodes eachconnected between one of said brushes and a corresponding one of thetiming pulse output lines for preventing reverse current.
 33. Aphotographic camera according to claim 32, wherein said mode switchmeans is connected to said single data output line and to correspondingones of the output terminals of said timing pulse generating means. 34.A photographic camera according to claim 32, further comprisingactuating means for switching the mode switch means between the firstand second states in response to the selected mode.
 35. A digitaldisplay device for a camera, comprising:digital data generating meanshaving a plurality of bits and generating first digital datacorresponding to photographic information, circuit means to addprescribed second digital data to prescribed bits of said first digitaldata, and display means which is located at a position higher than thatof said prescribed bits of the first digital data to which the seconddigital data are added and is connected to said circuit means fordecoding and displaying said first digital data after said addition. 36.A camera, comprising:a digital indicator including a plurality of lightemitting diodes arranged to indicate prescribed patterns relating tophotographic information, a plurality of switching means respectivelyconnected to each of said light emitting diodes related for selectivelyenabling the light emitting diodes to make a display, a photographicinformation setting line including a plurality of bits to be selectivelyturned ON or OFF corresponding to the set photographic information,timing pulse generating means having a plurality of output linesconnecting to each of the related light emitting diodes for supplyingdriving voltage in sequence to each of the light emitting diodes and atthe same time being connected to the photographic information settingline for supplying information readout signals in sequence to therelated bits of the photographic information setting line, detectionmeans for generating output signals being synchronized with the timingpulses from said timing pulse generation means and at the same timecorresponding to the ON, OFF state of each bit of the photographicinformation setting line, and a plurality of one-way conductive elementshaving one of the electrodes in each element connected to an output lineof the timing pulse generating means and having the other electrode ineach element connected to each bit of the photographic informationsetting line related to each output line, each of said elements beingconnected in a direction to prevent reverse current.
 37. A cameracomprising:(a) signal changeover means responsive to a changeover signalfor receiving at least two analog signals to selectively produce one ofthe received analog signals depending on the changeover signal; (b)changeover signal applying means for applying to said signal changeovermeans a changeover signal related to at least one of said analogsignals; (c) analog-to-digital converting means connected to said signalchangeover means for converting the selected analog signal from saidsignal changeover means into a digital signal; and (d) exposure controlmeans, connected to said analog-to-digital converting means, forcontrolling an exposure value based on the digital signal from saidanalog-to-digital converting means, (e) said exposure control meansbeing responsive to the changeover signal so as to control the exposurevalue in a photographic mode corresponding to the changeover signal.